Services and Rates

(210) 385 8658San Antonio, Texas · Since 2012
Menu +

Services and Rates

A Considered Scope. A Clear Investment.

Strategic communication, custom websites, creative production, and business systems for established businesses and organizations. Review the published services, then discuss the scope with Julie Good.

A Separate November Offer

One Event. One Complete Campaign. $1,000.

The November Event Campaigns are $1,000 per campaign plus applicable tax, booked during November 2026. Each campaign includes a press sheet, artwork, three narrated short films and planned GCM distribution. This November offer is separate from the published rates below.

Choose the edition that belongs to your occasion.

Selected Engagements

Plan the Investment Around the Work

Business Websites

$13,800 one time

Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)

Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.

Review the Scope
Complete scope and billing

Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)

$13,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 responsive website pages: Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.
  • 1 copy and SEO pass: Light copywriting/editing to brief up to 2,500 total words; titles/meta and basic on-page structure for every included page.
  • 1 contact and measurement setup: One contact form up to eight fields with one email route, one analytics property connection and up to three basic events.
  • 1 handoff: Mobile/desktop checks, editing guide and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business, WordPress site/domain and hosting account; one form route.
Pages, words and records
Up to five pages, 2,500 words, 25 supplied images and six work examples.
Formats
Responsive WordPress pages; optimized images; PDF editing guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute training/handoff.
Client inputs
Brand files, page brief, factual service claims, supplied photography, approved privacy text and hosting/domain access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap/copy brief
  • Review custom design
  • Build five pages and integrations
  • Verify mobile/desktop and form route
  • Train and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pages
  • Custom business application
  • Mailbox setup or migration
  • Hosting and paid licenses

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Online Commerce

$31,300 one time

Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)

One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.

Review the Scope
Complete scope and billing

Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 standard online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.
  • 250 entered or imported SKUs: Up to 250 distinct sellable SKUs/variants from a client-prepared consistent import sheet; up to four supplied images each.
  • 1 commerce and recovery setup: One payment provider, up to five shipping zones and 10 rules, client-approved tax settings and a three-email abandoned-cart sequence where platform/consent permits.
  • 1 merchant handoff: Record-count reconciliation, sandbox checkout/filter tests and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, currency and inventory location; one payment and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
250 SKUs including variants; 20 categories; 10 filter attributes; eight page/template structures; three emails up to 250 words each.
Formats
Platform-native store and CSV import map; optimized product media; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute catalog workshop, two 60-minute reviews and one 90-minute merchant training.
Client inputs
Complete catalog/variant data, photos, taxonomy, shipping/tax decisions, email consent rules and client-owned accounts.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve catalog schema and rules
  • Design store/category system
  • Import and reconcile 250 SKUs
  • Configure cart sequence and test checkout
  • Train merchant

Separate costs and exclusions

  • ERP/POS synchronization
  • Product photography
  • Custom fulfillment software
  • Platform, transaction and email charges

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Brand Identity

$31,300 one time

Full Brand Identity Package

Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.

Review the Scope
Complete scope and billing

Full Brand Identity Package

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 premium identity scope: Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.
  • 1 naming and tagline engagement: Includes the proposed gcm-1108 candidate, shortlist and preliminary availability process for one final name/tagline pair; charged once within this package.
  • 1 brand story: Up to 1,000 words plus a 150-word summary.
  • 12 custom brand-library assets: Six original simple icons, three social templates and three document/cover templates, in one selected editable design tool.
  • 1 photography direction and reference shoot: One visual/shot-direction brief and one reference shoot up to 120 minutes at one agreed accessible local setting; 10 edited reference images for brand direction. Client approvals/permissions and any separately priced venue/equipment must be identified in scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and one approved name; one shared design workspace; 12 library assets.
Pages, words and records
Premium guide 24 pages; brand story up to 1,150 words across two lengths; 12 library assets; 10 reference-shoot images.
Formats
Identity vector/raster exports; PDF guide; editable library in one agreed tool; editable story.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute strategy/naming workshop, one 60-minute naming review, one 60-minute identity review and one 60-minute library handoff.
Client inputs
Brand/audience evidence, naming criteria, intended applications, existing rights and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
8–10 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming and brand brief
  • Select name after preliminary checks
  • Develop premium identity
  • Write story and build 12 assets
  • Handoff complete library

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal trademark clearance or filing
  • Additional subbrands
  • Printing and paid stock libraries
  • Campaign photography or video beyond the included reference shoot

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Ongoing Social Media

$9,400 / month

Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope

16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.

Review the Scope
Complete scope and billing

Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope

$9,400 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 24 original feed content units per month: 16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 24 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 72 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 3 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 96 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 4 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 8 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 24 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 48 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 120 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 120 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 60-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
4 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
24 originals including 8 videos; 6 carousels at up to five slides; 72 added platform adaptations; 96 feed placements; 8 story sets/24 frames/48 story placements; 120 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 60-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

For Business Owners and Leadership Teams

A Proposal Your Team Can Evaluate

A project may combine a website, ordering, ticketing, content, and business systems. Julie Good develops a coordinated scope that identifies the deliverables, responsibilities, schedule, and investment. The work begins with a clear agreement.

The Good Creative Media Rate Card

Find the Work You Need

179 Services

Published Services, Scopes, and Prices
ServiceIncluded ScopePublished PriceDetails
Strategy ConsultationStrategy & Discovery
Included scope and billing

Strategy Consultation

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 60-minute strategy session: Discuss one defined business or communications problem with up to three client participants.
  • 1 decision memo: One page of recommendations, agreed priority and next useful decision.
  • 1 existing engagement credit: Existing engagement credit: $700 when a related engagement begins within 60 days, under the existing product terms.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and one defined decision; up to three client participants.
Pages, words and records
One short intake form; one-page written recommendation; no separately scoped research report.
Formats
Video or telephone meeting; PDF memo.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute paid session; asynchronous intake is included, with no separate discovery call.
Client inputs
One business question, essential context and one designated approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Existing scheduling target: within five business days, subject to accepted calendar availability. Deliver the one-page recommendation within 2 business days after the scheduled 60-minute session and complete inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual clarification of the memo within the agreed problem; a new problem or another strategy session is additional work.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm problem and intake
  • Conduct 60-minute session
  • Deliver decision memo

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation of recommended work
  • Legal, tax or financial opinions
  • Additional strategy sessions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Strategy Consultation

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 60-minute strategy session: Discuss one defined business or communications problem with up to three client participants.
  • 1 decision memo: One page of recommendations, agreed priority and next useful decision.
  • 1 existing engagement credit: Existing engagement credit: $700 when a related engagement begins within 60 days, under the existing product terms.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and one defined decision; up to three client participants.
Pages, words and records
One short intake form; one-page written recommendation; no separately scoped research report.
Formats
Video or telephone meeting; PDF memo.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute paid session; asynchronous intake is included, with no separate discovery call.
Client inputs
One business question, essential context and one designated approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Existing scheduling target: within five business days, subject to accepted calendar availability. Deliver the one-page recommendation within 2 business days after the scheduled 60-minute session and complete inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual clarification of the memo within the agreed problem; a new problem or another strategy session is additional work.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm problem and intake
  • Conduct 60-minute session
  • Deliver decision memo

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation of recommended work
  • Legal, tax or financial opinions
  • Additional strategy sessions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$875 one timeView Scope
Annual Strategy RetainerStrategy & Discovery
Included scope and billing

Annual Strategy Retainer

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly 90-minute working session: One business or marketing priority reviewed with up to four client participants.
  • 1 quarterly written check-in: Every third service month, up to three pages reviewing decisions, priorities and next actions.
  • 4 advisory requests per month: Four asynchronous requests per month on the agreed strategy; each covers one question, up to three client-supplied source pages and one written response up to 300 words. The accepted order states the business-day response schedule.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization; standing email and text advisory channels; up to four meeting participants.
Pages, words and records
Four proposed bounded advisory requests per month; one three-page quarterly written check-in. Existing standing-access commitments preserved.
Formats
Video meeting; email or agreed workspace; PDF or shared document.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute strategy session each month; first session establishes priorities.
Client inputs
Monthly priorities, decision context, existing results and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly delivery cycles begin within 5–10 business days of the scheduled start; request response timing is agreed in the proposal after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm monthly priorities
  • Hold monthly working session
  • Respond to bounded advisory requests
  • Deliver quarterly written check-in every third service month

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Execution of separate marketing campaigns
  • Unlimited or emergency access
  • Legal, tax and investment advice

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Annual Strategy Retainer

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly 90-minute working session: One business or marketing priority reviewed with up to four client participants.
  • 1 quarterly written check-in: Every third service month, up to three pages reviewing decisions, priorities and next actions.
  • 4 advisory requests per month: Four asynchronous requests per month on the agreed strategy; each covers one question, up to three client-supplied source pages and one written response up to 300 words. The accepted order states the business-day response schedule.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization; standing email and text advisory channels; up to four meeting participants.
Pages, words and records
Four proposed bounded advisory requests per month; one three-page quarterly written check-in. Existing standing-access commitments preserved.
Formats
Video meeting; email or agreed workspace; PDF or shared document.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute strategy session each month; first session establishes priorities.
Client inputs
Monthly priorities, decision context, existing results and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly delivery cycles begin within 5–10 business days of the scheduled start; request response timing is agreed in the proposal after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm monthly priorities
  • Hold monthly working session
  • Respond to bounded advisory requests
  • Deliver quarterly written check-in every third service month

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Execution of separate marketing campaigns
  • Unlimited or emergency access
  • Legal, tax and investment advice

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,000 / monthView Scope
Discovery and Brief WritingStrategy & Discovery
Included scope and billing

Discovery and Brief Writing

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 stakeholder interviews: Up to 45 minutes each with client-selected participants.
  • 1 source-material review: Up to 50 supplied pages, two current communication channels and three competitors.
  • 1 creative brief: Up to 10 pages with objective, audience, positioning, message hierarchy, deliverables, constraints and approval roles.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one project brief, up to four stakeholders and two existing communication channels.
Pages, words and records
Up to 50 input pages; one brief up to 10 pages; three competitor examples.
Formats
PDF and editable document.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute kickoff, up to four 45-minute interviews and one 45-minute brief review.
Client inputs
Existing strategy, audience evidence, past creative, decision constraints, stakeholder availability and named approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1–2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Collect inputs and interview schedule
  • Complete up to four interviews and desk review
  • Draft creative brief
  • Consolidate feedback and deliver final brief

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Market survey recruitment
  • Campaign production
  • Additional organizations or separate briefs

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Discovery and Brief Writing

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 stakeholder interviews: Up to 45 minutes each with client-selected participants.
  • 1 source-material review: Up to 50 supplied pages, two current communication channels and three competitors.
  • 1 creative brief: Up to 10 pages with objective, audience, positioning, message hierarchy, deliverables, constraints and approval roles.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one project brief, up to four stakeholders and two existing communication channels.
Pages, words and records
Up to 50 input pages; one brief up to 10 pages; three competitor examples.
Formats
PDF and editable document.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute kickoff, up to four 45-minute interviews and one 45-minute brief review.
Client inputs
Existing strategy, audience evidence, past creative, decision constraints, stakeholder availability and named approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1–2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Collect inputs and interview schedule
  • Complete up to four interviews and desk review
  • Draft creative brief
  • Consolidate feedback and deliver final brief

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Market survey recruitment
  • Campaign production
  • Additional organizations or separate briefs

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,200 one timeView Scope
Marketing AuditStrategy & Discovery
Included scope and billing

Marketing Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 cross-channel audit: Review website, organic search, up to three social profiles, one email platform and one advertising account.
  • 1 prioritized findings report: Up to 20 pages with evidence and a three-priority action plan, plus an ordered supporting backlog.
  • 1 measurement inventory: Up to 15 existing measures or tracking events, with data gaps recorded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one website/domain, three social profiles, one email platform and one ad account.
Pages, words and records
Website sample up to 25 pages; up to 90 days of supplied performance data; up to five competitors.
Formats
PDF report and editable issue backlog.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 60-minute findings presentation.
Client inputs
Read-only analytics/account access, existing objectives, campaign history and authorized access to supplied reports.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm audit access and samples
  • Review channels and evidence
  • Rank findings
  • Present action backlog

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementing audit recommendations
  • Independent financial audit
  • Paid audience research
  • Guaranteed revenue or ranking improvements

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a place on the production calendar. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and scope before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the audit, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Marketing Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 cross-channel audit: Review website, organic search, up to three social profiles, one email platform and one advertising account.
  • 1 prioritized findings report: Up to 20 pages with evidence and a three-priority action plan, plus an ordered supporting backlog.
  • 1 measurement inventory: Up to 15 existing measures or tracking events, with data gaps recorded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one website/domain, three social profiles, one email platform and one ad account.
Pages, words and records
Website sample up to 25 pages; up to 90 days of supplied performance data; up to five competitors.
Formats
PDF report and editable issue backlog.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 60-minute findings presentation.
Client inputs
Read-only analytics/account access, existing objectives, campaign history and authorized access to supplied reports.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm audit access and samples
  • Review channels and evidence
  • Rank findings
  • Present action backlog

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementing audit recommendations
  • Independent financial audit
  • Paid audience research
  • Guaranteed revenue or ranking improvements

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a place on the production calendar. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and scope before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the audit, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Brand AuditStrategy & Discovery
Included scope and billing

Brand Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand evidence review: Review one existing identity, message set and customer-facing asset sample.
  • 5 competitor brand comparisons: Evaluate publicly observable positioning, visual conventions and messages for five selected competitors.
  • 4 audience interviews: Up to 30 minutes each with client-recruited participants.
  • 1 brand audit report: Up to 20 pages with message clarity findings and prioritized recommendations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and brand; five competitors; four client-recruited interview participants.
Pages, words and records
Up to 30 supplied brand assets or pages reviewed; report up to 20 pages.
Formats
PDF report, visual evidence board and editable recommendation list.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff, four 30-minute interviews and one 60-minute findings presentation.
Client inputs
Current brand files, customer context, prior research and participant recruitment/consent.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm brand sample and participants
  • Review assets and competitors
  • Conduct interviews
  • Present prioritized brand findings

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Identity redesign
  • Trademark clearance
  • Statistically representative market research

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brand Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand evidence review: Review one existing identity, message set and customer-facing asset sample.
  • 5 competitor brand comparisons: Evaluate publicly observable positioning, visual conventions and messages for five selected competitors.
  • 4 audience interviews: Up to 30 minutes each with client-recruited participants.
  • 1 brand audit report: Up to 20 pages with message clarity findings and prioritized recommendations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and brand; five competitors; four client-recruited interview participants.
Pages, words and records
Up to 30 supplied brand assets or pages reviewed; report up to 20 pages.
Formats
PDF report, visual evidence board and editable recommendation list.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff, four 30-minute interviews and one 60-minute findings presentation.
Client inputs
Current brand files, customer context, prior research and participant recruitment/consent.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm brand sample and participants
  • Review assets and competitors
  • Conduct interviews
  • Present prioritized brand findings

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Identity redesign
  • Trademark clearance
  • Statistically representative market research

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Trademark Line or SloganBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Trademark Line or Slogan

$2,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 tagline candidates: Five distinct written options addressing one approved positioning brief.
  • 1 selected final tagline: One refined line, up to 12 words, with usage rationale.
  • 1 preliminary USPTO availability check: Document a public-record search for the selected line, query/date and observed potentially similar marks; attorney review remains separate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one product or business positioning brief, one jurisdictional search source (USPTO).
Pages, words and records
Five candidates; one final line up to 12 words; up to two pages of rationale/search notes.
Formats
Editable text and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery interview and one 30-minute shortlist review.
Client inputs
Brand positioning, prohibited terms, audience, intended goods/services and existing marks.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming brief
  • Present five candidates
  • Refine one selection
  • Document preliminary USPTO search

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal trademark clearance or registrability opinion
  • Trademark filing
  • Guarantee of availability, registration or enforceability

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Trademark Line or Slogan

$2,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 tagline candidates: Five distinct written options addressing one approved positioning brief.
  • 1 selected final tagline: One refined line, up to 12 words, with usage rationale.
  • 1 preliminary USPTO availability check: Document a public-record search for the selected line, query/date and observed potentially similar marks; attorney review remains separate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one product or business positioning brief, one jurisdictional search source (USPTO).
Pages, words and records
Five candidates; one final line up to 12 words; up to two pages of rationale/search notes.
Formats
Editable text and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery interview and one 30-minute shortlist review.
Client inputs
Brand positioning, prohibited terms, audience, intended goods/services and existing marks.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming brief
  • Present five candidates
  • Refine one selection
  • Document preliminary USPTO search

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal trademark clearance or registrability opinion
  • Trademark filing
  • Guarantee of availability, registration or enforceability

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,000 one timeView Scope
Color Palette and Type System OnlyBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Color Palette and Type System Only

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 supporting color palette: Six specified colors with primary/secondary roles and HEX/RGB/CMYK approximations.
  • 1 type pairing: One heading family and one body family, including specified weights and fallback stacks.
  • 1 usage sheet: Up to six pages showing existing-logo pairings, type hierarchy and contrast observations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing logo system and one brand; no logo redesign.
Pages, words and records
Six color specifications; two font families; up to six usage pages.
Formats
PDF guide; ASE palette when supported; font license/source links; no font redistribution without permission.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery meeting and one 30-minute review.
Client inputs
Vector logo files, current brand use, target media and font license or preferred licensing budget.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect existing logo and media needs
  • Propose palette and type pairing
  • Review contrast and sample uses
  • Deliver specifications

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Logo redraw or redesign
  • Custom font development
  • Full brand guidelines

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Color Palette and Type System Only

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 supporting color palette: Six specified colors with primary/secondary roles and HEX/RGB/CMYK approximations.
  • 1 type pairing: One heading family and one body family, including specified weights and fallback stacks.
  • 1 usage sheet: Up to six pages showing existing-logo pairings, type hierarchy and contrast observations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing logo system and one brand; no logo redesign.
Pages, words and records
Six color specifications; two font families; up to six usage pages.
Formats
PDF guide; ASE palette when supported; font license/source links; no font redistribution without permission.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery meeting and one 30-minute review.
Client inputs
Vector logo files, current brand use, target media and font license or preferred licensing budget.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect existing logo and media needs
  • Propose palette and type pairing
  • Review contrast and sample uses
  • Deliver specifications

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Logo redraw or redesign
  • Custom font development
  • Full brand guidelines

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Wordmark OnlyBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Wordmark Only

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 wordmark concepts: Three distinct typographic directions for one approved business name.
  • 1 final wordmark: One selected wordmark with horizontal primary and one compact arrangement, in positive, reversed and single-color variants.
  • 1 delivery package: Organized SVG, PDF, PNG and JPEG exports with a two-page usage sheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business name, one brand and one final wordmark; no separate symbol system.
Pages, words and records
Three initial concepts; two final arrangements; usage sheet up to two pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vectors; PNG transparent exports at 512, 1024 and 2048 px longest edge; JPEG preview.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 30-minute concept presentation.
Client inputs
Approved name/spelling, audience, references and known trademark or font restrictions.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two refinements of the selected wordmark are included, preserving the current promise. Each refinement uses one consolidated feedback set within the approved direction; a replacement name or concept is a written scope change.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve wordmark brief
  • Present three concepts
  • Complete two refinements of selected concept
  • Package final vectors and previews

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Business naming
  • Standalone logo symbol
  • Legal trademark clearance

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Wordmark Only

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 wordmark concepts: Three distinct typographic directions for one approved business name.
  • 1 final wordmark: One selected wordmark with horizontal primary and one compact arrangement, in positive, reversed and single-color variants.
  • 1 delivery package: Organized SVG, PDF, PNG and JPEG exports with a two-page usage sheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business name, one brand and one final wordmark; no separate symbol system.
Pages, words and records
Three initial concepts; two final arrangements; usage sheet up to two pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vectors; PNG transparent exports at 512, 1024 and 2048 px longest edge; JPEG preview.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 30-minute concept presentation.
Client inputs
Approved name/spelling, audience, references and known trademark or font restrictions.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two refinements of the selected wordmark are included, preserving the current promise. Each refinement uses one consolidated feedback set within the approved direction; a replacement name or concept is a written scope change.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve wordmark brief
  • Present three concepts
  • Complete two refinements of selected concept
  • Package final vectors and previews

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Business naming
  • Standalone logo symbol
  • Legal trademark clearance

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Brand Guidelines DocumentBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Brand Guidelines Document

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand guidelines document: Up to 24 designed pages documenting existing marks, clear space, palette, typography, imagery examples, voice/tone and correct/incorrect use; deliver PDF plus web-readable version.
  • 8 application examples: Eight simple examples using existing brand assets, incorporated into the document.
  • 1 asset inventory: Up to 30 supplied brand files checked and indexed for practical use.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing brand; up to 30 supplied files; guidance for web, social and basic print use.
Pages, words and records
Guidelines up to 24 pages; eight application examples.
Formats
PDF and web-readable HTML version, plus editable source as specified in proposal.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute guidelines review.
Client inputs
Approved identity assets, license records, current use examples and factual brand rules.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory existing brand files
  • Draft rules and application examples
  • Review with approval owner
  • Deliver guidelines and index

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Creating a new logo or brand strategy
  • Trademark clearance
  • Producing final campaign collateral

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brand Guidelines Document

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand guidelines document: Up to 24 designed pages documenting existing marks, clear space, palette, typography, imagery examples, voice/tone and correct/incorrect use; deliver PDF plus web-readable version.
  • 8 application examples: Eight simple examples using existing brand assets, incorporated into the document.
  • 1 asset inventory: Up to 30 supplied brand files checked and indexed for practical use.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing brand; up to 30 supplied files; guidance for web, social and basic print use.
Pages, words and records
Guidelines up to 24 pages; eight application examples.
Formats
PDF and web-readable HTML version, plus editable source as specified in proposal.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute guidelines review.
Client inputs
Approved identity assets, license records, current use examples and factual brand rules.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory existing brand files
  • Draft rules and application examples
  • Review with approval owner
  • Deliver guidelines and index

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Creating a new logo or brand strategy
  • Trademark clearance
  • Producing final campaign collateral

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Logo System, StarterBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Logo System, Starter

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 identity concept routes: Two proposed wordmark-plus-icon directions for one brand.
  • 1 final starter logo system: One wordmark and one complementary icon or monogram; primary horizontal and stacked lockups with positive, reversed and single-color versions.
  • 1 support palette and type pairing: Five specified colors and one heading/body font pairing, with web/print specifications.
  • 1 quick-use guide: Up to eight pages with spacing, minimum-size examples and export index.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and approved name; two concept routes; one final system.
Pages, words and records
Five palette colors; two font families; guide up to eight pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vector masters; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute concept review.
Client inputs
Approved name, brand audience/positioning, competitive references and existing rights constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3–4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity brief
  • Present two concept routes
  • Refine one wordmark/icon system
  • Deliver guide and exports

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Naming
  • Custom illustration library
  • Legal trademark search/filing

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Logo System, Starter

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 identity concept routes: Two proposed wordmark-plus-icon directions for one brand.
  • 1 final starter logo system: One wordmark and one complementary icon or monogram; primary horizontal and stacked lockups with positive, reversed and single-color versions.
  • 1 support palette and type pairing: Five specified colors and one heading/body font pairing, with web/print specifications.
  • 1 quick-use guide: Up to eight pages with spacing, minimum-size examples and export index.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and approved name; two concept routes; one final system.
Pages, words and records
Five palette colors; two font families; guide up to eight pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vector masters; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute concept review.
Client inputs
Approved name, brand audience/positioning, competitive references and existing rights constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3–4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity brief
  • Present two concept routes
  • Refine one wordmark/icon system
  • Deliver guide and exports

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Naming
  • Custom illustration library
  • Legal trademark search/filing

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Naming and TaglineBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Naming and Tagline

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 name candidates: Ten candidates for one business, product or line naming brief; three finalists with rationale.
  • 6 tagline candidates: Six lines supporting the selected name or existing approved name.
  • 1 final name and tagline pair: One selected name and one line with rationale and spelling guidance.
  • 1 preliminary availability report: Document public USPTO and domain/handle observations for three shortlisted names, with date and query limitations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One naming brief and brand; three shortlisted names receive preliminary checks.
Pages, words and records
Ten candidate names, three finalists, six proposed tagline candidates; final rationale/search report up to six pages.
Formats
Editable text and PDF; no account or domain registration included.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute shortlist presentation.
Client inputs
Goods/services, intended markets, existing marks, naming restrictions and authorized decision maker.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming criteria
  • Develop candidate names/lines
  • Shortlist and perform preliminary research
  • Deliver approved pair and search observations

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal clearance, filing or trademark opinion
  • Domain purchases or reserved handles
  • Guarantee of availability or registration

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Naming and Tagline

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 name candidates: Ten candidates for one business, product or line naming brief; three finalists with rationale.
  • 6 tagline candidates: Six lines supporting the selected name or existing approved name.
  • 1 final name and tagline pair: One selected name and one line with rationale and spelling guidance.
  • 1 preliminary availability report: Document public USPTO and domain/handle observations for three shortlisted names, with date and query limitations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One naming brief and brand; three shortlisted names receive preliminary checks.
Pages, words and records
Ten candidate names, three finalists, six proposed tagline candidates; final rationale/search report up to six pages.
Formats
Editable text and PDF; no account or domain registration included.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute shortlist presentation.
Client inputs
Goods/services, intended markets, existing marks, naming restrictions and authorized decision maker.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming criteria
  • Develop candidate names/lines
  • Shortlist and perform preliminary research
  • Deliver approved pair and search observations

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal clearance, filing or trademark opinion
  • Domain purchases or reserved handles
  • Guarantee of availability or registration

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Brand RefreshBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Brand Refresh

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 existing-mark refinement: Refine one existing logo direction with two presentation alternatives; preserve the approved name and basic brand architecture.
  • 1 updated support system: Six-color palette, one heading/body pairing and four sample brand applications.
  • 1 refresh guide and export set: Up to 12 pages documenting the changed mark, palette, typography and migration notes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing brand and logo family; four sample uses, no separate subbrands.
Pages, words and records
Two refinements proposed as alternatives; one selected refresh; guide up to 12 pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vectors; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute direction review.
Client inputs
Original vector files, evidence of existing equity, current usage inventory and font/image rights.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Assess retained brand equity
  • Present refinement alternatives
  • Finalize support system
  • Deliver refreshed assets and transition notes

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New brand architecture or business name
  • Full rebrand from a blank brief
  • Updating all deployed signs, pages or collateral

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brand Refresh

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 existing-mark refinement: Refine one existing logo direction with two presentation alternatives; preserve the approved name and basic brand architecture.
  • 1 updated support system: Six-color palette, one heading/body pairing and four sample brand applications.
  • 1 refresh guide and export set: Up to 12 pages documenting the changed mark, palette, typography and migration notes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing brand and logo family; four sample uses, no separate subbrands.
Pages, words and records
Two refinements proposed as alternatives; one selected refresh; guide up to 12 pages.
Formats
SVG/PDF vectors; transparent PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute direction review.
Client inputs
Original vector files, evidence of existing equity, current usage inventory and font/image rights.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Assess retained brand equity
  • Present refinement alternatives
  • Finalize support system
  • Deliver refreshed assets and transition notes

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New brand architecture or business name
  • Full rebrand from a blank brief
  • Updating all deployed signs, pages or collateral

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Logo System, StandardBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Logo System, Standard

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 identity concept routes: Three distinct proposed directions for one approved name.
  • 1 standard logo system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal and stacked lockups and one compact submark, each with positive, reversed and single-color versions. Includes favicon export.
  • 1 palette and typography system: Eight specified colors, two font families and defined heading/body hierarchy.
  • 1 practical usage guide: Eight pages with spacing, minimum size, correct/incorrect use and practical application examples.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and name; no separately named subbrands.
Pages, words and records
Three proposed concepts; eight colors; two font families; eight-page usage guide.
Formats
SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute concept review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved positioning/name, intended media, reference examples and rights/license constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity criteria
  • Present three directions
  • Refine selected system
  • Develop usage guide
  • Handoff final exports

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Naming
  • Photography production
  • Legal trademark clearance or filing

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Logo System, Standard

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 identity concept routes: Three distinct proposed directions for one approved name.
  • 1 standard logo system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal and stacked lockups and one compact submark, each with positive, reversed and single-color versions. Includes favicon export.
  • 1 palette and typography system: Eight specified colors, two font families and defined heading/body hierarchy.
  • 1 practical usage guide: Eight pages with spacing, minimum size, correct/incorrect use and practical application examples.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and name; no separately named subbrands.
Pages, words and records
Three proposed concepts; eight colors; two font families; eight-page usage guide.
Formats
SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute concept review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved positioning/name, intended media, reference examples and rights/license constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity criteria
  • Present three directions
  • Refine selected system
  • Develop usage guide
  • Handoff final exports

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Naming
  • Photography production
  • Legal trademark clearance or filing

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Logo System, PremiumBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Logo System, Premium

$21,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 identity concept routes: Three developed routes for one brand.
  • 1 premium identity system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal/stacked lockups, one compact submark, positive/reversed/single-color variants, 10-color palette and two-family typography hierarchy.
  • 1 imagery and voice direction: Two visual moodboards using properly attributed references and up to four pages of voice principles/sample language.
  • 1 brand guide: 24 pages, preserving the current minimum of 20 pages, including five starter applications: business card, letterhead and three social templates, plus asset index.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, approved name and identity system; five production-ready starter application designs.
Pages, words and records
Three proposed concepts; 10 colors; two font families; two moodboards; 24-page guide; five starter applications.
Formats
SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide; reference attribution list.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery workshop, one 60-minute concept review and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved strategy, audience evidence, existing identity/name, intended applications and rights constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity and voice brief
  • Review three concept routes
  • Finalize marks and support system
  • Build guide and usage examples
  • Handoff indexed assets

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Business naming
  • Original photography shoot
  • Trademark legal clearance
  • Printing/manufacture of the five included application designs

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Logo System, Premium

$21,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 identity concept routes: Three developed routes for one brand.
  • 1 premium identity system: One wordmark, one icon, horizontal/stacked lockups, one compact submark, positive/reversed/single-color variants, 10-color palette and two-family typography hierarchy.
  • 1 imagery and voice direction: Two visual moodboards using properly attributed references and up to four pages of voice principles/sample language.
  • 1 brand guide: 24 pages, preserving the current minimum of 20 pages, including five starter applications: business card, letterhead and three social templates, plus asset index.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, approved name and identity system; five production-ready starter application designs.
Pages, words and records
Three proposed concepts; 10 colors; two font families; two moodboards; 24-page guide; five starter applications.
Formats
SVG/PDF masters; PNG at 512/1024/2048 px; JPEG previews; PDF guide; reference attribution list.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery workshop, one 60-minute concept review and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved strategy, audience evidence, existing identity/name, intended applications and rights constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve identity and voice brief
  • Review three concept routes
  • Finalize marks and support system
  • Build guide and usage examples
  • Handoff indexed assets

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Business naming
  • Original photography shoot
  • Trademark legal clearance
  • Printing/manufacture of the five included application designs

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$21,300 one timeView Scope
Full Brand Identity PackageBrand & Identity
Included scope and billing

Full Brand Identity Package

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 premium identity scope: Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.
  • 1 naming and tagline engagement: Includes the proposed gcm-1108 candidate, shortlist and preliminary availability process for one final name/tagline pair; charged once within this package.
  • 1 brand story: Up to 1,000 words plus a 150-word summary.
  • 12 custom brand-library assets: Six original simple icons, three social templates and three document/cover templates, in one selected editable design tool.
  • 1 photography direction and reference shoot: One visual/shot-direction brief and one reference shoot up to 120 minutes at one agreed accessible local setting; 10 edited reference images for brand direction. Client approvals/permissions and any separately priced venue/equipment must be identified in scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and one approved name; one shared design workspace; 12 library assets.
Pages, words and records
Premium guide 24 pages; brand story up to 1,150 words across two lengths; 12 library assets; 10 reference-shoot images.
Formats
Identity vector/raster exports; PDF guide; editable library in one agreed tool; editable story.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute strategy/naming workshop, one 60-minute naming review, one 60-minute identity review and one 60-minute library handoff.
Client inputs
Brand/audience evidence, naming criteria, intended applications, existing rights and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
8–10 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming and brand brief
  • Select name after preliminary checks
  • Develop premium identity
  • Write story and build 12 assets
  • Handoff complete library

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal trademark clearance or filing
  • Additional subbrands
  • Printing and paid stock libraries
  • Campaign photography or video beyond the included reference shoot

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Full Brand Identity Package

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 premium identity scope: Includes the complete proposed gcm-1104 Premium logo system, palette, typography, imagery/voice direction, 24-page guide and five starter applications; charged once within this package.
  • 1 naming and tagline engagement: Includes the proposed gcm-1108 candidate, shortlist and preliminary availability process for one final name/tagline pair; charged once within this package.
  • 1 brand story: Up to 1,000 words plus a 150-word summary.
  • 12 custom brand-library assets: Six original simple icons, three social templates and three document/cover templates, in one selected editable design tool.
  • 1 photography direction and reference shoot: One visual/shot-direction brief and one reference shoot up to 120 minutes at one agreed accessible local setting; 10 edited reference images for brand direction. Client approvals/permissions and any separately priced venue/equipment must be identified in scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand and one approved name; one shared design workspace; 12 library assets.
Pages, words and records
Premium guide 24 pages; brand story up to 1,150 words across two lengths; 12 library assets; 10 reference-shoot images.
Formats
Identity vector/raster exports; PDF guide; editable library in one agreed tool; editable story.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute strategy/naming workshop, one 60-minute naming review, one 60-minute identity review and one 60-minute library handoff.
Client inputs
Brand/audience evidence, naming criteria, intended applications, existing rights and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
8–10 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability confirmed in proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve naming and brand brief
  • Select name after preliminary checks
  • Develop premium identity
  • Write story and build 12 assets
  • Handoff complete library

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal trademark clearance or filing
  • Additional subbrands
  • Printing and paid stock libraries
  • Campaign photography or video beyond the included reference shoot

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$31,300 one timeView Scope
Website Maintenance, Small SiteWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Website Maintenance, Small Site

$625 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed website per month: Weekly backups with backup-job review and a monthly restore-readiness check; routine compatible plugin/core security updates with a recorded smoke check.
  • 2 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 2 consolidated requests across at most 2 existing pages, 500 supplied words and 4 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
  • 1 monthly service log: Backup/update status, completed edits and unresolved issues.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing WordPress site and domain, one production environment; staging if already available.
Pages, words and records
Proposed qualification: up to 15 public pages and 15 plugins; 2 new-order change requests across 2 pages, 500 supplied words and 4 image replacements per month.
Formats
Existing site formats; written maintenance log; encrypted backup storage in approved infrastructure.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute onboarding review; monthly written status, no standing meeting.
Client inputs
Authorized access, current hosting/backup details, license records and prioritized edits with approved copy.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect access and backup path
  • Perform weekly backups and routine updates
  • Apply approved edits
  • Issue monthly log

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New pages or design changes
  • Emergency response or uptime guarantee
  • Malware cleanup and major compatibility repairs
  • Hosting and license fees

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Website Maintenance, Small Site

$625 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed website per month: Weekly backups with backup-job review and a monthly restore-readiness check; routine compatible plugin/core security updates with a recorded smoke check.
  • 2 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 2 consolidated requests across at most 2 existing pages, 500 supplied words and 4 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
  • 1 monthly service log: Backup/update status, completed edits and unresolved issues.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing WordPress site and domain, one production environment; staging if already available.
Pages, words and records
Proposed qualification: up to 15 public pages and 15 plugins; 2 new-order change requests across 2 pages, 500 supplied words and 4 image replacements per month.
Formats
Existing site formats; written maintenance log; encrypted backup storage in approved infrastructure.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute onboarding review; monthly written status, no standing meeting.
Client inputs
Authorized access, current hosting/backup details, license records and prioritized edits with approved copy.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect access and backup path
  • Perform weekly backups and routine updates
  • Apply approved edits
  • Issue monthly log

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New pages or design changes
  • Emergency response or uptime guarantee
  • Malware cleanup and major compatibility repairs
  • Hosting and license fees

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$625 / monthView Scope
Website Maintenance, Store or Large SiteWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Website Maintenance, Store or Large Site

$1,900 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed store or larger site per month: Weekly backups, automated uptime monitoring, routine plugin/core security patches and post-update smoke checks.
  • 6 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 6 consolidated requests across at most 6 existing pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
  • 1 monthly status/check-in: Written service log and 30-minute client check-in.
  • 1 quarterly performance review: Every third service month, review agreed page speed and operating trends in one 45-minute review with a two-page summary.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One WordPress/WooCommerce or supported store site, one domain and one existing staging environment.
Pages, words and records
Proposed qualification: up to 100 public pages, 250 SKUs and 30 plugins; 6 new-order change requests across 6 pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 image replacements per month.
Formats
Existing site formats; PDF status/performance summary; approved backup/monitoring tools.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding, one 30-minute monthly check-in and one 45-minute quarterly review.
Client inputs
Hosting/store access, test payment method approved for sandbox verification, licenses and supplied edits.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect backups and operating risks
  • Run weekly maintenance and monitoring checks
  • Apply approved edits
  • Report monthly and review performance quarterly

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New checkout/payment architecture
  • Emergency incident response or service-level guarantee
  • Custom extension development
  • Hosting/platform charges

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Website Maintenance, Store or Large Site

$1,900 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed store or larger site per month: Weekly backups, automated uptime monitoring, routine plugin/core security patches and post-update smoke checks.
  • 6 small content-change requests per month: New-order allowance: 6 consolidated requests across at most 6 existing pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 supplied image replacements total each month; existing layouts and links only. Historical agreement entitlements remain as contracted.
  • 1 monthly status/check-in: Written service log and 30-minute client check-in.
  • 1 quarterly performance review: Every third service month, review agreed page speed and operating trends in one 45-minute review with a two-page summary.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One WordPress/WooCommerce or supported store site, one domain and one existing staging environment.
Pages, words and records
Proposed qualification: up to 100 public pages, 250 SKUs and 30 plugins; 6 new-order change requests across 6 pages, 1500 supplied words and 12 image replacements per month.
Formats
Existing site formats; PDF status/performance summary; approved backup/monitoring tools.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding, one 30-minute monthly check-in and one 45-minute quarterly review.
Client inputs
Hosting/store access, test payment method approved for sandbox verification, licenses and supplied edits.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycles; onboarding within 5 business days after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inspect backups and operating risks
  • Run weekly maintenance and monitoring checks
  • Apply approved edits
  • Report monthly and review performance quarterly

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New checkout/payment architecture
  • Emergency incident response or service-level guarantee
  • Custom extension development
  • Hosting/platform charges

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,900 / monthView Scope
Landing Page (One Page Site)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Landing Page (One Page Site)

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 custom landing page: One responsive WordPress or static page with up to eight sections and one primary conversion path.
  • 1 contact form or conversion link: Up to six fields with one recipient route or one existing checkout/booking destination.
  • 1 basic SEO and analytics setup: Page title/meta, social preview, one analytics property connection and up to three agreed basic events.
  • 1 handoff: Desktop/mobile checks and a written editing guide up to four pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, one website/page, one form and one analytics property.
Pages, words and records
Up to eight sections, 1,500 words lightly edited from supplied copy and 12 supplied images.
Formats
Responsive HTML/CSS in existing approved architecture; optimized WebP/JPEG; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute design/handoff review.
Client inputs
Approved copy/assets, brand standards, domain/hosting access, form routing and consent/privacy text.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2–3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve page outline
  • Review custom page design
  • Build and test form/analytics
  • Complete mobile/desktop acceptance and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-page website
  • Custom ecommerce or member system
  • Original photography
  • Hosting/email subscriptions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Landing Page (One Page Site)

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 custom landing page: One responsive WordPress or static page with up to eight sections and one primary conversion path.
  • 1 contact form or conversion link: Up to six fields with one recipient route or one existing checkout/booking destination.
  • 1 basic SEO and analytics setup: Page title/meta, social preview, one analytics property connection and up to three agreed basic events.
  • 1 handoff: Desktop/mobile checks and a written editing guide up to four pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, one website/page, one form and one analytics property.
Pages, words and records
Up to eight sections, 1,500 words lightly edited from supplied copy and 12 supplied images.
Formats
Responsive HTML/CSS in existing approved architecture; optimized WebP/JPEG; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute design/handoff review.
Client inputs
Approved copy/assets, brand standards, domain/hosting access, form routing and consent/privacy text.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2–3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve page outline
  • Review custom page design
  • Build and test form/analytics
  • Complete mobile/desktop acceptance and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-page website
  • Custom ecommerce or member system
  • Original photography
  • Hosting/email subscriptions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Migration: Squarespace ↔ WordPressWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Migration: Squarespace ↔ WordPress

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 accepted migration inventory: Enumerate every page, content type, form, integration, domain and excluded system before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is 20 pages, 50 posts and 200 media files.
  • 1 platform migration and theme rebuild: Move approved inventory between Squarespace and WordPress; rebuild approved design direction on the destination platform.
  • 1 URL redirect map: Map every migrated URL in the accepted inventory and verify supported redirects.
  • 1 validation and handoff report: Validate content samples, navigation, forms and desktop/mobile display against the signed inventory.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One source site and one destination site/domain; one platform change; DNS cutover only when separately approved in the accepted plan.
Pages, words and records
Complete accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope 20 pages, 50 posts, 200 assets and two simple forms; final exact count required before order acceptance.
Formats
Platform-native pages/posts; approved asset formats; CSV redirect map and migration validation report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery/inventory workshop, one 45-minute staging review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Export and admin access, destination hosting, current URL list, approved design, licenses, backup access and rollback contact.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory and back up source
  • Approve migration/redirect plan
  • Build destination and import content
  • Validate staging
  • Approve cutover and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unlisted commerce/membership migrations
  • Email-mailbox migration
  • Search-ranking guarantee
  • Unapproved DNS or payment changes

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the migration and applies the $7,000 charge to an accepted project. Good Creative Media confirms scope and schedule before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the work, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Migration: Squarespace ↔ WordPress

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 accepted migration inventory: Enumerate every page, content type, form, integration, domain and excluded system before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is 20 pages, 50 posts and 200 media files.
  • 1 platform migration and theme rebuild: Move approved inventory between Squarespace and WordPress; rebuild approved design direction on the destination platform.
  • 1 URL redirect map: Map every migrated URL in the accepted inventory and verify supported redirects.
  • 1 validation and handoff report: Validate content samples, navigation, forms and desktop/mobile display against the signed inventory.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One source site and one destination site/domain; one platform change; DNS cutover only when separately approved in the accepted plan.
Pages, words and records
Complete accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope 20 pages, 50 posts, 200 assets and two simple forms; final exact count required before order acceptance.
Formats
Platform-native pages/posts; approved asset formats; CSV redirect map and migration validation report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery/inventory workshop, one 45-minute staging review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Export and admin access, destination hosting, current URL list, approved design, licenses, backup access and rollback contact.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory and back up source
  • Approve migration/redirect plan
  • Build destination and import content
  • Validate staging
  • Approve cutover and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unlisted commerce/membership migrations
  • Email-mailbox migration
  • Search-ranking guarantee
  • Unapproved DNS or payment changes

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the migration and applies the $7,000 charge to an accepted project. Good Creative Media confirms scope and schedule before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the work, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Artist Portfolio SiteWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Artist Portfolio Site

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artist portfolio website: Up to six page types: Home/Portfolio, Statement, CV, About, Contact and optional store-link page.
  • 50 artwork entries: Up to 50 works with supplied images, title, year, medium, dimensions and captions.
  • 1 self-update structure: Reusable artwork template, one CV format and a 45-minute publishing walkthrough.
  • 1 contact/store handoff: One contact form and optional link/handoff to an existing Etsy or Shopify store.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist identity, site/domain and existing external store link; no store build included.
Pages, words and records
Up to six page types; 50 artwork records; two supplied images per work; up to 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
Formats
Responsive website, optimized images, editable portfolio entries and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 45-minute design review and one 45-minute update training.
Client inputs
Selected artwork files, metadata/permissions, statement, CV, contact details and hosting/domain access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve portfolio taxonomy
  • Design templates
  • Enter up to 50 works
  • Test mobile display/contact
  • Train client and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Artwork photography
  • Commerce catalog construction
  • Ongoing portfolio entry
  • Guaranteed five-minute editing time

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Artist Portfolio Site

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artist portfolio website: Up to six page types: Home/Portfolio, Statement, CV, About, Contact and optional store-link page.
  • 50 artwork entries: Up to 50 works with supplied images, title, year, medium, dimensions and captions.
  • 1 self-update structure: Reusable artwork template, one CV format and a 45-minute publishing walkthrough.
  • 1 contact/store handoff: One contact form and optional link/handoff to an existing Etsy or Shopify store.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist identity, site/domain and existing external store link; no store build included.
Pages, words and records
Up to six page types; 50 artwork records; two supplied images per work; up to 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
Formats
Responsive website, optimized images, editable portfolio entries and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 45-minute design review and one 45-minute update training.
Client inputs
Selected artwork files, metadata/permissions, statement, CV, contact details and hosting/domain access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve portfolio taxonomy
  • Design templates
  • Enter up to 50 works
  • Test mobile display/contact
  • Train client and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Artwork photography
  • Commerce catalog construction
  • Ongoing portfolio entry
  • Guaranteed five-minute editing time

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Migration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerceWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Migration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerce

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 store migration inventory: Specify all products/variants, customers and orders to be migrated, supported fields and retention limitations; proposed envelope 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders.
  • 1 migration and theme rebuild: Move the complete accepted inventory between Shopify and WooCommerce with one approved destination theme design.
  • 1 redirect and validation package: Redirect accepted changed URLs, reconcile record counts, sample orders/variants and test agreed checkout/shipping/tax configurations without live orders.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One source store, one destination store and one domain; payment tokens and passwords migrate only where providers support authorized transfer.
Pages, words and records
Entire accepted inventory; proposed starting capacity 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders; final counts and exceptions signed before acceptance.
Formats
Native destination store records; CSV reconciliation/redirect map; responsive theme.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute inventory meeting, one 60-minute staging review and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized exports, source backups, destination account, tax/shipping rules, supported customer data and payment-provider coordination.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3–4 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm records/field support and backups
  • Build destination theme
  • Run test import and count reconciliation
  • Validate checkout and redirects
  • Approve cutover and rollback window

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unsupported password/payment-token transfer
  • Subscription entitlement recreation without separate plan
  • Unlisted integrations
  • SEO or data-completeness guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Migration: Shopify ↔ WooCommerce

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 store migration inventory: Specify all products/variants, customers and orders to be migrated, supported fields and retention limitations; proposed envelope 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders.
  • 1 migration and theme rebuild: Move the complete accepted inventory between Shopify and WooCommerce with one approved destination theme design.
  • 1 redirect and validation package: Redirect accepted changed URLs, reconcile record counts, sample orders/variants and test agreed checkout/shipping/tax configurations without live orders.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One source store, one destination store and one domain; payment tokens and passwords migrate only where providers support authorized transfer.
Pages, words and records
Entire accepted inventory; proposed starting capacity 250 SKUs, 5,000 customers and 10,000 orders; final counts and exceptions signed before acceptance.
Formats
Native destination store records; CSV reconciliation/redirect map; responsive theme.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute inventory meeting, one 60-minute staging review and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized exports, source backups, destination account, tax/shipping rules, supported customer data and payment-provider coordination.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3–4 business weeks for the accepted starting inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm records/field support and backups
  • Build destination theme
  • Run test import and count reconciliation
  • Validate checkout and redirects
  • Approve cutover and rollback window

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unsupported password/payment-token transfer
  • Subscription entitlement recreation without separate plan
  • Unlisted integrations
  • SEO or data-completeness guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)

$13,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 responsive website pages: Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.
  • 1 copy and SEO pass: Light copywriting/editing to brief up to 2,500 total words; titles/meta and basic on-page structure for every included page.
  • 1 contact and measurement setup: One contact form up to eight fields with one email route, one analytics property connection and up to three basic events.
  • 1 handoff: Mobile/desktop checks, editing guide and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business, WordPress site/domain and hosting account; one form route.
Pages, words and records
Up to five pages, 2,500 words, 25 supplied images and six work examples.
Formats
Responsive WordPress pages; optimized images; PDF editing guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute training/handoff.
Client inputs
Brand files, page brief, factual service claims, supplied photography, approved privacy text and hosting/domain access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap/copy brief
  • Review custom design
  • Build five pages and integrations
  • Verify mobile/desktop and form route
  • Train and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pages
  • Custom business application
  • Mailbox setup or migration
  • Hosting and paid licenses

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Small Business Site (up to 5 Pages)

$13,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 responsive website pages: Up to five WordPress pages: Home, About, Services, Work and Contact using one custom visual system.
  • 1 copy and SEO pass: Light copywriting/editing to brief up to 2,500 total words; titles/meta and basic on-page structure for every included page.
  • 1 contact and measurement setup: One contact form up to eight fields with one email route, one analytics property connection and up to three basic events.
  • 1 handoff: Mobile/desktop checks, editing guide and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business, WordPress site/domain and hosting account; one form route.
Pages, words and records
Up to five pages, 2,500 words, 25 supplied images and six work examples.
Formats
Responsive WordPress pages; optimized images; PDF editing guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute training/handoff.
Client inputs
Brand files, page brief, factual service claims, supplied photography, approved privacy text and hosting/domain access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap/copy brief
  • Review custom design
  • Build five pages and integrations
  • Verify mobile/desktop and form route
  • Train and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pages
  • Custom business application
  • Mailbox setup or migration
  • Hosting and paid licenses

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$13,800 one timeView Scope
Restaurant or Venue SiteWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Restaurant or Venue Site

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 6 restaurant or venue pages: Up to six pages covering the agreed home, menu/events, location/hours, gallery, private events and contact needs.
  • 1 menu or events structure: One menu up to 60 items OR event listing structure with 12 initial events.
  • 1 ordering or reservation integration: Configure one supported link/embed from an existing client-owned vendor.
  • 1 gallery and local information setup: Up to 30 supplied images, accessibility/parking copy supplied by client, map/contact and basic search metadata.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business/location, website/domain and reservation/ordering provider.
Pages, words and records
Six pages; either 60 menu items or 12 initial event records; 30 images; 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
Formats
Responsive website; menu text and optional supplied PDF; vendor-native link/embed.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute review and one 45-minute update training.
Client inputs
Current prices/hours, menu or event data, licensed photos, accessibility facts and provider/hosting access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve location/content inventory
  • Design menu/event navigation
  • Build six pages and provider link
  • Test mobile contact/booking paths
  • Train client

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Building a custom reservation/POS system
  • Food or venue photography
  • Ticket fulfillment
  • Vendor transaction fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Restaurant or Venue Site

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 6 restaurant or venue pages: Up to six pages covering the agreed home, menu/events, location/hours, gallery, private events and contact needs.
  • 1 menu or events structure: One menu up to 60 items OR event listing structure with 12 initial events.
  • 1 ordering or reservation integration: Configure one supported link/embed from an existing client-owned vendor.
  • 1 gallery and local information setup: Up to 30 supplied images, accessibility/parking copy supplied by client, map/contact and basic search metadata.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business/location, website/domain and reservation/ordering provider.
Pages, words and records
Six pages; either 60 menu items or 12 initial event records; 30 images; 3,000 supplied/lightly edited words.
Formats
Responsive website; menu text and optional supplied PDF; vendor-native link/embed.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery, one 60-minute review and one 45-minute update training.
Client inputs
Current prices/hours, menu or event data, licensed photos, accessibility facts and provider/hosting access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve location/content inventory
  • Design menu/event navigation
  • Build six pages and provider link
  • Test mobile contact/booking paths
  • Train client

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Building a custom reservation/POS system
  • Food or venue photography
  • Ticket fulfillment
  • Vendor transaction fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$16,300 one timeView Scope
Online Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Online Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 starter online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store using a customized approved theme with home, shop, product, cart/checkout, about and contact structures.
  • 25 entered SKUs: Up to 25 distinct sellable SKUs/variants with supplied title, description, price, inventory and up to four images each.
  • 1 commerce configuration: One payment provider, up to three shipping zones and five shipping rules; client-approved tax settings.
  • 1 test and training package: Sandbox checkout checks, catalog guide and 60-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, currency, payment provider and inventory location.
Pages, words and records
25 SKUs including variants, five catalog categories, up to four supplied images per SKU, six page/template structures.
Formats
Responsive store; platform-native products; optimized images; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute inventory/kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute merchant training.
Client inputs
Product table, licensed photos, SKU inventory, shipping/tax rules approved by client/adviser and merchant-owned provider access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve SKU inventory and rules
  • Design store templates
  • Enter 25 SKUs and configure commerce
  • Test sandbox checkout and responsive display
  • Merchant handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original product photography
  • Inventory/ERP integration
  • Tax advice or registration
  • Merchant, shipping and platform charges

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Online Store, Starter (up to 25 SKUs)

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 starter online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store using a customized approved theme with home, shop, product, cart/checkout, about and contact structures.
  • 25 entered SKUs: Up to 25 distinct sellable SKUs/variants with supplied title, description, price, inventory and up to four images each.
  • 1 commerce configuration: One payment provider, up to three shipping zones and five shipping rules; client-approved tax settings.
  • 1 test and training package: Sandbox checkout checks, catalog guide and 60-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, currency, payment provider and inventory location.
Pages, words and records
25 SKUs including variants, five catalog categories, up to four supplied images per SKU, six page/template structures.
Formats
Responsive store; platform-native products; optimized images; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute inventory/kickoff, one 60-minute design review and one 60-minute merchant training.
Client inputs
Product table, licensed photos, SKU inventory, shipping/tax rules approved by client/adviser and merchant-owned provider access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve SKU inventory and rules
  • Design store templates
  • Enter 25 SKUs and configure commerce
  • Test sandbox checkout and responsive display
  • Merchant handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original product photography
  • Inventory/ERP integration
  • Tax advice or registration
  • Merchant, shipping and platform charges

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$16,300 one timeView Scope
Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)

$18,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
  • 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
  • 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
  • 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
Pages, words and records
Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
Formats
Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
  • Draft/design pages
  • Obtain legal-content approval
  • Build and test intake/search
  • Handoff accepted site

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
  • Trust/IOLTA systems
  • Custom case-management integration
  • Client matter review

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)

$18,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
  • 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
  • 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
  • 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
Pages, words and records
Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
Formats
Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
  • Draft/design pages
  • Obtain legal-content approval
  • Build and test intake/search
  • Handoff accepted site

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
  • Trust/IOLTA systems
  • Custom case-management integration
  • Client matter review

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$18,800 one timeView Scope
Standard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Standard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)

$23,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 business website pages: Up to ten pages in one custom design system; service/practice pages, portfolio, journal and calendar as selected within the page plan.
  • 1 light website copy package: Up to 5,000 words across included pages with SEO titles/meta and heading structure.
  • 1 journal/calendar setup: One journal structure with five starter posts and one events structure with five starter event records using supplied content.
  • 1 forms, search and handoff: Two forms up to eight fields each, one analytics connection, sitemap and mobile/desktop acceptance checks.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business/site/domain, one journal and one calendar; two form routes.
Pages, words and records
Ten pages; 5,000 copy words; five initial blog records and five events; 50 supplied images.
Formats
Responsive website; reusable post/event templates; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, two 60-minute design/content reviews and one 60-minute training.
Client inputs
Approved brief/assets, initial journal/event records, hosting/account access and form/privacy requirements.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve information architecture
  • Review design and copy
  • Build pages/journal/calendar
  • Test integrations and responsive behavior
  • Train and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unlimited content entry
  • Custom membership or commerce system
  • Ongoing maintenance beyond accepted scope
  • Hosting/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Standard Business Site (up to 10 Pages)

$23,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 business website pages: Up to ten pages in one custom design system; service/practice pages, portfolio, journal and calendar as selected within the page plan.
  • 1 light website copy package: Up to 5,000 words across included pages with SEO titles/meta and heading structure.
  • 1 journal/calendar setup: One journal structure with five starter posts and one events structure with five starter event records using supplied content.
  • 1 forms, search and handoff: Two forms up to eight fields each, one analytics connection, sitemap and mobile/desktop acceptance checks.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business/site/domain, one journal and one calendar; two form routes.
Pages, words and records
Ten pages; 5,000 copy words; five initial blog records and five events; 50 supplied images.
Formats
Responsive website; reusable post/event templates; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, two 60-minute design/content reviews and one 60-minute training.
Client inputs
Approved brief/assets, initial journal/event records, hosting/account access and form/privacy requirements.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve information architecture
  • Review design and copy
  • Build pages/journal/calendar
  • Test integrations and responsive behavior
  • Train and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unlimited content entry
  • Custom membership or commerce system
  • Ongoing maintenance beyond accepted scope
  • Hosting/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$23,800 one timeView Scope
Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)Web Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 standard online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.
  • 250 entered or imported SKUs: Up to 250 distinct sellable SKUs/variants from a client-prepared consistent import sheet; up to four supplied images each.
  • 1 commerce and recovery setup: One payment provider, up to five shipping zones and 10 rules, client-approved tax settings and a three-email abandoned-cart sequence where platform/consent permits.
  • 1 merchant handoff: Record-count reconciliation, sandbox checkout/filter tests and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, currency and inventory location; one payment and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
250 SKUs including variants; 20 categories; 10 filter attributes; eight page/template structures; three emails up to 250 words each.
Formats
Platform-native store and CSV import map; optimized product media; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute catalog workshop, two 60-minute reviews and one 90-minute merchant training.
Client inputs
Complete catalog/variant data, photos, taxonomy, shipping/tax decisions, email consent rules and client-owned accounts.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve catalog schema and rules
  • Design store/category system
  • Import and reconcile 250 SKUs
  • Configure cart sequence and test checkout
  • Train merchant

Separate costs and exclusions

  • ERP/POS synchronization
  • Product photography
  • Custom fulfillment software
  • Platform, transaction and email charges

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Online Store, Standard (up to 250 SKUs)

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 standard online store: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with custom theme treatment, category architecture, catalog search/filtering and related-product rules.
  • 250 entered or imported SKUs: Up to 250 distinct sellable SKUs/variants from a client-prepared consistent import sheet; up to four supplied images each.
  • 1 commerce and recovery setup: One payment provider, up to five shipping zones and 10 rules, client-approved tax settings and a three-email abandoned-cart sequence where platform/consent permits.
  • 1 merchant handoff: Record-count reconciliation, sandbox checkout/filter tests and training.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, currency and inventory location; one payment and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
250 SKUs including variants; 20 categories; 10 filter attributes; eight page/template structures; three emails up to 250 words each.
Formats
Platform-native store and CSV import map; optimized product media; PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute catalog workshop, two 60-minute reviews and one 90-minute merchant training.
Client inputs
Complete catalog/variant data, photos, taxonomy, shipping/tax decisions, email consent rules and client-owned accounts.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve catalog schema and rules
  • Design store/category system
  • Import and reconcile 250 SKUs
  • Configure cart sequence and test checkout
  • Train merchant

Separate costs and exclusions

  • ERP/POS synchronization
  • Product photography
  • Custom fulfillment software
  • Platform, transaction and email charges

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$31,300 one timeView Scope
Headless / Custom Built Site — Accepted ScopeWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Headless / Custom Built Site — Accepted Scope

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 custom architecture and accepted backlog: Discovery defines one application/site, user roles, data model and explicit acceptance criteria before implementation is accepted.
  • 1 bounded custom site implementation: Proposed starting envelope: 12 responsive page templates, one CMS, three user roles, two external API integrations and eight backend endpoints.
  • 1 quality and deployment package: Performance/accessibility baseline for agreed flows, dependency inventory, deployment configuration and handoff documentation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One custom site, one production and one staging environment, one CMS and two named API integrations.
Pages, words and records
Proposed envelope: 12 templates, eight endpoints, three roles, up to 1,000 migrated content records; exact backlog required before acceptance.
Formats
Production source repository, deployment configuration, responsive site and technical handoff.
Meetings and sessions
Two 90-minute discovery/architecture workshops, four 45-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Business/user requirements, existing APIs and permissions, data schema, content inventory, hosting constraints and approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
12–16 business weeks for a fully accepted bounded backlog; larger scope receives its own calendar after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Discover and approve fixed backlog
  • Approve architecture and data flows
  • Implement milestone slices
  • Verify acceptance/performance/accessibility baseline
  • Deploy approved release and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unspecified backend features
  • Unlimited integrations or migration
  • Ongoing operational service-level agreement
  • Hosting/API/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Headless / Custom Built Site — Accepted Scope

$31,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 custom architecture and accepted backlog: Discovery defines one application/site, user roles, data model and explicit acceptance criteria before implementation is accepted.
  • 1 bounded custom site implementation: Proposed starting envelope: 12 responsive page templates, one CMS, three user roles, two external API integrations and eight backend endpoints.
  • 1 quality and deployment package: Performance/accessibility baseline for agreed flows, dependency inventory, deployment configuration and handoff documentation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One custom site, one production and one staging environment, one CMS and two named API integrations.
Pages, words and records
Proposed envelope: 12 templates, eight endpoints, three roles, up to 1,000 migrated content records; exact backlog required before acceptance.
Formats
Production source repository, deployment configuration, responsive site and technical handoff.
Meetings and sessions
Two 90-minute discovery/architecture workshops, four 45-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Business/user requirements, existing APIs and permissions, data schema, content inventory, hosting constraints and approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
12–16 business weeks for a fully accepted bounded backlog; larger scope receives its own calendar after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Discover and approve fixed backlog
  • Approve architecture and data flows
  • Implement milestone slices
  • Verify acceptance/performance/accessibility baseline
  • Deploy approved release and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unspecified backend features
  • Unlimited integrations or migration
  • Ongoing operational service-level agreement
  • Hosting/API/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$31,300 one timeView Scope
Premium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted ScopeWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Premium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted Scope

$36,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 15 custom website pages: Proposed new-order envelope is 10–15 individually planned pages with one bespoke design system; every accepted page is listed.
  • 1 journal, forms and integrations: One journal with 10 initial supplied posts, three forms up to 12 fields each and two named supported integrations.
  • 1 light copy package: Up to 7,500 words across accepted pages with metadata and editorial consistency.
  • 90 calendar days of post-launch maintenance: First 90 calendar days include weekly backup/update checks and two small supplied-content requests per service month, across two existing pages, 500 supplied words and four image replacements total per month. Existing contracted support entitlements remain unchanged.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site/domain, one journal, two integrations, production and staging; 10–15 accepted pages.
Pages, words and records
15-page proposed cap, 7,500 words, 10 journal records, 75 supplied images; 90 days maintenance retained.
Formats
Responsive site/design tokens; native content templates; source/handoff documentation.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, three 60-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute training/handoff.
Client inputs
Approved sitemap, brand/assets, copy facts, initial posts, integration permissions and named approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
8–12 business weeks to launch, followed by the included 90 calendar days of maintenance after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve exact page inventory
  • Approve bespoke design system
  • Build copy/pages/integrations
  • Validate agreed flows
  • Launch and perform 90-day maintenance

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Pages beyond accepted inventory
  • Custom business application backend
  • Ongoing maintenance after included period
  • Hosting/third-party fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Premium Custom Site — 10–15 Pages by Accepted Scope

$36,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 15 custom website pages: Proposed new-order envelope is 10–15 individually planned pages with one bespoke design system; every accepted page is listed.
  • 1 journal, forms and integrations: One journal with 10 initial supplied posts, three forms up to 12 fields each and two named supported integrations.
  • 1 light copy package: Up to 7,500 words across accepted pages with metadata and editorial consistency.
  • 90 calendar days of post-launch maintenance: First 90 calendar days include weekly backup/update checks and two small supplied-content requests per service month, across two existing pages, 500 supplied words and four image replacements total per month. Existing contracted support entitlements remain unchanged.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site/domain, one journal, two integrations, production and staging; 10–15 accepted pages.
Pages, words and records
15-page proposed cap, 7,500 words, 10 journal records, 75 supplied images; 90 days maintenance retained.
Formats
Responsive site/design tokens; native content templates; source/handoff documentation.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, three 60-minute milestone reviews and one 90-minute training/handoff.
Client inputs
Approved sitemap, brand/assets, copy facts, initial posts, integration permissions and named approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
8–12 business weeks to launch, followed by the included 90 calendar days of maintenance after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve exact page inventory
  • Approve bespoke design system
  • Build copy/pages/integrations
  • Validate agreed flows
  • Launch and perform 90-day maintenance

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Pages beyond accepted inventory
  • Custom business application backend
  • Ongoing maintenance after included period
  • Hosting/third-party fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$36,300 one timeView Scope
Online Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted ScopeWeb Design & Development
Included scope and billing

Online Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted Scope

$46,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 large-catalog store architecture: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with catalog taxonomy, faceted search and merchandising rules.
  • 500 imported SKUs in proposed starting envelope: Accepted new-order inventory starts at 250 and is bounded at 500 sellable SKUs/variants; every supplied valid record in that inventory is imported and reconciled.
  • 1 merchandising and commerce configuration: Up to 40 categories, 15 filter attributes, 10 collection/promotion rules, one payment provider and up to 10 shipping zones with client-approved tax settings.
  • 1 catalog-operations handoff: Bulk import template, staff workflow, count reconciliation, checkout/search tests and two training sessions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, one currency, up to two inventory locations and one payment provider.
Pages, words and records
250–500 accepted SKUs/variants; 40 categories; 15 facets; 10 merchandising rules; up to five supplied images per SKU.
Formats
Native store catalog, CSV import and error ledger, responsive templates and operator guide.
Meetings and sessions
Two 90-minute catalog workshops, two 60-minute milestone reviews and two 60-minute staff trainings.
Client inputs
Clean complete SKU/variant sheet, image rights, taxonomy, inventory/shipping/tax rules and client-owned platform accounts.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
10–12 business weeks for the accepted starting catalog after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve exact catalog and data mapping
  • Design taxonomy/templates
  • Test import and reconcile counts
  • Configure facets/merchandising/checkout
  • Train operators and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unbounded catalog entry
  • ERP/warehouse integration
  • Product photography
  • Platform/transaction/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Online Store, Large Catalog — 250–500 SKUs by Accepted Scope

$46,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 large-catalog store architecture: One WooCommerce or Shopify store with catalog taxonomy, faceted search and merchandising rules.
  • 500 imported SKUs in proposed starting envelope: Accepted new-order inventory starts at 250 and is bounded at 500 sellable SKUs/variants; every supplied valid record in that inventory is imported and reconciled.
  • 1 merchandising and commerce configuration: Up to 40 categories, 15 filter attributes, 10 collection/promotion rules, one payment provider and up to 10 shipping zones with client-approved tax settings.
  • 1 catalog-operations handoff: Bulk import template, staff workflow, count reconciliation, checkout/search tests and two training sessions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/domain, one currency, up to two inventory locations and one payment provider.
Pages, words and records
250–500 accepted SKUs/variants; 40 categories; 15 facets; 10 merchandising rules; up to five supplied images per SKU.
Formats
Native store catalog, CSV import and error ledger, responsive templates and operator guide.
Meetings and sessions
Two 90-minute catalog workshops, two 60-minute milestone reviews and two 60-minute staff trainings.
Client inputs
Clean complete SKU/variant sheet, image rights, taxonomy, inventory/shipping/tax rules and client-owned platform accounts.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
10–12 business weeks for the accepted starting catalog after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve exact catalog and data mapping
  • Design taxonomy/templates
  • Test import and reconcile counts
  • Configure facets/merchandising/checkout
  • Train operators and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Unbounded catalog entry
  • ERP/warehouse integration
  • Product photography
  • Platform/transaction/license fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$46,300 one timeView Scope
Google Analytics + Search Console SetupDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Google Analytics + Search Console Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 GA4 and Search Console setup: Configure or connect one GA4 property and one Search Console property for one website using one tag installation method.
  • 3 agreed conversion events: Up to three basic form/click/contact conversions with test evidence and consent-setting observations.
  • 1 handoff and privacy-language recommendations: Up to three pages describing configured measures, limitations and proposed privacy-language changes for client approval.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One website/domain, GA4 property, Search Console property and tag deployment method.
Pages, words and records
Three conversion definitions; five test paths; one three-page guide.
Formats
Platform-native configuration, test log and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute measurement kickoff and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized website/analytics access, business conversion definitions and approved consent/privacy policy.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1 business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve conversion definitions
  • Install/connect properties and tags
  • Test events and record limitations
  • Handoff documentation

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Server-side tagging
  • Ecommerce item-level instrumentation
  • Historical data recovery
  • Legal privacy opinion

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Google Analytics + Search Console Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 GA4 and Search Console setup: Configure or connect one GA4 property and one Search Console property for one website using one tag installation method.
  • 3 agreed conversion events: Up to three basic form/click/contact conversions with test evidence and consent-setting observations.
  • 1 handoff and privacy-language recommendations: Up to three pages describing configured measures, limitations and proposed privacy-language changes for client approval.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One website/domain, GA4 property, Search Console property and tag deployment method.
Pages, words and records
Three conversion definitions; five test paths; one three-page guide.
Formats
Platform-native configuration, test log and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute measurement kickoff and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized website/analytics access, business conversion definitions and approved consent/privacy policy.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1 business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve conversion definitions
  • Install/connect properties and tags
  • Test events and record limitations
  • Handoff documentation

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Server-side tagging
  • Ecommerce item-level instrumentation
  • Historical data recovery
  • Legal privacy opinion

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Google Business Profile SetupDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Google Business Profile Setup

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 eligible location profile: Ownership/verification assistance, available category/services/contact/hours fields, description and website link with agreed tracking.
  • 15 supplied photo uploads: Up to 15 licensed client images cropped for the supported profile fields.
  • 1 factual profile Q&A preparation: Up to five client-approved factual answers; use only available permitted business fields or responses to genuine questions.
  • 1 access handoff: Status log with pending verification tasks and ownership/access records.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One eligible business/location and one Google Business Profile under client ownership.
Pages, words and records
One profile description, five factual answers, 15 supplied photos and up to 20 services.
Formats
Platform-supported image sizes and fields; access/status document.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute eligibility/intake meeting and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Proof of legitimate business/location, current hours/services, website, licensed photos and client participation in verification.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks for preparation and submission, excluding Google verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm eligibility and ownership route
  • Prepare factual profile and photos
  • Assist verification and populate supported fields
  • Record status and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Fabricated public questions or reviews
  • Suspension/reinstatement appeals
  • Local ranking guarantee
  • Original photography

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Google Business Profile Setup

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 eligible location profile: Ownership/verification assistance, available category/services/contact/hours fields, description and website link with agreed tracking.
  • 15 supplied photo uploads: Up to 15 licensed client images cropped for the supported profile fields.
  • 1 factual profile Q&A preparation: Up to five client-approved factual answers; use only available permitted business fields or responses to genuine questions.
  • 1 access handoff: Status log with pending verification tasks and ownership/access records.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One eligible business/location and one Google Business Profile under client ownership.
Pages, words and records
One profile description, five factual answers, 15 supplied photos and up to 20 services.
Formats
Platform-supported image sizes and fields; access/status document.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute eligibility/intake meeting and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Proof of legitimate business/location, current hours/services, website, licensed photos and client participation in verification.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks for preparation and submission, excluding Google verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm eligibility and ownership route
  • Prepare factual profile and photos
  • Assist verification and populate supported fields
  • Record status and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Fabricated public questions or reviews
  • Suspension/reinstatement appeals
  • Local ranking guarantee
  • Original photography

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Monthly NewsletterDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Monthly Newsletter

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 newsletter each month: 300–600 words, one subject/preheader pair, one approved template and up to four supplied images.
  • 1 approved audience send: One scheduled send to one approved segment/list of up to 5,000 opted-in recipients using the client’s existing email platform.
  • 1 monthly send report: Delivery/open/click observations with platform limitations and tracked CTA links where supported.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, email platform, sender identity and approved recipient segment.
Pages, words and records
One issue/month, 300–600 words, four images and up to 5,000 recipient records.
Formats
HTML or plain-text email, platform preview and PDF/CSV report.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute monthly planning check-in or equivalent written brief.
Client inputs
Approved news/offers, licensed images, permissioned list, sender/domain configuration and sign-off before send.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly cycle; draft target 7 business days before the agreed send date after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
One consolidated copy/design revision plus final factual or production correction before the approved send. Additional issue concepts or post-approval changes require written scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm issue brief
  • Draft copy/design and tracked links
  • Obtain final approval and test
  • Schedule one send
  • Report observed results

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Initial email-platform migration/setup
  • Additional issues or resend campaigns
  • Purchased-list acquisition
  • Email platform fees

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Monthly Newsletter

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 newsletter each month: 300–600 words, one subject/preheader pair, one approved template and up to four supplied images.
  • 1 approved audience send: One scheduled send to one approved segment/list of up to 5,000 opted-in recipients using the client’s existing email platform.
  • 1 monthly send report: Delivery/open/click observations with platform limitations and tracked CTA links where supported.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, email platform, sender identity and approved recipient segment.
Pages, words and records
One issue/month, 300–600 words, four images and up to 5,000 recipient records.
Formats
HTML or plain-text email, platform preview and PDF/CSV report.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute monthly planning check-in or equivalent written brief.
Client inputs
Approved news/offers, licensed images, permissioned list, sender/domain configuration and sign-off before send.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly cycle; draft target 7 business days before the agreed send date after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
One consolidated copy/design revision plus final factual or production correction before the approved send. Additional issue concepts or post-approval changes require written scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm issue brief
  • Draft copy/design and tracked links
  • Obtain final approval and test
  • Schedule one send
  • Report observed results

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Initial email-platform migration/setup
  • Additional issues or resend campaigns
  • Purchased-list acquisition
  • Email platform fees

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,000 / monthView Scope
Local SEO OngoingDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Local SEO Ongoing

$2,500 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly local content update: Up to 500 words on an existing page or post for one business/location.
  • 5 citation corrections per month: Up to five existing eligible directory records corrected, with attempts and pending provider action logged.
  • 10 review-response drafts per month: Up to 10 routine replies drafted for client approval; sensitive issues escalated.
  • 1 profile check and monthly report: One Business Profile check, one-page report and 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business location, domain and Business Profile; five citation records/month.
Pages, words and records
500-word update; 10 response drafts; one-page report monthly.
Formats
Existing website/profile fields; written drafts/report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Profile/site access, current business facts, approved response guidelines and timely approval of content.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly production and reporting cycles after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm monthly priorities
  • Update content and citation records
  • Draft review responses and inspect profile
  • Deliver one-page report

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New website build
  • Unlimited reputation/crisis handling
  • Paid backlinks/review acquisition
  • Ranking or lead guarantee

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Local SEO Ongoing

$2,500 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly local content update: Up to 500 words on an existing page or post for one business/location.
  • 5 citation corrections per month: Up to five existing eligible directory records corrected, with attempts and pending provider action logged.
  • 10 review-response drafts per month: Up to 10 routine replies drafted for client approval; sensitive issues escalated.
  • 1 profile check and monthly report: One Business Profile check, one-page report and 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business location, domain and Business Profile; five citation records/month.
Pages, words and records
500-word update; 10 response drafts; one-page report monthly.
Formats
Existing website/profile fields; written drafts/report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Profile/site access, current business facts, approved response guidelines and timely approval of content.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly production and reporting cycles after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm monthly priorities
  • Update content and citation records
  • Draft review responses and inspect profile
  • Deliver one-page report

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New website build
  • Unlimited reputation/crisis handling
  • Paid backlinks/review acquisition
  • Ranking or lead guarantee

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,500 / monthView Scope
Conversion Tracking + DashboardDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Conversion Tracking + Dashboard

$2,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single-page dashboard: One Looker Studio or equivalent reporting dashboard with three principal monthly KPIs and up to six supporting metrics.
  • 3 native data-source connections: Up to three client-authorized sources using supported native connectors.
  • 3 conversion definitions and validation tests: Up to three measures mapped to existing supported data; test observations and attribution limitations documented.
  • 1 operating guide: Up to five pages covering refresh behavior, owner access and metric definitions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One dashboard/workspace and up to three native source accounts.
Pages, words and records
Three principal KPIs, six supporting measures, three conversions and up to 12 months of existing available data.
Formats
Native dashboard plus PDF/export view and written guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute KPI workshop and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Read-only source access, approved KPI definitions and consent/privacy constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve three principal KPIs
  • Connect supported data
  • Build one-page view
  • Validate calculations and limitations
  • Handoff guide

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Custom ETL/data warehouse
  • Historical data reconstruction
  • Ongoing monthly interpretation
  • Paid connector fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Conversion Tracking + Dashboard

$2,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single-page dashboard: One Looker Studio or equivalent reporting dashboard with three principal monthly KPIs and up to six supporting metrics.
  • 3 native data-source connections: Up to three client-authorized sources using supported native connectors.
  • 3 conversion definitions and validation tests: Up to three measures mapped to existing supported data; test observations and attribution limitations documented.
  • 1 operating guide: Up to five pages covering refresh behavior, owner access and metric definitions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One dashboard/workspace and up to three native source accounts.
Pages, words and records
Three principal KPIs, six supporting measures, three conversions and up to 12 months of existing available data.
Formats
Native dashboard plus PDF/export view and written guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute KPI workshop and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Read-only source access, approved KPI definitions and consent/privacy constraints.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve three principal KPIs
  • Connect supported data
  • Build one-page view
  • Validate calculations and limitations
  • Handoff guide

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Custom ETL/data warehouse
  • Historical data reconstruction
  • Ongoing monthly interpretation
  • Paid connector fees

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,400 one timeView Scope
Email Marketing SetupDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Email Marketing Setup

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 email account and audience structure: Configure one existing/new client-owned email platform with up to three segments and import one consented list up to 5,000 records.
  • 3 welcome emails: Three emails up to 400 words each, with subject/preheader and CTA.
  • 1 branded reusable template: One responsive email template using supplied identity and up to four image positions.
  • 2 signup forms: Two platform-native forms with approved consent language, installed using supported embeds/links.
  • 1 test and handoff: Preview/test sequence, permissions and sender-configuration checklist with operator guide.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One email platform, sender domain, audience list and existing website.
Pages, words and records
5,000 import records; three segments; three 400-word welcome emails; two forms.
Formats
Platform-native automation/template/forms; editable copy and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery, one 45-minute copy/template review and one 45-minute training.
Client inputs
Consent-proven audience file, brand/copy facts, client-owned platform/domain access and approved privacy language.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve list/consent inventory
  • Configure platform and template
  • Build three-email sequence and forms
  • Test triggers and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mailbox or domain-email migration
  • Purchased lists
  • Extensive data cleaning
  • Guaranteed inbox placement

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Email Marketing Setup

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 email account and audience structure: Configure one existing/new client-owned email platform with up to three segments and import one consented list up to 5,000 records.
  • 3 welcome emails: Three emails up to 400 words each, with subject/preheader and CTA.
  • 1 branded reusable template: One responsive email template using supplied identity and up to four image positions.
  • 2 signup forms: Two platform-native forms with approved consent language, installed using supported embeds/links.
  • 1 test and handoff: Preview/test sequence, permissions and sender-configuration checklist with operator guide.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One email platform, sender domain, audience list and existing website.
Pages, words and records
5,000 import records; three segments; three 400-word welcome emails; two forms.
Formats
Platform-native automation/template/forms; editable copy and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery, one 45-minute copy/template review and one 45-minute training.
Client inputs
Consent-proven audience file, brand/copy facts, client-owned platform/domain access and approved privacy language.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve list/consent inventory
  • Configure platform and template
  • Build three-email sequence and forms
  • Test triggers and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mailbox or domain-email migration
  • Purchased lists
  • Extensive data cleaning
  • Guaranteed inbox placement

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Paid Search ManagementDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Paid Search Management

$3,200 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed search-ad account per month: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account with up to three campaigns and 10 ad groups.
  • 1 optimization pass each week: Review bids/budget, queries, negatives and available conversion signals in a scheduled weekly pass.
  • 4 new ad-copy variations per month: Up to four variations within accepted campaigns plus one landing-page test plan; one small text/CTA test on an existing accessible page.
  • 1 monthly report and review: One-page observed-results report and 30-minute review with spend/limitations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One search network/account, three campaigns, 10 ad groups and one existing landing page.
Pages, words and records
Four copy variations and one bounded landing-page test/month; existing current ad-spend fee terms retained separately.
Formats
Native search ads and report; page text/CTA variant; no new page build.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Authorized ad/analytics access, approved budget, conversion definitions, offers and landing-page access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly cycles with one scheduled optimization pass per business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly budget and tests
  • Perform weekly account optimization
  • Review agreed variations/test
  • Deliver monthly report

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Media spend included in service fee
  • New landing-page construction
  • Additional ad networks
  • Performance guarantee

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Paid Search Management

$3,200 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 managed search-ad account per month: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account with up to three campaigns and 10 ad groups.
  • 1 optimization pass each week: Review bids/budget, queries, negatives and available conversion signals in a scheduled weekly pass.
  • 4 new ad-copy variations per month: Up to four variations within accepted campaigns plus one landing-page test plan; one small text/CTA test on an existing accessible page.
  • 1 monthly report and review: One-page observed-results report and 30-minute review with spend/limitations.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One search network/account, three campaigns, 10 ad groups and one existing landing page.
Pages, words and records
Four copy variations and one bounded landing-page test/month; existing current ad-spend fee terms retained separately.
Formats
Native search ads and report; page text/CTA variant; no new page build.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Authorized ad/analytics access, approved budget, conversion definitions, offers and landing-page access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly cycles with one scheduled optimization pass per business week after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly budget and tests
  • Perform weekly account optimization
  • Review agreed variations/test
  • Deliver monthly report

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Media spend included in service fee
  • New landing-page construction
  • Additional ad networks
  • Performance guarantee

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,200 / monthView Scope
SEO AuditDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

SEO Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 SEO audit: One domain with up to 50 public URLs; technical health, content/keyword structure, backlinks/reputation and local visibility reviewed.
  • 1 evidence register: Observed issues with URL/date/source and limitations; one Business Profile and two competitors included.
  • 1 three-priority action plan: Written report up to 15 pages identifying three highest-priority improvements and dependencies.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, Business Profile, available GA4/Search Console and two selected competitors.
Pages, words and records
Up to 50 crawled public URLs; 90 days of available performance data; 15-page report.
Formats
PDF audit and editable issue register.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute kickoff and one 45-minute findings meeting.
Client inputs
Website/analytics access, current objectives, locations and existing search history.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm URL/access inventory
  • Review technical/content/reputation evidence
  • Rank three priorities
  • Present findings

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementing repairs
  • New content production
  • Paid link acquisition
  • Rankings or traffic guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

SEO Audit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 SEO audit: One domain with up to 50 public URLs; technical health, content/keyword structure, backlinks/reputation and local visibility reviewed.
  • 1 evidence register: Observed issues with URL/date/source and limitations; one Business Profile and two competitors included.
  • 1 three-priority action plan: Written report up to 15 pages identifying three highest-priority improvements and dependencies.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, Business Profile, available GA4/Search Console and two selected competitors.
Pages, words and records
Up to 50 crawled public URLs; 90 days of available performance data; 15-page report.
Formats
PDF audit and editable issue register.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute kickoff and one 45-minute findings meeting.
Client inputs
Website/analytics access, current objectives, locations and existing search history.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm URL/access inventory
  • Review technical/content/reputation evidence
  • Rank three priorities
  • Present findings

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementing repairs
  • New content production
  • Paid link acquisition
  • Rankings or traffic guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Paid Search Campaign SetupDigital Marketing
Included scope and billing

Paid Search Campaign Setup

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 search campaign setup: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account, one campaign and three ad groups.
  • 6 responsive search-ad drafts: Two ads per group with platform-supported asset counts; up to 15 headlines and four descriptions per ad where supported.
  • 1 keyword/audience plan: Up to 60 initial keywords, 30 negatives and approved location/schedule targeting.
  • 1 landing-page review and tracking: Review one existing landing page, recommend changes and configure up to three supported conversions; client approves spend and activation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One ad network/account, campaign, landing page and conversion destination.
Pages, words and records
Three ad groups; six ad drafts; 60 keywords; 30 negatives; three conversions.
Formats
Native ad-platform structures, editable copy and setup/test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute campaign approval/handoff.
Client inputs
Offer/audience details, budgets, ad/analytics access, landing page and approved claims.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve audience/keyword brief
  • Build three groups and six ad drafts
  • Configure supported tracking
  • Obtain campaign/spend approval
  • Validate and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ongoing management
  • New landing-page build
  • Additional ad networks
  • Lead/sales guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Paid Search Campaign Setup

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 search campaign setup: One Google OR Microsoft Ads account, one campaign and three ad groups.
  • 6 responsive search-ad drafts: Two ads per group with platform-supported asset counts; up to 15 headlines and four descriptions per ad where supported.
  • 1 keyword/audience plan: Up to 60 initial keywords, 30 negatives and approved location/schedule targeting.
  • 1 landing-page review and tracking: Review one existing landing page, recommend changes and configure up to three supported conversions; client approves spend and activation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One ad network/account, campaign, landing page and conversion destination.
Pages, words and records
Three ad groups; six ad drafts; 60 keywords; 30 negatives; three conversions.
Formats
Native ad-platform structures, editable copy and setup/test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery and one 45-minute campaign approval/handoff.
Client inputs
Offer/audience details, budgets, ad/analytics access, landing page and approved claims.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve audience/keyword brief
  • Build three groups and six ad drafts
  • Configure supported tracking
  • Obtain campaign/spend approval
  • Validate and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ongoing management
  • New landing-page build
  • Additional ad networks
  • Lead/sales guarantee

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
SEO Setup (Existing Site)Digital Marketing
Included scope and billing

SEO Setup (Existing Site)

$7,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 complete accepted page inventory: Identify every existing page and image asset before acceptance; proposed planning envelope is 50 pages and 200 images, with a written quote if inventory is larger.
  • 1 on-page SEO implementation: Titles/meta on all accepted pages, image-alt review on all accepted images, internal-link corrections and one agreed schema implementation.
  • 1 sitemap/robots configuration: Generate/verify sitemap and review robots directives for the accepted site.
  • 10 local citation corrections: Up to 10 existing eligible directory entries; submissions and pending provider responses documented.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing site/domain and one business/location; every page in the accepted inventory included.
Pages, words and records
Accepted exact counts required; proposed envelope 50 pages, 200 images and 10 citation entries.
Formats
Native site edits, schema markup, sitemap and implementation/validation log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute audit-to-action workshop and one 45-minute completion review.
Client inputs
Approved audit findings, complete page/asset inventory, website/profile access and factual business information.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks for the accepted inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve all-page inventory
  • Implement metadata/alt/schema/link changes
  • Update sitemap/robots and citations
  • Validate changes and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Website rebuild
  • New long-form pages
  • Link acquisition
  • Ongoing SEO retainer

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

SEO Setup (Existing Site)

$7,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 complete accepted page inventory: Identify every existing page and image asset before acceptance; proposed planning envelope is 50 pages and 200 images, with a written quote if inventory is larger.
  • 1 on-page SEO implementation: Titles/meta on all accepted pages, image-alt review on all accepted images, internal-link corrections and one agreed schema implementation.
  • 1 sitemap/robots configuration: Generate/verify sitemap and review robots directives for the accepted site.
  • 10 local citation corrections: Up to 10 existing eligible directory entries; submissions and pending provider responses documented.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing site/domain and one business/location; every page in the accepted inventory included.
Pages, words and records
Accepted exact counts required; proposed envelope 50 pages, 200 images and 10 citation entries.
Formats
Native site edits, schema markup, sitemap and implementation/validation log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute audit-to-action workshop and one 45-minute completion review.
Client inputs
Approved audit findings, complete page/asset inventory, website/profile access and factual business information.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks for the accepted inventory after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve all-page inventory
  • Implement metadata/alt/schema/link changes
  • Update sitemap/robots and citations
  • Validate changes and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Website rebuild
  • New long-form pages
  • Link acquisition
  • Ongoing SEO retainer

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$7,000 one timeView Scope
Single Platform SetupSocial Media
Included scope and billing

Single Platform Setup

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 completed social profile: Configure one available account/profile: handle, display name, bio up to 150 words, supported category/contact fields and one destination link.
  • 2 profile/cover assets: One supplied-photo profile treatment and one cover/banner design adapted to current platform field sizes.
  • 1 ownership and access handoff: Record profile/sign-in URLs, client owner and delegated access method; client account spreadsheet updated when an account is actually configured.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One named platform/profile owned by the client.
Pages, words and records
One 150-word bio; one link; one profile treatment and one cover.
Formats
Platform-supported JPEG/PNG images; editable bio and access/status log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved name/bio facts, licensed logo/photo, contact/link information and client participation in verification/access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1 business week, excluding platform verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm ownership and available fields
  • Prepare profile copy/assets
  • Apply approved profile details
  • Record access and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original photoshoot or new identity
  • Ongoing posting/community work
  • Account recovery/appeals
  • Paid verification subscriptions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Platform Setup

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 completed social profile: Configure one available account/profile: handle, display name, bio up to 150 words, supported category/contact fields and one destination link.
  • 2 profile/cover assets: One supplied-photo profile treatment and one cover/banner design adapted to current platform field sizes.
  • 1 ownership and access handoff: Record profile/sign-in URLs, client owner and delegated access method; client account spreadsheet updated when an account is actually configured.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One named platform/profile owned by the client.
Pages, words and records
One 150-word bio; one link; one profile treatment and one cover.
Formats
Platform-supported JPEG/PNG images; editable bio and access/status log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved name/bio facts, licensed logo/photo, contact/link information and client participation in verification/access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
1 business week, excluding platform verification/review time after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm ownership and available fields
  • Prepare profile copy/assets
  • Apply approved profile details
  • Record access and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original photoshoot or new identity
  • Ongoing posting/community work
  • Account recovery/appeals
  • Paid verification subscriptions

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Community Management OnlySocial Media
Included scope and billing

Community Management Only

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 managed community profiles: Up to two named profiles, monitored once each business day Monday–Friday in one agreed window.
  • 150 routine handled interactions per month: Up to 150 incoming threads; replies/DMs/moderation use the approved response matrix.
  • 1 escalation and monthly activity report: Sensitive matters routed to the client; monthly counts, themes, escalations and unresolved threads summarized.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to two profiles/accounts, one designated weekday monitoring window; no weekend coverage.
Pages, words and records
150 routine interaction threads; one monthly report.
Formats
Native replies/DMs/moderation tools; response matrix and activity log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute response/escalation workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Delegated account access, approved response matrix, escalation contacts, prohibited topics and customer-service decision owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycle with monitoring in one agreed Monday–Friday business-day window after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve response/escalation matrix
  • Monitor and handle within monthly cap
  • Escalate sensitive matters
  • Report activity and cap use

Separate costs and exclusions

  • 24-hour, emergency or weekend coverage
  • Resolving refunds/contracts or legal/medical matters
  • New content production
  • Crisis PR

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Community Management Only

$2,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 managed community profiles: Up to two named profiles, monitored once each business day Monday–Friday in one agreed window.
  • 150 routine handled interactions per month: Up to 150 incoming threads; replies/DMs/moderation use the approved response matrix.
  • 1 escalation and monthly activity report: Sensitive matters routed to the client; monthly counts, themes, escalations and unresolved threads summarized.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to two profiles/accounts, one designated weekday monitoring window; no weekend coverage.
Pages, words and records
150 routine interaction threads; one monthly report.
Formats
Native replies/DMs/moderation tools; response matrix and activity log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute response/escalation workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Delegated account access, approved response matrix, escalation contacts, prohibited topics and customer-service decision owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly service cycle with monitoring in one agreed Monday–Friday business-day window after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve response/escalation matrix
  • Monitor and handle within monthly cap
  • Escalate sensitive matters
  • Report activity and cap use

Separate costs and exclusions

  • 24-hour, emergency or weekend coverage
  • Resolving refunds/contracts or legal/medical matters
  • New content production
  • Crisis PR

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,000 / monthView Scope
LinkedIn GhostwritingSocial Media
Included scope and billing

LinkedIn Ghostwriting

$2,200 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 original long-form LinkedIn posts per month: Four distinct posts in the client’s voice, up to 500 words each, with hook, CTA and source/fact checks from supplied materials.
  • 1 voice interview per month: One 30-minute interview and review of up to five supplied writing samples.
  • 4 LinkedIn publishing placements: Four approved posts to one profile on the agreed schedule; editable copy handoff if publishing access is unavailable.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One LinkedIn profile and one named voice/author; four placements/month.
Pages, words and records
Four original posts, up to 500 words each; five voice samples; no automatic duplicate article/newsletter versions.
Formats
Editable text/native LinkedIn post, tracked CTA link where supported; supplied image alt text if applicable.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute monthly voice interview; written approval of all four posts.
Client inputs
Voice samples, approved facts/sources, client-owned account access and one factual/brand approver.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly batch; draft delivery at least 5 business days before agreed first publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Interview and approve topic list
  • Draft four original posts
  • Obtain consolidated approval
  • Publish on agreed schedule or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original illustrations or video
  • Daily engagement/community management
  • Separate LinkedIn articles/newsletters
  • Additional author profiles

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

LinkedIn Ghostwriting

$2,200 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 original long-form LinkedIn posts per month: Four distinct posts in the client’s voice, up to 500 words each, with hook, CTA and source/fact checks from supplied materials.
  • 1 voice interview per month: One 30-minute interview and review of up to five supplied writing samples.
  • 4 LinkedIn publishing placements: Four approved posts to one profile on the agreed schedule; editable copy handoff if publishing access is unavailable.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One LinkedIn profile and one named voice/author; four placements/month.
Pages, words and records
Four original posts, up to 500 words each; five voice samples; no automatic duplicate article/newsletter versions.
Formats
Editable text/native LinkedIn post, tracked CTA link where supported; supplied image alt text if applicable.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute monthly voice interview; written approval of all four posts.
Client inputs
Voice samples, approved facts/sources, client-owned account access and one factual/brand approver.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly batch; draft delivery at least 5 business days before agreed first publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Interview and approve topic list
  • Draft four original posts
  • Obtain consolidated approval
  • Publish on agreed schedule or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original illustrations or video
  • Daily engagement/community management
  • Separate LinkedIn articles/newsletters
  • Additional author profiles

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 / monthView Scope
Single Platform ManagementSocial Media
Included scope and billing

Single Platform Management

$3,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 12 original feed content units per month: 10 still/carousel units (up to 2 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 2 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 12 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 12 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 1 platform using the shared original pool.
  • 30 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 30 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One named social platform and one profile; no separate story distribution is included.
Pages, words and records
12 originals including 2 videos; up to 2 carousels of five slides each; 12 feed placements; 30 routine interaction threads. No additional-platform adaptations or story placements are included.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Platform Management

$3,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 12 original feed content units per month: 10 still/carousel units (up to 2 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 2 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 12 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 12 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 1 platform using the shared original pool.
  • 30 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 30 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One named social platform and one profile; no separate story distribution is included.
Pages, words and records
12 originals including 2 videos; up to 2 carousels of five slides each; 12 feed placements; 30 routine interaction threads. No additional-platform adaptations or story placements are included.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 / monthView Scope
All Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted InventorySocial Media
Included scope and billing

All Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted Inventory

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 complete accepted profile inventory: Identify every active client profile and available fields before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is six accounts.
  • 1 cross-profile identity matrix: Normalize display name/handle where available, bio, link, category and contact details across every accepted account.
  • 1 image refresh set per inventory: One shared supplied-image treatment and up to one cover/banner adaptation for each accepted supported account.
  • 1 access/status log: Record changes, inaccessible fields, platform approvals, ownership/access method and handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Every profile named in the accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope six profiles, with exact count agreed before acceptance.
Pages, words and records
One shared 150-word bio plus platform edits, one profile-image treatment and one cover adaptation per accepted profile.
Formats
Native profile fields; platform-sized JPEG/PNG; editable identity/access matrix.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute inventory meeting and one 45-minute review/handoff.
Client inputs
Complete account inventory, delegated access, approved business details, brand files and permissions.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks for the accepted inventory, excluding platform verification/review after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm complete profile inventory
  • Draft normalized identity matrix
  • Apply approved fields and images
  • Document status/access and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Account recovery or suspension appeals
  • New brand identity
  • Ongoing posting
  • Paid platform verification

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

All Active Profiles — Audit and Cleanup by Accepted Inventory

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 complete accepted profile inventory: Identify every active client profile and available fields before acceptance; proposed starting envelope is six accounts.
  • 1 cross-profile identity matrix: Normalize display name/handle where available, bio, link, category and contact details across every accepted account.
  • 1 image refresh set per inventory: One shared supplied-image treatment and up to one cover/banner adaptation for each accepted supported account.
  • 1 access/status log: Record changes, inaccessible fields, platform approvals, ownership/access method and handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Every profile named in the accepted inventory; proposed starting envelope six profiles, with exact count agreed before acceptance.
Pages, words and records
One shared 150-word bio plus platform edits, one profile-image treatment and one cover adaptation per accepted profile.
Formats
Native profile fields; platform-sized JPEG/PNG; editable identity/access matrix.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute inventory meeting and one 45-minute review/handoff.
Client inputs
Complete account inventory, delegated access, approved business details, brand files and permissions.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
2 business weeks for the accepted inventory, excluding platform verification/review after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm complete profile inventory
  • Draft normalized identity matrix
  • Apply approved fields and images
  • Document status/access and handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Account recovery or suspension appeals
  • New brand identity
  • Ongoing posting
  • Paid platform verification

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Content Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)Social Media
Included scope and billing

Content Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 30 original evergreen written-and-designed posts: 30 distinct message concepts; each includes one still or one carousel up to five slides, with at most 10 carousels in the batch.
  • 30 caption/CTA/accessibility packages: Up to 250 words each, hook, CTA/link, up to eight hashtags and applicable image alt text.
  • 30 additional aspect-ratio exports: One additional agreed aspect-ratio adaptation per original; these are derivatives, not 30 extra originals.
  • 1 scheduling import or organized handoff: Import the 30 approved posts once into a provided compatible scheduling tool, or deliver indexed files and import-ready calendar.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, primary platform and compatible client-owned scheduler; one extra aspect-ratio export per post.
Pages, words and records
30 originals, maximum 10 five-slide carousels, 30 captions and 30 derivative exports; no video or story sequence implied.
Formats
Primary 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 JPEG/PNG; one extra agreed ratio; editable captions/alt text; CSV schedule.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute topic/brand brief and one 45-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Approved evergreen topics, brand templates, selected licensed images, destination links and scheduler access if desired.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revision rounds across the 30 approved directions. New topics or a replaced brand direction after approval require written change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve 30-topic matrix
  • Produce originals and captions
  • Complete consolidated batch revisions
  • Prepare derivative exports
  • Import once or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Daily publishing or community support
  • Original filming or video posts
  • Paid-media management
  • Future content changes after accepted handoff

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Content Bank (30 Posts, One Batch)

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 30 original evergreen written-and-designed posts: 30 distinct message concepts; each includes one still or one carousel up to five slides, with at most 10 carousels in the batch.
  • 30 caption/CTA/accessibility packages: Up to 250 words each, hook, CTA/link, up to eight hashtags and applicable image alt text.
  • 30 additional aspect-ratio exports: One additional agreed aspect-ratio adaptation per original; these are derivatives, not 30 extra originals.
  • 1 scheduling import or organized handoff: Import the 30 approved posts once into a provided compatible scheduling tool, or deliver indexed files and import-ready calendar.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, primary platform and compatible client-owned scheduler; one extra aspect-ratio export per post.
Pages, words and records
30 originals, maximum 10 five-slide carousels, 30 captions and 30 derivative exports; no video or story sequence implied.
Formats
Primary 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 JPEG/PNG; one extra agreed ratio; editable captions/alt text; CSV schedule.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute topic/brand brief and one 45-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Approved evergreen topics, brand templates, selected licensed images, destination links and scheduler access if desired.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
3 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revision rounds across the 30 approved directions. New topics or a replaced brand direction after approval require written change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve 30-topic matrix
  • Produce originals and captions
  • Complete consolidated batch revisions
  • Prepare derivative exports
  • Import once or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Daily publishing or community support
  • Original filming or video posts
  • Paid-media management
  • Future content changes after accepted handoff

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Two Platform Management BundleSocial Media
Included scope and billing

Two Platform Management Bundle

$5,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 16 original feed content units per month: 12 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 4 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 16 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 16 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 1 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 32 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 2 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 4 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 12 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 24 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 60 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 60 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
2 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
16 originals including 4 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 16 added platform adaptations; 32 feed placements; 4 story sets/12 frames/24 story placements; 60 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Two Platform Management Bundle

$5,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 16 original feed content units per month: 12 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 4 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 16 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 16 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 1 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 32 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 2 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 4 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 12 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 24 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 60 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 60 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
2 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
16 originals including 4 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 16 added platform adaptations; 32 feed placements; 4 story sets/12 frames/24 story placements; 60 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$5,300 / monthView Scope
Short Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)Social Media
Included scope and billing

Short Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)

$5,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 12 distinct vertical videos: 12 videos, each 15–60 seconds: hook, edited sequence, basic color/audio adjustment, readable captions, CTA/end frame and cover.
  • 1 footage production route: Either up to 120 selected minutes of client-supplied licensed footage OR one half-day shoot, up to 240 minutes, at the GCM office using an agreed shot list; both routes are not automatically combined.
  • 12 caption and delivery packages: One caption up to 150 words and one MP4 master/cover per video; transcript/caption file where supported.
  • 12 publishing placements or file handoff: One placement per approved video to one named primary profile on the agreed schedule, or indexed file handoff; additional cross-platform placements require accepted scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/act and one primary publishing profile; one 240-minute office shoot OR selected supplied footage route.
Pages, words and records
12 distinct videos at 15–60 seconds, 12 captions and 12 covers; up to 120 selected input minutes; 12 placements if access provided.
Formats
1080×1920 H.264 MP4, readable captions, cover JPEG/PNG and editable caption text; current platform specs confirmed.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute batch review; shoot route includes up to 240 minutes at the office.
Client inputs
Approved themes/claims, selected footage OR available subjects for office shoot, releases/permissions, brand assets, cleared audio and publishing access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch edit rounds within the approved 12 concepts; production corrections distinguished from new concepts, new footage or reshoots.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve 12-video matrix and footage route
  • Capture office session or ingest selected footage
  • Edit/caption and review batch
  • Complete revisions
  • Publish agreed placements or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel or offsite venue filming
  • Performers, hired studio or specialist crew
  • Custom animation
  • Commercial music licensing
  • 36 cross-platform publishing placements by default

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Short Form Video Pack (12 Reels/TikToks)

$5,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 12 distinct vertical videos: 12 videos, each 15–60 seconds: hook, edited sequence, basic color/audio adjustment, readable captions, CTA/end frame and cover.
  • 1 footage production route: Either up to 120 selected minutes of client-supplied licensed footage OR one half-day shoot, up to 240 minutes, at the GCM office using an agreed shot list; both routes are not automatically combined.
  • 12 caption and delivery packages: One caption up to 150 words and one MP4 master/cover per video; transcript/caption file where supported.
  • 12 publishing placements or file handoff: One placement per approved video to one named primary profile on the agreed schedule, or indexed file handoff; additional cross-platform placements require accepted scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/act and one primary publishing profile; one 240-minute office shoot OR selected supplied footage route.
Pages, words and records
12 distinct videos at 15–60 seconds, 12 captions and 12 covers; up to 120 selected input minutes; 12 placements if access provided.
Formats
1080×1920 H.264 MP4, readable captions, cover JPEG/PNG and editable caption text; current platform specs confirmed.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute batch review; shoot route includes up to 240 minutes at the office.
Client inputs
Approved themes/claims, selected footage OR available subjects for office shoot, releases/permissions, brand assets, cleared audio and publishing access.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
4 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch edit rounds within the approved 12 concepts; production corrections distinguished from new concepts, new footage or reshoots.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve 12-video matrix and footage route
  • Capture office session or ingest selected footage
  • Edit/caption and review batch
  • Complete revisions
  • Publish agreed placements or handoff

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel or offsite venue filming
  • Performers, hired studio or specialist crew
  • Custom animation
  • Commercial music licensing
  • 36 cross-platform publishing placements by default

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$5,500 one timeView Scope
Three Platform Management BundleSocial Media
Included scope and billing

Three Platform Management Bundle

$7,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 20 original feed content units per month: 14 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 6 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 20 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 40 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 2 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 60 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 3 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 6 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 18 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 36 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 90 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 90 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
3 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
20 originals including 6 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 40 added platform adaptations; 60 feed placements; 6 story sets/18 frames/36 story placements; 90 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Three Platform Management Bundle

$7,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 20 original feed content units per month: 14 still/carousel units (up to 4 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 6 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 20 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 40 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 2 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 60 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 3 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 6 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 18 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 36 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 90 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 90 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 45-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
3 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
20 originals including 6 videos; 4 carousels at up to five slides; 40 added platform adaptations; 60 feed placements; 6 story sets/18 frames/36 story placements; 90 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 45-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$7,300 / monthView Scope
Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by ScopeSocial Media
Included scope and billing

Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope

$9,400 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 24 original feed content units per month: 16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 24 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 72 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 3 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 96 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 4 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 8 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 24 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 48 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 120 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 120 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 60-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
4 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
24 originals including 8 videos; 6 carousels at up to five slides; 72 added platform adaptations; 96 feed placements; 8 story sets/24 frames/48 story placements; 120 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 60-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Full Social Media Management — Four-Platform Base; Additional Accounts by Scope

$9,400 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 24 original feed content units per month: 16 still/carousel units (up to 6 carousels, each up to five slides) plus up to 8 simple 15–60-second vertical edits from supplied selected media. Videos count inside this total; an unavailable video may be replaced by one agreed still unit, not added. One unit means one distinct message concept using the approved brand template system.
  • 24 caption/CTA packages: Each original includes up to 250 caption words, hook, CTA/link, up to eight relevant hashtags, applicable image alt text or readable video captions, and tracked links where supported.
  • 72 additional platform adaptations per month: Approved originals adapted from the primary platform to 3 additional platform(s); resize/copy/thumbnail changes are derivatives, not new concepts.
  • 96 feed publishing placements per month: One approved feed post on one named account on one date is one placement; total covers 4 platforms using the shared original pool.
  • 8 story sets per month: Each set has one to three individual vertical frames from approved campaign assets: maximum 24 original frames, posted across up to 2 named story-compatible accounts for at most 48 story-frame placements. These are separate from feed placements; crossposts are adaptations.
  • 120 routine community interactions per month: One monitoring window each Monday–Friday business day; up to 120 incoming routine threads. Sensitive matters go to the client.
  • 1 monthly calendar/report: One agreed content calendar, scheduling and one-page report with a 60-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
4 named social platforms, one profile on each; story distribution limited to 2 named supported accounts.
Pages, words and records
24 originals including 8 videos; 6 carousels at up to five slides; 72 added platform adaptations; 96 feed placements; 8 story sets/24 frames/48 story placements; 120 interactions.
Formats
Stills 1080×1080 or 1080×1350 as appropriate; stories/video 1080×1920 MP4, 15–60 seconds; platform-specific final specs confirmed at acceptance; captions/alt text and cover frames.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding/brand workshop and one 60-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Approved brand templates and factual brief; up to 60 selected minutes of licensed footage/month plus selected images; named accounts/access, response matrix, links and one approval owner.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
Monthly planned production batches; draft calendar/assets target 5 business days before first agreed publication after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve monthly account/calendar and original-versus-placement matrix
  • Produce shared originals and included derivative formats
  • Consolidated client approval
  • Schedule placements and handle routine community
  • Report monthly delivery and limits

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming or photography
  • Paid-media management or ad spend
  • Influencer sourcing
  • Unlimited revisions, render generation or community response
  • Standalone 12-video pack

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$9,400 / monthView Scope
Press Release DistributionAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Press Release Distribution

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press release distribution package: Distribute one client-approved release to up to 25 suitable local/trade/niche editorial contacts; list qualification, individualized email intro and one follow-up after 3 business days where appropriate; submission/delivery/response ledger.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
Pages, words and records
One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
Formats
Editable contact/response ledger and email delivery log.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute distribution briefing.
Client inputs
Approved release, source links, spokesperson contact, permitted outreach identity and target exclusions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated target-list correction before sending; approved facts corrected before follow-up.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Presswire/paid-placement costs, release writing and interview facilitation separate; placements/open rates/replies not guaranteed.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Press Release Distribution

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press release distribution package: Distribute one client-approved release to up to 25 suitable local/trade/niche editorial contacts; list qualification, individualized email intro and one follow-up after 3 business days where appropriate; submission/delivery/response ledger.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
Pages, words and records
One approved story, one release, up to 25 qualified editorial contacts and one follow-up per contact.
Formats
Editable contact/response ledger and email delivery log.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute distribution briefing.
Client inputs
Approved release, source links, spokesperson contact, permitted outreach identity and target exclusions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated target-list correction before sending; approved facts corrected before follow-up.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Presswire/paid-placement costs, release writing and interview facilitation separate; placements/open rates/replies not guaranteed.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Single Ad Creative, One PlatformAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Single Ad Creative, One Platform

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single ad creative, one platform package: One static ad concept for one named platform; one headline/body/CTA, one master design and up to 3 placement sizes; two consolidated refinements; export files and copy.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
Formats
JPG/PNG exports and editable copy; source design in the agreed licensed tool.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute creative briefing and one 20-minute review.
Client inputs
Brand assets, offer, audience, substantiated claims and platform placement specifications.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the single approved concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad account setup, spend, placement management, filmed video and alternate concepts separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Ad Creative, One Platform

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single ad creative, one platform package: One static ad concept for one named platform; one headline/body/CTA, one master design and up to 3 placement sizes; two consolidated refinements; export files and copy.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one static concept, one named ad platform and up to three named placements.
Formats
JPG/PNG exports and editable copy; source design in the agreed licensed tool.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute creative briefing and one 20-minute review.
Client inputs
Brand assets, offer, audience, substantiated claims and platform placement specifications.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the single approved concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad account setup, spend, placement management, filmed video and alternate concepts separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Press Release WritingAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Press Release Writing

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press release writing package: One press release 400–700 words, headline/deck, client-approved facts, boilerplate/contact and embargo note if needed; up to 2 revisions; editable file and PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
Pages, words and records
One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
Formats
DOCX and PDF; headline, deck and embargo line if required.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute news briefing.
Client inputs
Approved facts, dates, quotes, contact information and one authorized spokesperson.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Distribution, interviews beyond one 30-minute briefing, original photography and legal approval separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Press Release Writing

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press release writing package: One press release 400–700 words, headline/deck, client-approved facts, boilerplate/contact and embargo note if needed; up to 2 revisions; editable file and PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
Pages, words and records
One organization, one news event and one 400–700-word release including boilerplate/contact.
Formats
DOCX and PDF; headline, deck and embargo line if required.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute news briefing.
Client inputs
Approved facts, dates, quotes, contact information and one authorized spokesperson.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Distribution, interviews beyond one 30-minute briefing, original photography and legal approval separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,900 one timeView Scope
Print Ad DesignAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Print Ad Design

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 print ad design package: One print ad for one outlet/specification; copy up to 150 words, one design, up to 2 revisions, proof and print-ready PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
Formats
Print-ready PDF to supplied bleed/color specifications; one digital proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute briefing and one 20-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Outlet specification, booking deadline, approved offer/copy and licensed images.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds before final proof.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Publication/printing fees, original photography, outlet charges and additional ad sizes separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Print Ad Design

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 print ad design package: One print ad for one outlet/specification; copy up to 150 words, one design, up to 2 revisions, proof and print-ready PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one outlet, one ad size and up to 150 words.
Formats
Print-ready PDF to supplied bleed/color specifications; one digital proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute briefing and one 20-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Outlet specification, booking deadline, approved offer/copy and licensed images.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds before final proof.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Publication/printing fees, original photography, outlet charges and additional ad sizes separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Media KitAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Media Kit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 media kit package: One coordinated PDF and web-ready media kit: 2 bio lengths, one 2-page fact sheet, 5 short introductions, up to 10 supplied edited photos, press/contact links and downloadable asset zip; PDF up to 12 pages, web version up to one existing-page layout.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
Pages, words and records
One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
Formats
PDF, content/layout on one existing web page, edited JPEG selects and one ZIP.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
Client inputs
Existing bios, facts, press links, licensed photo originals and access to one existing web page.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New photoshoot, new site/domain/build, extensive archive restoration, rights clearance and outreach separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Media Kit

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 media kit package: One coordinated PDF and web-ready media kit: 2 bio lengths, one 2-page fact sheet, 5 short introductions, up to 10 supplied edited photos, press/contact links and downloadable asset zip; PDF up to 12 pages, web version up to one existing-page layout.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
Pages, words and records
One brand/artist, PDF up to 12 pages, two bio lengths, two-page fact sheet, five introductions and ten supplied photos.
Formats
PDF, content/layout on one existing web page, edited JPEG selects and one ZIP.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
Client inputs
Existing bios, facts, press links, licensed photo originals and access to one existing web page.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New photoshoot, new site/domain/build, extensive archive restoration, rights clearance and outreach separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Out of Home / Billboard CreativeAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Out of Home / Billboard Creative

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 out of home / billboard creative package: One large-format concept, headline up to 12 words and up to 3 agreed production sizes; two consolidated revisions; vector/print-ready output and vendor-spec check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
Pages, words and records
One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
Formats
Vector/PDF production files and JPG proofs to three supplied vendor templates.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute briefing and one 30-minute vendor-proof review.
Client inputs
Vendor dimensions, viewing context, substantiated message, marks and licensed imagery.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the approved concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Media rental, print/install/permit costs, vehicle measurements and 3D mockups separate; final vendor proof approval required.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Out of Home / Billboard Creative

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 out of home / billboard creative package: One large-format concept, headline up to 12 words and up to 3 agreed production sizes; two consolidated revisions; vector/print-ready output and vendor-spec check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
Pages, words and records
One concept and three named billboard/transit production sizes; headline up to 12 words.
Formats
Vector/PDF production files and JPG proofs to three supplied vendor templates.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute briefing and one 30-minute vendor-proof review.
Client inputs
Vendor dimensions, viewing context, substantiated message, marks and licensed imagery.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the approved concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Media rental, print/install/permit costs, vehicle measurements and 3D mockups separate; final vendor proof approval required.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Multi Platform Ad Creative PackAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Multi Platform Ad Creative Pack

$4,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 multi platform ad creative pack package: One campaign concept adapted to 5 named platforms; one static master design, headline/body/CTA adapted per platform and up to 3 placement sizes/platform (15 exports); two consolidated refinements.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
Pages, words and records
One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
Formats
Static JPG/PNG/PDF as specified; one headline/body/CTA adaptation per platform.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute matrix review.
Client inputs
Approved campaign brief, licensed assets and a five-platform placement matrix.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds across the complete batch.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional platforms, additional placement sizes beyond the named matrix, original animation/video, media buying/management and third-party licenses require a quote. Existing accepted all-sizing commitments remain unchanged.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Multi Platform Ad Creative Pack

$4,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 multi platform ad creative pack package: One campaign concept adapted to 5 named platforms; one static master design, headline/body/CTA adapted per platform and up to 3 placement sizes/platform (15 exports); two consolidated refinements.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
Pages, words and records
One concept; five named platforms; three named placements per platform, 15 exports total.
Formats
Static JPG/PNG/PDF as specified; one headline/body/CTA adaptation per platform.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute matrix review.
Client inputs
Approved campaign brief, licensed assets and a five-platform placement matrix.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds across the complete batch.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional platforms, additional placement sizes beyond the named matrix, original animation/video, media buying/management and third-party licenses require a quote. Existing accepted all-sizing commitments remain unchanged.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,700 one timeView Scope
Local Media Outreach CampaignAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Local Media Outreach Campaign

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 local media outreach campaign package: One local story over four weeks; 15–25 qualified outlets, one primary pitch, two appropriate follow-up rounds, two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions, coordination of up to three interviews and one outreach/response report.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
Pages, words and records
One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
Formats
Pitch emails, source packet, contact/response ledger and PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions.
Client inputs
Approved facts, spokesperson availability, target exclusions and approved media assets.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the angle/initial pitch before sending.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No paid placement, guaranteed coverage, crisis PR or unlimited interviews; release writing only if stated in accepted bundle.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Local Media Outreach Campaign

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 local media outreach campaign package: One local story over four weeks; 15–25 qualified outlets, one primary pitch, two appropriate follow-up rounds, two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions, coordination of up to three interviews and one outreach/response report.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
Pages, words and records
One local story, 15–25 suitable outlets and two follow-up rounds during four weeks; three interview arrangements.
Formats
Pitch emails, source packet, contact/response ledger and PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and two 30-minute interview-preparation sessions.
Client inputs
Approved facts, spokesperson availability, target exclusions and approved media assets.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the angle/initial pitch before sending.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No paid placement, guaranteed coverage, crisis PR or unlimited interviews; release writing only if stated in accepted bundle.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
PR RetainerAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

PR Retainer

$6,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 pr retainer package: One pitch effort per month to 20 suitable contacts with up to two follow-up rounds; up to three reactive media inquiries handled with client-approved facts; one monthly report and one 60-minute quarterly story-planning session. Separate release writing is included only when expressly named in the accepted scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
Pages, words and records
One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
Formats
Editable pitch/response records and monthly PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding; one 30-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly story session.
Client inputs
Monthly news priorities, approved facts, available spokesperson and escalation contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated pitch revisions per month; factual corrections on the three included reactive responses.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Crisis PR, continuous on-call support, paid placements and original capture require separate scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

PR Retainer

$6,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 pr retainer package: One pitch effort per month to 20 suitable contacts with up to two follow-up rounds; up to three reactive media inquiries handled with client-approved facts; one monthly report and one 60-minute quarterly story-planning session. Separate release writing is included only when expressly named in the accepted scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
Pages, words and records
One organization; one monthly pitch effort to 20 contacts, two follow-ups, three reactive media inquiries and one report per month.
Formats
Editable pitch/response records and monthly PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding; one 30-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly story session.
Client inputs
Monthly news priorities, approved facts, available spokesperson and escalation contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated pitch revisions per month; factual corrections on the three included reactive responses.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Crisis PR, continuous on-call support, paid placements and original capture require separate scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 / monthView Scope
Magazine or Feature Placement EffortAdvertising & PR
Included scope and billing

Magazine or Feature Placement Effort

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 magazine or feature placement effort package: One feature angle, 20 regional/national editorial targets, one interview/source packet, personalized pitches and two follow-up rounds; two 45-minute preparation sessions, coordination of four interviews and a final response ledger.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
Pages, words and records
One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
Formats
Interview/source packet, pitch emails, response ledger and final PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute story briefing and two 45-minute interview-preparation sessions.
Client inputs
Evidence supporting the story, sources, available spokesperson and licensed media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the feature angle/pitch and one factual packet correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial acceptance/publication date and travel outside GCM control; photography, presswire fees and additional feature angles separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Magazine or Feature Placement Effort

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 magazine or feature placement effort package: One feature angle, 20 regional/national editorial targets, one interview/source packet, personalized pitches and two follow-up rounds; two 45-minute preparation sessions, coordination of four interviews and a final response ledger.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
Pages, words and records
One feature angle, 20 editorial targets, two follow-up rounds and four interview arrangements over 6–8 weeks.
Formats
Interview/source packet, pitch emails, response ledger and final PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute story briefing and two 45-minute interview-preparation sessions.
Client inputs
Evidence supporting the story, sources, available spokesperson and licensed media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on the feature angle/pitch and one factual packet correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial acceptance/publication date and travel outside GCM control; photography, presswire fees and additional feature angles separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Newsletter Copy (per Issue)Content & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Newsletter Copy (per Issue)

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 newsletter copy (per issue) package: One 300–600-word newsletter, two subject-line variants and a preheader, one documented subject-line comparison/test recommendation, one consolidated revision and editable delivery. One native A/B subject-line send is included only when the client already has a suitable configured platform/list and approves the send; no additional distribution fee is charged for that expressly accepted test.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
Pages, words and records
One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
Formats
Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF; one documented subject-line comparison.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute issue briefing.
Client inputs
Approved topic, offer, audience, links and one brand-voice sample.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 days. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Newsletter layout/design, new list/platform configuration and ongoing distribution beyond the explicitly included subject-line test require a separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Newsletter Copy (per Issue)

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 newsletter copy (per issue) package: One 300–600-word newsletter, two subject-line variants and a preheader, one documented subject-line comparison/test recommendation, one consolidated revision and editable delivery. One native A/B subject-line send is included only when the client already has a suitable configured platform/list and approves the send; no additional distribution fee is charged for that expressly accepted test.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
Pages, words and records
One newsletter of 300–600 words, two subject variants, one preheader and one CTA.
Formats
Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF; one documented subject-line comparison.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute issue briefing.
Client inputs
Approved topic, offer, audience, links and one brand-voice sample.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 days. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Newsletter layout/design, new list/platform configuration and ongoing distribution beyond the explicitly included subject-line test require a separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$625 one timeView Scope
Bio WritingContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Bio Writing

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bio writing package: One interview up to 30 minutes; 3 biography lengths (up to 600/250/75 words) and up to 2 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
Pages, words and records
One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute interview.
Client inputs
Current biographical facts, milestones, preferred pronouns, credentials and factual approver.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the three versions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Extra subjects, full CV/resume, research interviews and layout separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Bio Writing

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bio writing package: One interview up to 30 minutes; 3 biography lengths (up to 600/250/75 words) and up to 2 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
Pages, words and records
One subject; one interview; three biography lengths capped at 600, 250 and 75 words.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute interview.
Client inputs
Current biographical facts, milestones, preferred pronouns, credentials and factual approver.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the three versions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Extra subjects, full CV/resume, research interviews and layout separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$625 one timeView Scope
Editing or Proofreading PassContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Editing or Proofreading Pass

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 editing or proofreading pass package: One line-edit/proofread pass up to 3000 words; style/consistency comments and tracked changes; one clarification response.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
Pages, words and records
One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
Formats
DOCX tracked changes, clean DOCX and concise style/consistency notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute editorial briefing.
Client inputs
Editable manuscript, target readership, style guide and references already used.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated clarification/correction response; a replacement manuscript is a new scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Substantive rewriting, source verification, new research, layout and additional manuscript versions separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Editing or Proofreading Pass

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 editing or proofreading pass package: One line-edit/proofread pass up to 3000 words; style/consistency comments and tracked changes; one clarification response.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
Pages, words and records
One supplied manuscript up to 3,000 words and one line-edit/proofreading pass.
Formats
DOCX tracked changes, clean DOCX and concise style/consistency notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute editorial briefing.
Client inputs
Editable manuscript, target readership, style guide and references already used.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated clarification/correction response; a replacement manuscript is a new scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Substantive rewriting, source verification, new research, layout and additional manuscript versions separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$875 one timeView Scope
Single Blog Post or ArticleContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Single Blog Post or Article

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single blog post or article package: One researched article of 800–1500 words; up to 5 documented sources, one title/meta description/header structure, up to 2 revisions; editable delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
Pages, words and records
One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc, title, meta description and header structure.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute editorial briefing.
Client inputs
Approved topic, audience, source access and brand-voice example.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Expert interviews beyond one supplied briefing, original images, publishing and proprietary/paywalled research separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Blog Post or Article

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single blog post or article package: One researched article of 800–1500 words; up to 5 documented sources, one title/meta description/header structure, up to 2 revisions; editable delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
Pages, words and records
One article of 800–1,500 words and up to five documented sources.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc, title, meta description and header structure.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute editorial briefing.
Client inputs
Approved topic, audience, source access and brand-voice example.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Expert interviews beyond one supplied briefing, original images, publishing and proprietary/paywalled research separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Artist StatementContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Artist Statement

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artist statement package: One 45-minute artist interview; long statement 500–700 words and short version 150–250 words; up to 3 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
Pages, words and records
One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute interview.
Client inputs
Work samples, practice context, application requirements and approved biographical facts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions across the two versions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Application/grant package, translation, artwork photography and submission separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Artist Statement

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artist statement package: One 45-minute artist interview; long statement 500–700 words and short version 150–250 words; up to 3 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
Pages, words and records
One artist; one statement in 500–700-word and 150–250-word versions.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute interview.
Client inputs
Work samples, practice context, application requirements and approved biographical facts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions across the two versions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Application/grant package, translation, artwork photography and submission separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Practice Area Page (Law Firm)Content & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Practice Area Page (Law Firm)

$1,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 practice area page (law firm) package: One practice area page 800–1200 words, one attorney briefing up to 30 minutes, carefully sourced factual/claims review, title/meta/CTA and up to 2 revisions; attorney approves legal accuracy and publication.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
Pages, words and records
One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
Formats
DOCX with source notes, title, meta description and CTA.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute attorney briefing.
Client inputs
Responsible attorney, practice facts, jurisdictions, approved claims and existing brand language.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions; attorney reviews legal accuracy and advertising requirements before publication.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • GCM does not provide legal opinion/compliance guarantee. Bar filing/fees, build and attorney professional review separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Practice Area Page (Law Firm)

$1,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 practice area page (law firm) package: One practice area page 800–1200 words, one attorney briefing up to 30 minutes, carefully sourced factual/claims review, title/meta/CTA and up to 2 revisions; attorney approves legal accuracy and publication.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
Pages, words and records
One law firm, one practice area and one 800–1,200-word page.
Formats
DOCX with source notes, title, meta description and CTA.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute attorney briefing.
Client inputs
Responsible attorney, practice facts, jurisdictions, approved claims and existing brand language.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions; attorney reviews legal accuracy and advertising requirements before publication.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • GCM does not provide legal opinion/compliance guarantee. Bar filing/fees, build and attorney professional review separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,400 one timeView Scope
About Page RewriteContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

About Page Rewrite

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 about page rewrite package: One discovery interview up to 45 minutes; one About page 600–1000 words, headline/CTA/meta; up to 3 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
Pages, words and records
One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc with headline, CTA and metadata.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery interview.
Client inputs
Business history, audience, credentials, team facts and approved claims.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Site design/build, bios for multiple staff and photography separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

About Page Rewrite

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 about page rewrite package: One discovery interview up to 45 minutes; one About page 600–1000 words, headline/CTA/meta; up to 3 revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
Pages, words and records
One organization and one About page of 600–1,000 words.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc with headline, CTA and metadata.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute discovery interview.
Client inputs
Business history, audience, credentials, team facts and approved claims.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Site design/build, bios for multiple staff and photography separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Press Kit CopyContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Press Kit Copy

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press kit copy package: Long/short biography, fact sheet up to 2 pages, 5 one-line introductions and 3 story-angle pitches; up to 2500 total words and two consolidated revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
Pages, words and records
One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
Formats
Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF copy package.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute source interview.
Client inputs
Biographical facts, organization facts, newsworthiness evidence and approved source links.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the package.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Designed EPK/media kit, photographs, distribution and website build separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Press Kit Copy

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 press kit copy package: Long/short biography, fact sheet up to 2 pages, 5 one-line introductions and 3 story-angle pitches; up to 2500 total words and two consolidated revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
Pages, words and records
One press kit; two bios, a fact sheet up to two pages, five introductions and three story angles; 2,500 words total.
Formats
Editable DOCX/Google Doc and PDF copy package.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute source interview.
Client inputs
Biographical facts, organization facts, newsworthiness evidence and approved source links.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the package.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Designed EPK/media kit, photographs, distribution and website build separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Long Form Thought Leadership PieceContent & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Long Form Thought Leadership Piece

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 long form thought leadership piece package: One 2500–4000-word thought leadership piece, up to 10 documented sources, one 45-minute voice/source interview, up to 3 revisions; editable delivery and source list.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
Pages, words and records
One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and source list.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute voice/source interview and one 30-minute outline review.
Client inputs
Approved thesis, author viewpoint, existing research, source access and voice sample.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New primary study/data collection, peer review, book-length manuscripts and publishing separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Long Form Thought Leadership Piece

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 long form thought leadership piece package: One 2500–4000-word thought leadership piece, up to 10 documented sources, one 45-minute voice/source interview, up to 3 revisions; editable delivery and source list.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
Pages, words and records
One author, one thesis, 2,500–4,000 words and up to ten documented sources.
Formats
DOCX/Google Doc and source list.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute voice/source interview and one 30-minute outline review.
Client inputs
Approved thesis, author viewpoint, existing research, source access and voice sample.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Three consolidated revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New primary study/data collection, peer review, book-length manuscripts and publishing separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Blog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)Content & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Blog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)

$3,800 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 blog content pack (4 posts per month) package: 4 researched posts/month, each 800–1500 words; one monthly editorial calendar, title/meta/header structure per post, up to 2 consolidated batch revisions and editable delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
Pages, words and records
Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
Formats
Editable article files with titles, meta descriptions and heading structures.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute monthly editorial planning session.
Client inputs
Monthly themes, subject access, substantiated claims and brand-voice material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions per month; four article quantities preserved.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • CMS uploading, imagery, multiple interview subjects and social derivatives separate.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Blog Content Pack (4 Posts per Month)

$3,800 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 blog content pack (4 posts per month) package: 4 researched posts/month, each 800–1500 words; one monthly editorial calendar, title/meta/header structure per post, up to 2 consolidated batch revisions and editable delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
Pages, words and records
Four articles per month, 800–1,500 words each, up to five sources per article and one editorial calendar.
Formats
Editable article files with titles, meta descriptions and heading structures.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute monthly editorial planning session.
Client inputs
Monthly themes, subject access, substantiated claims and brand-voice material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions per month; four article quantities preserved.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • CMS uploading, imagery, multiple interview subjects and social derivatives separate.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 / monthView Scope
Full Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)Content & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Full Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full website copy (up to 10 pages) package: Copy for up to ten named website pages, up to 6,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two consolidated revision rounds per page.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
Pages, words and records
Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
Formats
Editable page-by-page copy with title, meta description, headings and CTA per page.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute structure review.
Client inputs
Approved sitemap of up to ten pages, service facts, audience, claims and existing brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds per page, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Product catalogs, blog libraries, additional pages beyond the accepted ten-page scope and website implementation require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Full Website Copy (Up to 10 Pages)

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full website copy (up to 10 pages) package: Copy for up to ten named website pages, up to 6,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two consolidated revision rounds per page.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
Pages, words and records
Up to ten named pages; 6,000 total words.
Formats
Editable page-by-page copy with title, meta description, headings and CTA per page.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 45-minute structure review.
Client inputs
Approved sitemap of up to ten pages, service facts, audience, claims and existing brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds per page, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Product catalogs, blog libraries, additional pages beyond the accepted ten-page scope and website implementation require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Full Website Copy (15-Page Base)Content & Copywriting
Included scope and billing

Full Website Copy (15-Page Base)

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full website copy (15-page base) package: Copy for a finite new-order base of 15 named website pages, up to 10,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two revision rounds and an editorial consistency pass. Additional pages require a written expansion quote.
Platforms, accounts and locations
A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
Pages, words and records
A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
Formats
Editable page-by-page copy, SEO metadata and final consistency pass.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery and two 45-minute outline/batch reviews.
Client inputs
Approved named page inventory, subject access, service/product facts and existing brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
5 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on each submitted batch, up to three batches.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pages beyond the 15-page base, product-description libraries, blog libraries and technical research studies require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Full Website Copy (15-Page Base)

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full website copy (15-page base) package: Copy for a finite new-order base of 15 named website pages, up to 10,000 total words, with SEO titles, metadata, headers and CTAs; two revision rounds and an editorial consistency pass. Additional pages require a written expansion quote.
Platforms, accounts and locations
A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
Pages, words and records
A defined 15-page base for new orders, 10,000 total words; expanded named inventories require a separate quote.
Formats
Editable page-by-page copy, SEO metadata and final consistency pass.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery and two 45-minute outline/batch reviews.
Client inputs
Approved named page inventory, subject access, service/product facts and existing brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
5 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds on each submitted batch, up to three batches.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pages beyond the 15-page base, product-description libraries, blog libraries and technical research studies require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$16,300 one timeView Scope
Streaming Distribution SetupMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Streaming Distribution Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 streaming distribution setup package: One client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks; metadata/ISRC review, approved credits/artwork, submission to the distributor-supported DSPs expressly named in the accepted order, and status handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
Pages, words and records
One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
Formats
Approved metadata/ISRC spreadsheet, submission/status log and account handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute release intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Mastered WAVs, artwork, ownership/split approvals, release date and distributor account/payment method.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated metadata correction before submission and one distributor correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Distributor/license/takedown/royalty costs paid separately; accounts remain client-owned; no platform acceptance/date guarantee.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Streaming Distribution Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 streaming distribution setup package: One client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks; metadata/ISRC review, approved credits/artwork, submission to the distributor-supported DSPs expressly named in the accepted order, and status handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
Pages, words and records
One artist, one client-owned distributor account and one release up to 15 tracks.
Formats
Approved metadata/ISRC spreadsheet, submission/status log and account handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute release intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Mastered WAVs, artwork, ownership/split approvals, release date and distributor account/payment method.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated metadata correction before submission and one distributor correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Distributor/license/takedown/royalty costs paid separately; accounts remain client-owned; no platform acceptance/date guarantee.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Spotify Canvas PackMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Spotify Canvas Pack

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 spotify canvas pack package: 5 distinct Spotify Canvas loops for one release, each within current platform specification; one agreed visual system, supplied/licensed media, exports and upload assistance for 5 tracks; two batch revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
Formats
Five platform-compliant vertical video exports and upload/status log for five tracks.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute visual briefing and one 30-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Track access, approved visual direction and supplied or separately licensed footage/images.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New filming/long-form videos and artist account recovery separate; submission depends on feature/account availability.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Spotify Canvas Pack

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 spotify canvas pack package: 5 distinct Spotify Canvas loops for one release, each within current platform specification; one agreed visual system, supplied/licensed media, exports and upload assistance for 5 tracks; two batch revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
One release and five distinct Canvas loops, one agreed visual treatment.
Formats
Five platform-compliant vertical video exports and upload/status log for five tracks.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute visual briefing and one 30-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Track access, approved visual direction and supplied or separately licensed footage/images.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New filming/long-form videos and artist account recovery separate; submission depends on feature/account availability.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Spotify / Apple Music Editorial PitchMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Spotify / Apple Music Editorial Pitch

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 spotify / apple music editorial pitch package: One release editorial-pitch packet: genre/mood metadata review, pitch copy and Spotify for Artists submission where eligible; Apple Music editorial/distributor route checked and used only if actually available; client submission/status log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
Pages, words and records
One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
Formats
Pitch copy, genre/mood metadata and submission/availability log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute release briefing and one 20-minute pitch review.
Client inputs
Unreleased delivery status, authorized artist access, release facts and at least four weeks lead time.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks (must start 4+ weeks before release). Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated copy revisions before submission; no guaranteed placement.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial playlist acceptance is not guaranteed. Apple Music submission is included only through a route actually available to the artist/distributor account; account eligibility is confirmed before acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Spotify / Apple Music Editorial Pitch

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 spotify / apple music editorial pitch package: One release editorial-pitch packet: genre/mood metadata review, pitch copy and Spotify for Artists submission where eligible; Apple Music editorial/distributor route checked and used only if actually available; client submission/status log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
Pages, words and records
One release; Spotify editorial submission plus the Apple/distributor editorial route only if available to the account.
Formats
Pitch copy, genre/mood metadata and submission/availability log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute release briefing and one 20-minute pitch review.
Client inputs
Unreleased delivery status, authorized artist access, release facts and at least four weeks lead time.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks (must start 4+ weeks before release). Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated copy revisions before submission; no guaranteed placement.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial playlist acceptance is not guaranteed. Apple Music submission is included only through a route actually available to the artist/distributor account; account eligibility is confirmed before acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Lyric VideoMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Lyric Video

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 lyric video package: One lyric video for one supplied mastered track up to 6 minutes; approved exact lyrics, one visual treatment, synchronized lyrics, 1080p master and YouTube upload/metadata; two revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 MP4, thumbnail and one YouTube upload with metadata.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute creative briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
Client inputs
Mastered audio, exact approved lyrics, cleared images/footage and authorized channel access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions; replaced lyrics/audio after approval require change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original filming, extensive character animation, translation/transcription and music rights separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Lyric Video

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 lyric video package: One lyric video for one supplied mastered track up to 6 minutes; approved exact lyrics, one visual treatment, synchronized lyrics, 1080p master and YouTube upload/metadata; two revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
One mastered track up to six minutes, one approved lyric transcript and one visual treatment.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 MP4, thumbnail and one YouTube upload with metadata.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute creative briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
Client inputs
Mastered audio, exact approved lyrics, cleared images/footage and authorized channel access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions; replaced lyrics/audio after approval require change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original filming, extensive character animation, translation/transcription and music rights separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Electronic Press Kit (EPK)Music Marketing
Included scope and billing

Electronic Press Kit (EPK)

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 electronic press kit (epk) package: One artist EPK in PDF and web-ready form: long/short bio, up to 8 supplied photos, up to 6 music/video links, press quote/contact sections; PDF up to 8 pages and content/layout for one existing web page, downloadable zip; two revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
Pages, words and records
One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
Formats
PDF, one existing-page web layout, JPEG selects and asset ZIP.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
Client inputs
Approved bios, photos/permissions, performance links, press quotes and web access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New site hosting/build, photoshoot, fact/license verification beyond supplied records and outreach separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Electronic Press Kit (EPK)

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 electronic press kit (epk) package: One artist EPK in PDF and web-ready form: long/short bio, up to 8 supplied photos, up to 6 music/video links, press quote/contact sections; PDF up to 8 pages and content/layout for one existing web page, downloadable zip; two revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
Pages, words and records
One act; two bios, eight supplied photos, six music/video links and one press/contact section; PDF up to eight pages.
Formats
PDF, one existing-page web layout, JPEG selects and asset ZIP.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 30-minute kit review.
Client inputs
Approved bios, photos/permissions, performance links, press quotes and web access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New site hosting/build, photoshoot, fact/license verification beyond supplied records and outreach separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Working Band OngoingMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Working Band Ongoing

$3,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 working band ongoing package: Up to 2 show campaigns/month, each compact show kit (one master tile adapted square/portrait plus caption/ticket link/event record update); 8 original social units over 2 named platforms, including show tiles; one newsletter 300–600 words and monthly activity summary. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
Pages, words and records
One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
Formats
Square/portrait JPG/PNG, captions, two event records, native newsletter and PDF report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly planning/review.
Client inputs
Show dates/ticket links, licensed show imagery, monthly news and consented mailing list access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Show assets count within 8-unit pool. Separate full per-show package, venue outreach, filming and paid spend not included.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Working Band Ongoing

$3,000 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 working band ongoing package: Up to 2 show campaigns/month, each compact show kit (one master tile adapted square/portrait plus caption/ticket link/event record update); 8 original social units over 2 named platforms, including show tiles; one newsletter 300–600 words and monthly activity summary. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
Pages, words and records
One act; two compact show campaigns, eight original feed units across two accounts (16 placements), one newsletter and one report monthly.
Formats
Square/portrait JPG/PNG, captions, two event records, native newsletter and PDF report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly planning/review.
Client inputs
Show dates/ticket links, licensed show imagery, monthly news and consented mailing list access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Show assets count within 8-unit pool. Separate full per-show package, venue outreach, filming and paid spend not included.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 / monthView Scope
Single Release CampaignMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Single Release Campaign

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single release campaign package: One mastered single; one distributor submission, one cover design OR supplied-cover check, one presave setup, 4-week social rollout of 8 original feed units shared/adapted over 2 named platforms (16 placements maximum), including one release-day unit; tracking/report handover. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
Pages, words and records
One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
Formats
Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, social JPG/PNG/captions and campaign report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute campaign reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered single, rights/splits, release date, authorized distributor/social access and approved artist material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks, ending on release day. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Client supplies the cleared master and approved credits. Distributor subscription and licensing charges, ad spend, photography, video production, venue booking and radio servicing are separate. The included distribution setup/submission service is part of this package and is not charged again.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Release Campaign

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single release campaign package: One mastered single; one distributor submission, one cover design OR supplied-cover check, one presave setup, 4-week social rollout of 8 original feed units shared/adapted over 2 named platforms (16 placements maximum), including one release-day unit; tracking/report handover. Social format allocation: The 8-original social pool contains 8 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 16 image exports total (8 primary and 8 derivative files), with captions and up to 16 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
Pages, words and records
One single; one distribution submission, cover design/check, presave and eight original social units over two accounts (16 placements) across four rollout weeks.
Formats
Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, social JPG/PNG/captions and campaign report. Static social allocation: 8 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 8 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute campaign reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered single, rights/splits, release date, authorized distributor/social access and approved artist material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks, ending on release day. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Client supplies the cleared master and approved credits. Distributor subscription and licensing charges, ad spend, photography, video production, venue booking and radio servicing are separate. The included distribution setup/submission service is part of this package and is not charged again.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Album ArtworkMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Album Artwork

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 album artwork package: One approved cover concept and up to three supporting panels (back, inside, disc); DSP square plus one vinyl and one CD vendor template, two revisions and production-ready outputs.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
Pages, words and records
One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
Formats
Print-ready PDF/vector output to supplied templates and digital cover JPEG.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute art briefing and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Title/credits, supplied vendor dielines, licensed images and label/distributor specifications.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions before final vendor proof.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing/manufacture, supplied-photo licensing, original photoshoot and additional packaging formats separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Album Artwork

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 album artwork package: One approved cover concept and up to three supporting panels (back, inside, disc); DSP square plus one vinyl and one CD vendor template, two revisions and production-ready outputs.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
Pages, words and records
One cover concept and up to three supporting panels; one vinyl vendor template and one CD vendor template plus DSP square.
Formats
Print-ready PDF/vector output to supplied templates and digital cover JPEG.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute art briefing and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Title/credits, supplied vendor dielines, licensed images and label/distributor specifications.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions before final vendor proof.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing/manufacture, supplied-photo licensing, original photoshoot and additional packaging formats separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Touring Artist RetainerMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Touring Artist Retainer

$4,700 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 touring artist retainer package: Four compact per-show campaigns each month: one master tile adapted square/portrait with caption/ticket link and event update per show; 12 original social units total over two named platforms (24 placements), including the four show tiles; one 300–600-word newsletter, four merchandise coordination requests and one 30-minute monthly check-in/report. Social format allocation: The 12-original social pool contains 12 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 24 image exports total (12 primary and 12 derivative files), with captions and up to 24 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
Pages, words and records
One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
Formats
Show tiles/captions, four event records, native newsletter, merch decision log and monthly report. Static social allocation: 12 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 12 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly check-in.
Client inputs
Tour dates, ticket/merch links, licensed assets, production contacts and consented mailing list.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • The four compact show kits are defined in this scope and their social units count within the 12-original monthly pool. Full standalone event kits, original photo/video shoots and performance staffing are separate unless an existing signed agreement includes them.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Touring Artist Retainer

$4,700 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 touring artist retainer package: Four compact per-show campaigns each month: one master tile adapted square/portrait with caption/ticket link and event update per show; 12 original social units total over two named platforms (24 placements), including the four show tiles; one 300–600-word newsletter, four merchandise coordination requests and one 30-minute monthly check-in/report. Social format allocation: The 12-original social pool contains 12 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 24 image exports total (12 primary and 12 derivative files), with captions and up to 24 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
Pages, words and records
One act; four compact show campaigns, 12 original feed units over two accounts (24 placements), one newsletter and four merch coordination requests monthly.
Formats
Show tiles/captions, four event records, native newsletter, merch decision log and monthly report. Static social allocation: 12 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 12 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly check-in.
Client inputs
Tour dates, ticket/merch links, licensed assets, production contacts and consented mailing list.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 6-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revision rounds across the month’s two submitted content batches. Show assets count within the stated original-content pool and are not charged again. A replacement concept or additional deliverable requires a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • The four compact show kits are defined in this scope and their social units count within the 12-original monthly pool. Full standalone event kits, original photo/video shoots and performance staffing are separate unless an existing signed agreement includes them.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,700 / monthView Scope
EP Release CampaignMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

EP Release Campaign

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 ep release campaign package: One EP up to six tracks, distributor submission, two prerelease single pushes, cover art, presave and one campaign landing-page update, and one existing EPK update; 16 original social units over two platforms (32 placements), including release-day messaging; report/handover. Social format allocation: The 16-original social pool contains 16 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 32 image exports total (16 primary and 16 derivative files), with captions and up to 32 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
Pages, words and records
One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
Formats
Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, landing/EPK files, social assets and report. Static social allocation: 16 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 16 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and three 30-minute milestone reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered tracks, rights/credits, artwork brief, release calendar, existing EPK and authorized accounts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds; one metadata correction before submission.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New standalone website/EPK rebuild, filming, DSP/license/ad spend and outreach beyond named scope separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

EP Release Campaign

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 ep release campaign package: One EP up to six tracks, distributor submission, two prerelease single pushes, cover art, presave and one campaign landing-page update, and one existing EPK update; 16 original social units over two platforms (32 placements), including release-day messaging; report/handover. Social format allocation: The 16-original social pool contains 16 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 32 image exports total (16 primary and 16 derivative files), with captions and up to 32 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
Pages, words and records
One EP up to six tracks; two single pushes; 16 original social units over two accounts (32 placements), one landing page and one existing EPK update.
Formats
Distribution log, cover JPEG, presave link, landing/EPK files, social assets and report. Static social allocation: 16 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 16 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and three 30-minute milestone reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered tracks, rights/credits, artwork brief, release calendar, existing EPK and authorized accounts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds; one metadata correction before submission.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New standalone website/EPK rebuild, filming, DSP/license/ad spend and outreach beyond named scope separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Music Video, Single CameraMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Music Video, Single Camera

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 music video, single camera package: One single-camera music video for one track up to 6 minutes: one agreed concept/shot list, half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at one location, edit/color/titles and two revisions; 1080p master plus one vertical promo excerpt up to 30 seconds.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
Pages, words and records
One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 promo excerpt and caption file for speech if present.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute edit review; shoot window is separate.
Client inputs
Mastered track, approved treatment, performer/access permissions and location availability.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel, location/crew/cast/equipment rental, permits and music rights quoted separately; no unbounded generative video production.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Music Video, Single Camera

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 music video, single camera package: One single-camera music video for one track up to 6 minutes: one agreed concept/shot list, half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at one location, edit/color/titles and two revisions; 1080p master plus one vertical promo excerpt up to 30 seconds.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
Pages, words and records
One track up to six minutes; one location; one single-camera shoot up to 240 minutes and one 30-second promo excerpt.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 promo excerpt and caption file for speech if present.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept/shot-list meeting and one 45-minute edit review; shoot window is separate.
Client inputs
Mastered track, approved treatment, performer/access permissions and location availability.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel, location/crew/cast/equipment rental, permits and music rights quoted separately; no unbounded generative video production.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Album Release CampaignMusic Marketing
Included scope and billing

Album Release Campaign

$13,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 album release campaign package: One album up to 15 tracks with distributor submission and three single pushes; cover plus three supporting art panels; presave, one campaign landing-page update and one existing EPK update; 24 originals over two platforms (48 placements); 20 press contacts with one follow-up each and final report. Social format allocation: The 24-original social pool contains 24 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 48 image exports total (24 primary and 24 derivative files), with captions and up to 48 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
Pages, words and records
One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
Formats
Cover plus three panels, distribution log, presave/landing/EPK update, social files and press/report ledger. Static social allocation: 24 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 24 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute milestone reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered album, credits/rights, release schedule, existing EPK and authorized platforms.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
10 to 12 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Separate website rebuild, filming, physical manufacture, licensing/distribution/media fees; no editorial-placement guarantee.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Album Release Campaign

$13,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 album release campaign package: One album up to 15 tracks with distributor submission and three single pushes; cover plus three supporting art panels; presave, one campaign landing-page update and one existing EPK update; 24 originals over two platforms (48 placements); 20 press contacts with one follow-up each and final report. Social format allocation: The 24-original social pool contains 24 static, single-image feed messages. Each has one primary square rendition and one portrait rendition: 48 image exports total (24 primary and 24 derivative files), with captions and up to 48 publishing placements across the two named accounts. Carousels, video and original filming are not included in this social pool; they require a separately accepted scope. Included show tiles and release-day messages count inside these totals.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
Pages, words and records
One album up to 15 tracks; three single pushes; 24 original social units over two accounts (48 placements), 20 press targets and one follow-up each.
Formats
Cover plus three panels, distribution log, presave/landing/EPK update, social files and press/report ledger. Static social allocation: 24 primary square JPG/PNG files plus 24 portrait derivatives; no carousel/video production in this pool.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute milestone reviews.
Client inputs
Mastered album, credits/rights, release schedule, existing EPK and authorized platforms.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
10 to 12 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated art/copy rounds and one pre-submission metadata correction.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Separate website rebuild, filming, physical manufacture, licensing/distribution/media fees; no editorial-placement guarantee.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$13,800 one timeView Scope
Cover Song Mechanical LicenseMusic Licensing
Included scope and billing

Cover Song Mechanical License

$750 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 cover song mechanical license package: Administrative service for one cover-song mechanical license: identify work, request quote/application, client approval, acquisition assistance and document delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
Pages, words and records
One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
Formats
Quote/application status, approved acquisition record and license documentation if granted.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute rights/use intake.
Client inputs
Song/composer identification, intended units/uses/territories and client payment authorization to licensing provider.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One factual correction cycle before submission; expanded uses require a revised provider quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Actual license/royalty fees and legal counsel separate; no sync/public-performance/master-rights grant implied.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Cover Song Mechanical License

$750 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 cover song mechanical license package: Administrative service for one cover-song mechanical license: identify work, request quote/application, client approval, acquisition assistance and document delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
Pages, words and records
One cover song and one defined release/use application through one suitable licensing service.
Formats
Quote/application status, approved acquisition record and license documentation if granted.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute rights/use intake.
Client inputs
Song/composer identification, intended units/uses/territories and client payment authorization to licensing provider.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One factual correction cycle before submission; expanded uses require a revised provider quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Actual license/royalty fees and legal counsel separate; no sync/public-performance/master-rights grant implied.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$750 one timeView Scope
BMI / ASCAP / SESAC RegistrationMusic Licensing
Included scope and billing

BMI / ASCAP / SESAC Registration

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bmi / ascap / sesac registration package: One client songwriter/publisher account at one selected PRO; membership assistance and register up to 10 works from client-approved splits/credits; documentation/handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
Pages, words and records
One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
Formats
Registration worksheet, submission confirmations and ownership/access handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Identity, contributor identifiers, correct titles/splits, existing affiliations and supporting authority.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual correction cycle before submission and one provider query response.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Membership/PRO fees and legal resolution of ownership splits separate; do not promise SESAC invitation acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

BMI / ASCAP / SESAC Registration

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bmi / ascap / sesac registration package: One client songwriter/publisher account at one selected PRO; membership assistance and register up to 10 works from client-approved splits/credits; documentation/handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
Pages, words and records
One songwriter/publisher, one selected PRO account and ten works with client-approved splits.
Formats
Registration worksheet, submission confirmations and ownership/access handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Identity, contributor identifiers, correct titles/splits, existing affiliations and supporting authority.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual correction cycle before submission and one provider query response.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Membership/PRO fees and legal resolution of ownership splits separate; do not promise SESAC invitation acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Sync Licensing Prep (per Track)Music Licensing
Included scope and billing

Sync Licensing Prep (per Track)

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 sync licensing prep (per track) package: One cleared track: metadata/keywords, review provided instrumental/stems, prepare deliverables without remixing, register with one accepted library and approach 3 suitable initial contacts; licensing-status log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
Pages, words and records
One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
Formats
Organized audio delivery ZIP, metadata/keyword sheet and submission/status log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute rights/material briefing and one 20-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Master/instrumental/stems, rights/splits, contact approvals and intended licensing uses.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated metadata/file correction; no remixing or new instrumental recording.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mix/recording/stem separation, library fees, commissions and licensing/legal negotiation separate; placement not guaranteed.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Sync Licensing Prep (per Track)

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 sync licensing prep (per track) package: One cleared track: metadata/keywords, review provided instrumental/stems, prepare deliverables without remixing, register with one accepted library and approach 3 suitable initial contacts; licensing-status log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
Pages, words and records
One cleared track, one supplied instrumental, up to 20 supplied stems, one library application and three initial contacts.
Formats
Organized audio delivery ZIP, metadata/keyword sheet and submission/status log.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute rights/material briefing and one 20-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Master/instrumental/stems, rights/splits, contact approvals and intended licensing uses.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated metadata/file correction; no remixing or new instrumental recording.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mix/recording/stem separation, library fees, commissions and licensing/legal negotiation separate; placement not guaranteed.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Eventbrite / Ticketing SetupEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Eventbrite / Ticketing Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 eventbrite / ticketing setup package: One event on one chosen ticketing platform, up to 5 ticket types, one branded page, sales dates/limits and client-approved prices, confirmation copy and one existing-website embed/link; test and handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
Pages, words and records
One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
Formats
Branded native event page, price/availability matrix and six test-case results without purchases.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Event facts, client-approved ticket prices/tax/refund terms, venue capacity and account-owner access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated configuration/copy revisions before sale; changed event rules require a change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ticket/merchant fees, refunds, check-in staffing, custom checkout and multiple events excluded; client owns account.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Eventbrite / Ticketing Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 eventbrite / ticketing setup package: One event on one chosen ticketing platform, up to 5 ticket types, one branded page, sales dates/limits and client-approved prices, confirmation copy and one existing-website embed/link; test and handover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
Pages, words and records
One event, one ticketing account, five ticket types and one existing-site embed/link.
Formats
Branded native event page, price/availability matrix and six test-case results without purchases.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Event facts, client-approved ticket prices/tax/refund terms, venue capacity and account-owner access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated configuration/copy revisions before sale; changed event rules require a change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ticket/merchant fees, refunds, check-in staffing, custom checkout and multiple events excluded; client owns account.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Tour AnnouncementEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Tour Announcement

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tour announcement package: One tour up to 15 confirmed stops; tour poster, one social tile in square/portrait, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word press release; two revisions and delivery matrix.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
Pages, words and records
One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
Formats
Print PDF, JPG/PNG social/schedule assets and DOCX/PDF release.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute route/creative briefing and one 30-minute review.
Client inputs
Confirmed itinerary, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and press contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the announcement package.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Booking, routing, press distribution and continuing date revisions excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Tour Announcement

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tour announcement package: One tour up to 15 confirmed stops; tour poster, one social tile in square/portrait, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word press release; two revisions and delivery matrix.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
Pages, words and records
One tour with 15 confirmed stops, one poster, one square/portrait tile, one schedule graphic and one 400–700-word release.
Formats
Print PDF, JPG/PNG social/schedule assets and DOCX/PDF release.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute route/creative briefing and one 30-minute review.
Client inputs
Confirmed itinerary, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and press contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions across the announcement package.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Booking, routing, press distribution and continuing date revisions excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,900 one timeView Scope
Single Event Campaign, Core AssetsEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Single Event Campaign, Core Assets

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single event campaign, core assets package: One event: one poster master with print/web export, 3 original social square assets with captions/CTA and one calendar-listing copy; two batch revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
Pages, words and records
One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
Formats
Print/web poster, three 1080×1080 JPG/PNG assets with captions/CTA, and listing text up to 300 words.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Confirmed date/venue, ticket link, approved copy, licensed imagery and production deadline.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Posting/submissions, reel, print costs, filming and paid media separate unless explicitly named.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Single Event Campaign, Core Assets

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 single event campaign, core assets package: One event: one poster master with print/web export, 3 original social square assets with captions/CTA and one calendar-listing copy; two batch revisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
Pages, words and records
One event, one poster master, three distinct original square social messages and one listing.
Formats
Print/web poster, three 1080×1080 JPG/PNG assets with captions/CTA, and listing text up to 300 words.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Confirmed date/venue, ticket link, approved copy, licensed imagery and production deadline.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Posting/submissions, reel, print costs, filming and paid media separate unless explicitly named.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Show Schedule DocumentEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Show Schedule Document

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 show schedule: One running order for one event, with up to 60 timed cues, segment durations, responsible crew, contact roles and contingency notes.
  • 1 crew briefing copy: A print PDF plus editable spreadsheet; one cue-numbered working copy and one final issue with version/date.
  • 1 contingency matrix: Up to 10 decision points covering late starts, missing contributors and technical interruptions.
  • 1 cue sheet: Separate condensed operator cue sheet extracted from the running order, up to 60 cues.
  • 1 crew assignment matrix: Up to 12 crew roles mapped to responsibilities, client-provided work contacts and relevant cue numbers; separate editable worksheet and PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; up to 12 crew roles.
Pages, words and records
Up to 60 cues and 10 contingency entries; up to 12 printed pages.
Formats
PDF and XLSX or client-owned Google Sheet; A4 or US Letter.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production intake and one 45-minute schedule walkthrough.
Client inputs
Event date, draft program, stage/technical plans, named crew, access windows and confirmed contributors.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves the current two-week production allowance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for show schedule document.
  • Review show schedule and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Live stage management, equipment operation and onsite crew coverage are outside this document scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Show Schedule Document

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 show schedule: One running order for one event, with up to 60 timed cues, segment durations, responsible crew, contact roles and contingency notes.
  • 1 crew briefing copy: A print PDF plus editable spreadsheet; one cue-numbered working copy and one final issue with version/date.
  • 1 contingency matrix: Up to 10 decision points covering late starts, missing contributors and technical interruptions.
  • 1 cue sheet: Separate condensed operator cue sheet extracted from the running order, up to 60 cues.
  • 1 crew assignment matrix: Up to 12 crew roles mapped to responsibilities, client-provided work contacts and relevant cue numbers; separate editable worksheet and PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; up to 12 crew roles.
Pages, words and records
Up to 60 cues and 10 contingency entries; up to 12 printed pages.
Formats
PDF and XLSX or client-owned Google Sheet; A4 or US Letter.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production intake and one 45-minute schedule walkthrough.
Client inputs
Event date, draft program, stage/technical plans, named crew, access windows and confirmed contributors.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves the current two-week production allowance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for show schedule document.
  • Review show schedule and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Live stage management, equipment operation and onsite crew coverage are outside this document scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Full per Show Campaign — One EventEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Full per Show Campaign — One Event

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event visual system: One event key visual with type, color and image treatment.
  • 1 print poster: One layout at 11×17 inches and one press PDF; one 18×24-inch adaptation.
  • 4 original social concepts: Four distinct event messages derived from one shared key visual, each with caption up to 150 words and CTA; square/portrait adaptations produce eight image exports. These are proposed message concepts, not four independent visual-identity commissions.
  • 4 story frames: Four individual 1080×1920 frames; these are not four multi-frame sequences.
  • 1 event listing copy: One description up to 300 words, one short listing up to 80 words and one ticket-link tracking plan.
  • 1 email announcement: One email up to 400 words with subject, preheader and CTA; one test proof.
  • 2 additional print layouts: One handbill at 5.5×8.5 inches and one flyer at US Letter; press PDFs.
  • 7 header and metadata adaptations: One each: web hero 1920×1080, Facebook event header 1920×1005, Eventbrite header 2160×1080, X header 1500×500, Open Graph 1200×630, email header 1200×400, and YouTube thumbnail 1280×720; verify live platform specifications before production.
  • 3 additional social adaptations: One reel cover 1080×1920, one X post 1600×900 and one LinkedIn square 1080×1080 derived from approved creative.
  • 1 vertical motion reel: One 15–30-second motion edit from supplied imagery;1080×1920 MP4 adapted for TikTok and YouTube Shorts, captions where speech used; original filming excluded.
  • 1 press release: One release up to 600 words in DOCX/PDF with approved event facts.
  • 1 media advisory: One advisory up to 300 words in DOCX/PDF; distribution not included unless explicitly scoped.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, one organizer, up to two social accounts and one client email platform; up to eight social publishing placements if access is provided.
Pages, words and records
One event; four original social concepts and their listed adaptations; release 600 words, advisory 300, listing 300, shortlisting 80, email 400; four captions 150 words each.
Formats
Press PDFs for poster/handbill/flyer; JPG/PNG platform sizes listed in deliverables; vertical H.264 MP4; DOCX/PDF press copy; final platform specifications checked before export.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute approval review.
Client inputs
Confirmed event/venue/date/time, ticket URL, performer names, licensed artwork, brand assets and one release approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15–20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving the current three-to-four-week allowance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for full per show campaign — one event.
  • Review event visual system and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming, full-length video, complex animation, extra edits beyond the specified supplied-media motion reel, physical printing and media distribution require a separately accepted quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Full per Show Campaign — One Event

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event visual system: One event key visual with type, color and image treatment.
  • 1 print poster: One layout at 11×17 inches and one press PDF; one 18×24-inch adaptation.
  • 4 original social concepts: Four distinct event messages derived from one shared key visual, each with caption up to 150 words and CTA; square/portrait adaptations produce eight image exports. These are proposed message concepts, not four independent visual-identity commissions.
  • 4 story frames: Four individual 1080×1920 frames; these are not four multi-frame sequences.
  • 1 event listing copy: One description up to 300 words, one short listing up to 80 words and one ticket-link tracking plan.
  • 1 email announcement: One email up to 400 words with subject, preheader and CTA; one test proof.
  • 2 additional print layouts: One handbill at 5.5×8.5 inches and one flyer at US Letter; press PDFs.
  • 7 header and metadata adaptations: One each: web hero 1920×1080, Facebook event header 1920×1005, Eventbrite header 2160×1080, X header 1500×500, Open Graph 1200×630, email header 1200×400, and YouTube thumbnail 1280×720; verify live platform specifications before production.
  • 3 additional social adaptations: One reel cover 1080×1920, one X post 1600×900 and one LinkedIn square 1080×1080 derived from approved creative.
  • 1 vertical motion reel: One 15–30-second motion edit from supplied imagery;1080×1920 MP4 adapted for TikTok and YouTube Shorts, captions where speech used; original filming excluded.
  • 1 press release: One release up to 600 words in DOCX/PDF with approved event facts.
  • 1 media advisory: One advisory up to 300 words in DOCX/PDF; distribution not included unless explicitly scoped.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, one organizer, up to two social accounts and one client email platform; up to eight social publishing placements if access is provided.
Pages, words and records
One event; four original social concepts and their listed adaptations; release 600 words, advisory 300, listing 300, shortlisting 80, email 400; four captions 150 words each.
Formats
Press PDFs for poster/handbill/flyer; JPG/PNG platform sizes listed in deliverables; vertical H.264 MP4; DOCX/PDF press copy; final platform specifications checked before export.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute approval review.
Client inputs
Confirmed event/venue/date/time, ticket URL, performer names, licensed artwork, brand assets and one release approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15–20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving the current three-to-four-week allowance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for full per show campaign — one event.
  • Review event visual system and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Original onsite filming, full-length video, complex animation, extra edits beyond the specified supplied-media motion reel, physical printing and media distribution require a separately accepted quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
On Site Event Documentation, Half DayEvent Support
Included scope and billing

On Site Event Documentation, Half Day

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 half-day capture session: A 240-minute consecutive onsite capture window at one event, recording photographs and selected video highlights.
  • 40 edited event photographs: Forty selected photographs, color/tonal correction, high-resolution JPEG and web JPEG; no duplicate exports counted as additional photos.
  • 1 video highlight: One 45–60-second 1920×1080 H.264 MP4 with simple titles and licensed or client-cleared audio.
  • 1 vertical excerpt: One 15–30-second 1080×1920 adaptation of the highlight, with readable caption text where speech is used.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; one planned capture operator; crew feasibility confirmed before booking.
Pages, words and records
40 proposed final photographs; a 240-minute consecutive capture window retained from current store.
Formats
High-resolution/web JPEG; 1080p landscape MP4; 1080×1920 vertical MP4; SRT for intelligible spoken content.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute capture briefing; one consolidated remote selects review.
Client inputs
Run of show, venue access, shot priorities, filming permissions/releases, event contact and cleared music if required.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Capture on the accepted calendar after complete inputs; initial edited highlights and photo package within five business days after capture. Each of two consolidated revision rounds returns within three business days of complete feedback; client-delayed revisions are outside the initial-delivery clock.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for on site event documentation, half day.
  • Review half-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Uninterrupted multi-camera performance recording, raw media transfer, live streaming and extensive object removal are separate.
  • Photo/video coverage feasibility depends on event schedule; no promise that every moment is captured.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

On Site Event Documentation, Half Day

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 half-day capture session: A 240-minute consecutive onsite capture window at one event, recording photographs and selected video highlights.
  • 40 edited event photographs: Forty selected photographs, color/tonal correction, high-resolution JPEG and web JPEG; no duplicate exports counted as additional photos.
  • 1 video highlight: One 45–60-second 1920×1080 H.264 MP4 with simple titles and licensed or client-cleared audio.
  • 1 vertical excerpt: One 15–30-second 1080×1920 adaptation of the highlight, with readable caption text where speech is used.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; one planned capture operator; crew feasibility confirmed before booking.
Pages, words and records
40 proposed final photographs; a 240-minute consecutive capture window retained from current store.
Formats
High-resolution/web JPEG; 1080p landscape MP4; 1080×1920 vertical MP4; SRT for intelligible spoken content.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute capture briefing; one consolidated remote selects review.
Client inputs
Run of show, venue access, shot priorities, filming permissions/releases, event contact and cleared music if required.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Capture on the accepted calendar after complete inputs; initial edited highlights and photo package within five business days after capture. Each of two consolidated revision rounds returns within three business days of complete feedback; client-delayed revisions are outside the initial-delivery clock.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for on site event documentation, half day.
  • Review half-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Uninterrupted multi-camera performance recording, raw media transfer, live streaming and extensive object removal are separate.
  • Photo/video coverage feasibility depends on event schedule; no promise that every moment is captured.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Venue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly CalendarEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Venue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly Calendar

$6,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 compact per-show campaign sets per month: For each of up to four events: one event key visual adapted to poster PDF 11×17, one event listing up to 200 words, two original social message concepts with square/portrait exports and two individual story frames. These units are included in the shared monthly content totals, not added or billed again. Existing contracted interpretations remain in force.
  • 8 original social concepts per month: Eight distinct social message concepts total, two per show, derived from venue templates; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait versions and up to 16 placements across two managed accounts. Counted within the four compact kits.
  • 8 individual story frames per month: Eight individual 1080×1920 frames total, two per show; included in the four compact kits.
  • 1 monthly venue email: One email up to 600 words covering the four events; test proof and one scheduled send to a consented client list.
  • 4 calendar updates per month: Up to four event entries on one existing calendar; up to 200 words each.
  • 1 monthly report: Ticket-link click and platform metrics where accessible, with one 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One venue, one existing website calendar, two social accounts and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
Four compact show kits/month; eight original messages,16 static exports,16 publishing placements and eight story frames; one monthly 600-word email and four calendar entries 200 words each.
Formats
Four poster PDFs 11×17;16 static JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; eight story PNG 1080×1920; native email; calendar copy and PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding session; one 30-minute planning meeting and one 30-minute report review per month.
Client inputs
Monthly confirmed calendar at least 10 business days before planned release, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and named venue approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
First calendar in 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; monthly production follows the agreed calendar.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for venue marketing retainer — defined monthly calendar.
  • Review event campaign briefs per month and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional events, paid media, ticketing operations, onsite capture and daily audience response are separately scoped.
  • The source promise of every show requires custom quote when the venue calendar exceeds four events.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Venue Marketing Retainer — Defined Monthly Calendar

$6,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 compact per-show campaign sets per month: For each of up to four events: one event key visual adapted to poster PDF 11×17, one event listing up to 200 words, two original social message concepts with square/portrait exports and two individual story frames. These units are included in the shared monthly content totals, not added or billed again. Existing contracted interpretations remain in force.
  • 8 original social concepts per month: Eight distinct social message concepts total, two per show, derived from venue templates; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait versions and up to 16 placements across two managed accounts. Counted within the four compact kits.
  • 8 individual story frames per month: Eight individual 1080×1920 frames total, two per show; included in the four compact kits.
  • 1 monthly venue email: One email up to 600 words covering the four events; test proof and one scheduled send to a consented client list.
  • 4 calendar updates per month: Up to four event entries on one existing calendar; up to 200 words each.
  • 1 monthly report: Ticket-link click and platform metrics where accessible, with one 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One venue, one existing website calendar, two social accounts and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
Four compact show kits/month; eight original messages,16 static exports,16 publishing placements and eight story frames; one monthly 600-word email and four calendar entries 200 words each.
Formats
Four poster PDFs 11×17;16 static JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; eight story PNG 1080×1920; native email; calendar copy and PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding session; one 30-minute planning meeting and one 30-minute report review per month.
Client inputs
Monthly confirmed calendar at least 10 business days before planned release, ticket links, artist assets/permissions and named venue approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
First calendar in 10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; monthly production follows the agreed calendar.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for venue marketing retainer — defined monthly calendar.
  • Review event campaign briefs per month and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional events, paid media, ticketing operations, onsite capture and daily audience response are separately scoped.
  • The source promise of every show requires custom quote when the venue calendar exceeds four events.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 / monthView Scope
On Site Event Documentation, Full DayEvent Support
Included scope and billing

On Site Event Documentation, Full Day

$7,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full-day capture session: A 480-minute onsite capture window at one event, including agreed break arrangements and planned photo/video priorities.
  • 80 edited event photographs: Eighty distinct selects with color correction, full-resolution and web JPEG versions.
  • 1 event highlight reel: One 2–3-minute 1920×1080 H.264 edit using captured footage, titles and cleared music.
  • 1 social cut: One 30–60-second 1080×1920 cut derived from the reel; captions for audible speech.
  • 1 recap piece: One event recap of 500–700 words with five selected image references.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; crew plan agreed for simultaneous photography and video.
Pages, words and records
A 480-minute capture window;80 proposed photographs; one 2–3-minute reel; one social cut;700 recap words.
Formats
JPEG full/web; H.264 MP4 landscape/vertical; SRT and DOCX/PDF recap.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
Client inputs
Run of show, subject priorities, access/filming permissions, releases, event details and approved names.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Initial highlight reel, photo gallery and recap delivered within seven calendar days after the event, preserving the published deadline. The accepted booking records the exact delivery date and timezone, including weekend/holiday feasibility. Production begins after required inputs and the scheduled capture. Included feedback corrections are scheduled within three business days of complete consolidated feedback; this does not replace or extend the initial seven-calendar-day promise.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for on site event documentation, full day.
  • Review full-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-day coverage, full-length performance capture, raw media delivery and live broadcasting require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

On Site Event Documentation, Full Day

$7,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 full-day capture session: A 480-minute onsite capture window at one event, including agreed break arrangements and planned photo/video priorities.
  • 80 edited event photographs: Eighty distinct selects with color correction, full-resolution and web JPEG versions.
  • 1 event highlight reel: One 2–3-minute 1920×1080 H.264 edit using captured footage, titles and cleared music.
  • 1 social cut: One 30–60-second 1080×1920 cut derived from the reel; captions for audible speech.
  • 1 recap piece: One event recap of 500–700 words with five selected image references.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event at one venue; crew plan agreed for simultaneous photography and video.
Pages, words and records
A 480-minute capture window;80 proposed photographs; one 2–3-minute reel; one social cut;700 recap words.
Formats
JPEG full/web; H.264 MP4 landscape/vertical; SRT and DOCX/PDF recap.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review.
Client inputs
Run of show, subject priorities, access/filming permissions, releases, event details and approved names.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Initial highlight reel, photo gallery and recap delivered within seven calendar days after the event, preserving the published deadline. The accepted booking records the exact delivery date and timezone, including weekend/holiday feasibility. Production begins after required inputs and the scheduled capture. Included feedback corrections are scheduled within three business days of complete consolidated feedback; this does not replace or extend the initial seven-calendar-day promise.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for on site event documentation, full day.
  • Review full-day capture session and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-day coverage, full-length performance capture, raw media delivery and live broadcasting require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$7,000 one timeView Scope
Theatre Production CampaignEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Theatre Production Campaign

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 production poster: One approved key visual; press PDFs at 11×17 and 18×24 inches.
  • 1 program: One 12-page US Letter or 5.5×8.5-inch booklet, up to 3,000 supplied/edited words and 20 credited images.
  • 1 playbill advertisement: One full-page or half-page ad at one publisher-supplied specification.
  • 8 original social concepts: Eight original concepts over an eight-week social rollout, one per week; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait adaptations and up to 16 placements across two accounts.
  • 8 individual story frames: Eight 1080×1920 opening/countdown/cast frames.
  • 1 opening-night press package: One release up to 600 words, one media fact sheet up to 400 words and pitches to up to 10 approved media contacts; one follow-up each.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One production run at one venue; up to two social accounts and one approved press contact list.
Pages, words and records
12 program pages; 3,000 program words; 20 program images; 10 press recipients.
Formats
Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 static; 1080×1920 stories; DOCX/PDF press materials.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute approval meetings.
Client inputs
Rights-cleared production title/art, cast and crew credits, production license restrictions, ticket URL, sponsor ads and one production approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Six business weeks for initial campaign production after complete inputs and scheduled start; social rollout spans eight scheduled weeks.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for theatre production campaign.
  • Review production poster and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing/postage, cast photography, rehearsal filming, ad placement spend and guaranteed coverage are outside this scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Theatre Production Campaign

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 production poster: One approved key visual; press PDFs at 11×17 and 18×24 inches.
  • 1 program: One 12-page US Letter or 5.5×8.5-inch booklet, up to 3,000 supplied/edited words and 20 credited images.
  • 1 playbill advertisement: One full-page or half-page ad at one publisher-supplied specification.
  • 8 original social concepts: Eight original concepts over an eight-week social rollout, one per week; captions up to 150 words, square/portrait adaptations and up to 16 placements across two accounts.
  • 8 individual story frames: Eight 1080×1920 opening/countdown/cast frames.
  • 1 opening-night press package: One release up to 600 words, one media fact sheet up to 400 words and pitches to up to 10 approved media contacts; one follow-up each.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One production run at one venue; up to two social accounts and one approved press contact list.
Pages, words and records
12 program pages; 3,000 program words; 20 program images; 10 press recipients.
Formats
Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 static; 1080×1920 stories; DOCX/PDF press materials.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff and two 30-minute approval meetings.
Client inputs
Rights-cleared production title/art, cast and crew credits, production license restrictions, ticket URL, sponsor ads and one production approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Six business weeks for initial campaign production after complete inputs and scheduled start; social rollout spans eight scheduled weeks.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for theatre production campaign.
  • Review production poster and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing/postage, cast photography, rehearsal filming, ad placement spend and guaranteed coverage are outside this scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Multi Event Series Pack — Four EventsEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Multi Event Series Pack — Four Events

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 shared series identity: One visual system for four events with shared type, color and image treatment.
  • 4 event campaign sets: Four complete per-show gcm-1802 kits. Each includes poster/handbill/flyer, web/Facebook/Eventbrite/X/email headers, Instagram square/portrait/reel cover, TikTok and YouTube vertical motion reel, YouTube thumbnail, X/LinkedIn post, Open Graph, press release up to 600 words and advisory up to 300 words. No separate component charge.
  • 16 original social message concepts: Sixteen distinct message concepts across four campaigns, all derived from the shared series identity;32 square/portrait static exports and up to 32 managed publishing placements. No independent visual identity per message.
  • 1 series calendar: A coordinated publication schedule for all four events with four ticket URLs and tracking conventions.
  • 1 calendar landing page: One page on the existing client website, four event blocks and ticket links, up to 800 words; responsive layout and approval check.
  • 16 individual story frames: Four 1080×1920 frames per event, derived from the four campaign kits; included once in total scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Four events in one series; up to two venues under one organizer; two social accounts and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
Exactly four full campaigns,16 original social concepts,16 individual story frames, one calendar landing page, four releases and four advisories.
Formats
Print PDF; JPG/PNG 1080×1080,1080×1350,1080×1920; editable schedule and copy.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute series kickoff; four 20-minute event check-ins.
Client inputs
Confirmed four-event calendar, licensed performer art/bios, venue details, ticket URLs and one approver for the series.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Six business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; four release dates agreed in advance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for multi event series pack — four events.
  • Review shared series identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Fifth and later events, onsite coverage, ticketing and paid media require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Multi Event Series Pack — Four Events

$11,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 shared series identity: One visual system for four events with shared type, color and image treatment.
  • 4 event campaign sets: Four complete per-show gcm-1802 kits. Each includes poster/handbill/flyer, web/Facebook/Eventbrite/X/email headers, Instagram square/portrait/reel cover, TikTok and YouTube vertical motion reel, YouTube thumbnail, X/LinkedIn post, Open Graph, press release up to 600 words and advisory up to 300 words. No separate component charge.
  • 16 original social message concepts: Sixteen distinct message concepts across four campaigns, all derived from the shared series identity;32 square/portrait static exports and up to 32 managed publishing placements. No independent visual identity per message.
  • 1 series calendar: A coordinated publication schedule for all four events with four ticket URLs and tracking conventions.
  • 1 calendar landing page: One page on the existing client website, four event blocks and ticket links, up to 800 words; responsive layout and approval check.
  • 16 individual story frames: Four 1080×1920 frames per event, derived from the four campaign kits; included once in total scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Four events in one series; up to two venues under one organizer; two social accounts and one email platform.
Pages, words and records
Exactly four full campaigns,16 original social concepts,16 individual story frames, one calendar landing page, four releases and four advisories.
Formats
Print PDF; JPG/PNG 1080×1080,1080×1350,1080×1920; editable schedule and copy.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute series kickoff; four 20-minute event check-ins.
Client inputs
Confirmed four-event calendar, licensed performer art/bios, venue details, ticket URLs and one approver for the series.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Six business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; four release dates agreed in advance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for multi event series pack — four events.
  • Review shared series identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Fifth and later events, onsite coverage, ticketing and paid media require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$11,300 one timeView Scope
Festival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom ScopeEvent Support
Included scope and billing

Festival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom Scope

$21,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 festival visual identity: One key visual, color/type specification and logo-lockup arrangement using supplied event marks.
  • 1 lineup grid: Up to 20 artists across up to three stages and three event days; one landscape and one portrait layout.
  • 1 public event schedule: One schedule with up to 40 timed program entries; accessible text version plus print/screen layouts.
  • 20 artist promo tiles: For each of up to 20 artists, one template populated from approved supplied image/copy and exported as 1080×1080 square and 1080×1350 portrait:40 exports total. These are shared-identity adaptations, not 20 bespoke concepts.
  • 6 original festival social concepts: Six unique announcement/logistics/countdown concepts, each adapted for square/portrait; up to 12 placements across two accounts.
  • 8 onsite sign layouts: Eight distinct directional/information signs, each in one print size up to 24×36 inches.
  • 1 campaign production calendar: One campaign schedule with approvals, ticket links and final supplier handoff dates.
  • 2 wrap social concepts: Two post-event recap concepts using client-supplied event images, up to 150 caption words each; square/portrait exports and up tofour placements across two accounts.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One festival organizer; up to three days, three stages, 20 artists and two social accounts.
Pages, words and records
40 schedule entries;20 artist packs with 40 exports; eight original festival messages total (six pre-event/two wrap),16 square/portrait exports and up to 16 managed placements; eight sign layouts.
Formats
Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 JPG/PNG; schedule PDF plus text; sign files to approved vendor specs.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute production reviews.
Client inputs
Confirmed artist roster/schedule, venue map, artist permissions and technical specs, ticket links, sponsor restrictions and production approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
8–12 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; wrap posts within five business days of receipt of approved event selects.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for festival or multi day event campaign — custom scope.
  • Review festival visual identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Onsite staffing, installation, fabrication, stage production, ticketing, security and unlimited lineup revisions excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Festival or Multi Day Event Campaign — Custom Scope

$21,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 festival visual identity: One key visual, color/type specification and logo-lockup arrangement using supplied event marks.
  • 1 lineup grid: Up to 20 artists across up to three stages and three event days; one landscape and one portrait layout.
  • 1 public event schedule: One schedule with up to 40 timed program entries; accessible text version plus print/screen layouts.
  • 20 artist promo tiles: For each of up to 20 artists, one template populated from approved supplied image/copy and exported as 1080×1080 square and 1080×1350 portrait:40 exports total. These are shared-identity adaptations, not 20 bespoke concepts.
  • 6 original festival social concepts: Six unique announcement/logistics/countdown concepts, each adapted for square/portrait; up to 12 placements across two accounts.
  • 8 onsite sign layouts: Eight distinct directional/information signs, each in one print size up to 24×36 inches.
  • 1 campaign production calendar: One campaign schedule with approvals, ticket links and final supplier handoff dates.
  • 2 wrap social concepts: Two post-event recap concepts using client-supplied event images, up to 150 caption words each; square/portrait exports and up tofour placements across two accounts.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One festival organizer; up to three days, three stages, 20 artists and two social accounts.
Pages, words and records
40 schedule entries;20 artist packs with 40 exports; eight original festival messages total (six pre-event/two wrap),16 square/portrait exports and up to 16 managed placements; eight sign layouts.
Formats
Press PDF; 1080×1080/1350 JPG/PNG; schedule PDF plus text; sign files to approved vendor specs.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute kickoff and four 30-minute production reviews.
Client inputs
Confirmed artist roster/schedule, venue map, artist permissions and technical specs, ticket links, sponsor restrictions and production approver.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
8–12 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; wrap posts within five business days of receipt of approved event selects.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm scheduled start, inputs, scope and third-party cost allowance.
  • Approve working plan for festival or multi day event campaign — custom scope.
  • Review festival visual identity and constituent deliverables, then consolidate revisions.
  • Approve final package and documented handoff or scheduled release.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Onsite staffing, installation, fabrication, stage production, ticketing, security and unlimited lineup revisions excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$21,300 one timeView Scope
Watercolor / Artwork Reproduction PrepPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Watercolor / Artwork Reproduction Prep

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artwork digitization: High-resolution scan or approved capture of one original artwork up to 18×24 inches; document source dimensions and color target.
  • 1 color-corrected master: One 16-bit TIFF master with embedded profile, crop and reproduction cleanup; source fidelity proof.
  • 3 reproduction exports: One print TIFF, one print PDF at agreed dimensions and one web JPEG; resizing is not a new artwork.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One physical original and one intended reproduction vendor.
Pages, words and records
One artwork up to 18×24 inches; master resolution set to 300 ppi at approved output size.
Formats
Profiled TIFF/PDF; sRGB JPEG.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute reproduction briefing and one proof review.
Client inputs
Original artwork, preferred print size/media, vendor profile/specification and authority to reproduce.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days per work after receipt of the artwork, complete specifications and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for watercolor / artwork reproduction prep.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Restoration of damaged originals, physical printing, framing and extra artwork require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Watercolor / Artwork Reproduction Prep

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artwork digitization: High-resolution scan or approved capture of one original artwork up to 18×24 inches; document source dimensions and color target.
  • 1 color-corrected master: One 16-bit TIFF master with embedded profile, crop and reproduction cleanup; source fidelity proof.
  • 3 reproduction exports: One print TIFF, one print PDF at agreed dimensions and one web JPEG; resizing is not a new artwork.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One physical original and one intended reproduction vendor.
Pages, words and records
One artwork up to 18×24 inches; master resolution set to 300 ppi at approved output size.
Formats
Profiled TIFF/PDF; sRGB JPEG.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute reproduction briefing and one proof review.
Client inputs
Original artwork, preferred print size/media, vendor profile/specification and authority to reproduce.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days per work after receipt of the artwork, complete specifications and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for watercolor / artwork reproduction prep.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Restoration of damaged originals, physical printing, framing and extra artwork require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$625 one timeView Scope
Sticker Design + Small Print RunPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Sticker Design + Small Print Run

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 sticker design: One design with proposed maximum 4×4-inch finished size and one die-cut outline.
  • 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF plus transparent PNG and one vendor proof check.
  • 1 included starter print run: 100–250 physical stickers as published; exact count within that range, stock, finish and delivery address set in the accepted order before purchase.
  • 1 vendor coordination: One printer, one proof cycle and one shipment tracked.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one sticker design, one print vendor and one delivery address.
Pages, words and records
One design; included published run 100–250 stickers.
Formats
Vector PDF; PNG 300 ppi at approved size; print vendor dieline.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one digital proof review.
Client inputs
Approved logo/text, rights-cleared art, preferred size/finish, quantity within 100–250 and delivery address.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; vendor production and transit dates must fit the accepted delivery plan.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for sticker design + small print run.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional designs, runs above 250, specialty stock outside the approved allowance and extra destinations require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Sticker Design + Small Print Run

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 sticker design: One design with proposed maximum 4×4-inch finished size and one die-cut outline.
  • 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF plus transparent PNG and one vendor proof check.
  • 1 included starter print run: 100–250 physical stickers as published; exact count within that range, stock, finish and delivery address set in the accepted order before purchase.
  • 1 vendor coordination: One printer, one proof cycle and one shipment tracked.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one sticker design, one print vendor and one delivery address.
Pages, words and records
One design; included published run 100–250 stickers.
Formats
Vector PDF; PNG 300 ppi at approved size; print vendor dieline.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one digital proof review.
Client inputs
Approved logo/text, rights-cleared art, preferred size/finish, quantity within 100–250 and delivery address.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; vendor production and transit dates must fit the accepted delivery plan.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for sticker design + small print run.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional designs, runs above 250, specialty stock outside the approved allowance and extra destinations require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Business Card Design + Print RunPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Business Card Design + Print Run

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 two-sided business card design: One name/contact identity, front and back at 3.5×2 inches; up to 80 words total.
  • 250 printed business cards: 250 cards included as stated in current store; stock/finish and vendor allowance approved before purchase.
  • 1 print production package: Press PDF with bleed/crop settings, web proof and one printer proof review.
  • 1 vendor coordination and delivery: One print run to one delivery address.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One person or organizational contact, one printer, one address.
Pages, words and records
One front/back design;250 printed cards.
Formats
Press PDF; JPEG proof;3.5×2-inch trim with vendor bleed.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one proof approval.
Client inputs
Exact name/title/contact data, logo files, destination address and stock/finish selection.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, subject to the approved print-production and transit schedule.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for business card design + print run.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multiple staff names, extra quantities, foil/embossing outside allowance and expedited transit require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Business Card Design + Print Run

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 two-sided business card design: One name/contact identity, front and back at 3.5×2 inches; up to 80 words total.
  • 250 printed business cards: 250 cards included as stated in current store; stock/finish and vendor allowance approved before purchase.
  • 1 print production package: Press PDF with bleed/crop settings, web proof and one printer proof review.
  • 1 vendor coordination and delivery: One print run to one delivery address.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One person or organizational contact, one printer, one address.
Pages, words and records
One front/back design;250 printed cards.
Formats
Press PDF; JPEG proof;3.5×2-inch trim with vendor bleed.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one proof approval.
Client inputs
Exact name/title/contact data, logo files, destination address and stock/finish selection.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, subject to the approved print-production and transit schedule.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for business card design + print run.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multiple staff names, extra quantities, foil/embossing outside allowance and expedited transit require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Mug, Tote, or Accessory DesignPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Mug, Tote, or Accessory Design

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 accessory surface design: One approved design for one mug, tote, hat or other agreed accessory surface; one manufacturer template.
  • 1 production file package: One vector PDF where applicable, one transparent 300 ppi PNG and one placement proof at the vendor’s actual dimensions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One product type, one imprint surface, one vendor template.
Pages, words and records
One design; proposed artwork maximum 12×16 inches or the smaller vendor imprint limit.
Formats
Vector PDF and transparent PNG 300 ppi; JPEG placement proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one proof review.
Client inputs
Vendor template, dimensions, logo/text/art, material/color and intended print process.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; this preserves the newer store addendum’s one-week delivery rather than the older two-week block.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as stated in the current store addendum; errors against approved specifications are corrections, while a new concept needs written scope.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for mug, tote, or accessory design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Physical products, printing, embroidery digitizing and additional surfaces require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Mug, Tote, or Accessory Design

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 accessory surface design: One approved design for one mug, tote, hat or other agreed accessory surface; one manufacturer template.
  • 1 production file package: One vector PDF where applicable, one transparent 300 ppi PNG and one placement proof at the vendor’s actual dimensions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One product type, one imprint surface, one vendor template.
Pages, words and records
One design; proposed artwork maximum 12×16 inches or the smaller vendor imprint limit.
Formats
Vector PDF and transparent PNG 300 ppi; JPEG placement proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one proof review.
Client inputs
Vendor template, dimensions, logo/text/art, material/color and intended print process.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; this preserves the newer store addendum’s one-week delivery rather than the older two-week block.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as stated in the current store addendum; errors against approved specifications are corrections, while a new concept needs written scope.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for mug, tote, or accessory design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Physical products, printing, embroidery digitizing and additional surfaces require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Hangtag + Label DesignPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Hangtag + Label Design

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 hangtag or label design: One chosen hangtag, product label or packaging label, one SKU, up to two faces, maximum 8×10 inches per face.
  • 1 production package: One print PDF, one dieline layer and one proof image with client-supplied ingredient/warning/barcode copy.
  • 1 vendor coordination: One manufacturer specification review and one proof check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One SKU, one chosen packaging component and one vendor.
Pages, words and records
One design up to two faces; up to 250 supplied words.
Formats
Press PDF with bleed and dieline;300 ppi proof PNG.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute specifications meeting and one proof review.
Client inputs
Exact regulatory/product copy supplied by client, barcode, dimensions, material, logo and printer dieline.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for hangtag + label design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Regulatory/legal certification, barcode registration, physical production and additional SKUs require separate services.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Hangtag + Label Design

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 hangtag or label design: One chosen hangtag, product label or packaging label, one SKU, up to two faces, maximum 8×10 inches per face.
  • 1 production package: One print PDF, one dieline layer and one proof image with client-supplied ingredient/warning/barcode copy.
  • 1 vendor coordination: One manufacturer specification review and one proof check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One SKU, one chosen packaging component and one vendor.
Pages, words and records
One design up to two faces; up to 250 supplied words.
Formats
Press PDF with bleed and dieline;300 ppi proof PNG.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute specifications meeting and one proof review.
Client inputs
Exact regulatory/product copy supplied by client, barcode, dimensions, material, logo and printer dieline.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for hangtag + label design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Regulatory/legal certification, barcode registration, physical production and additional SKUs require separate services.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
T Shirt DesignPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

T Shirt Design

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one garment imprint surface; up to four spot colors or one full-color process file.
  • 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF/SVG where supported, transparent 300 ppi PNG, placement mockup and color separations when the approved print process requires them.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One garment style, one imprint surface and one printer process.
Pages, words and records
One design; two refinements retained from GCM source.
Formats
Vector PDF/SVG,300 ppi PNG and separated spot-color PDF when required.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute creative brief and one consolidated proof review per refinement.
Client inputs
Brand/artist assets, exact wording, garment color, print dimensions and vendor process.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start is the proposed target preserving the newer one-week addendum; schedule accommodates two refinements.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated refinement rounds retained from GCM source. A new concept or added print surface is a change in scope; correcting agreed specifications is not a new direction.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for t shirt design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Garment printing, additional imprint surfaces, embroidered digitizing and a replacement creative concept require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

T Shirt Design

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one garment imprint surface; up to four spot colors or one full-color process file.
  • 1 print-ready package: Vector PDF/SVG where supported, transparent 300 ppi PNG, placement mockup and color separations when the approved print process requires them.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One garment style, one imprint surface and one printer process.
Pages, words and records
One design; two refinements retained from GCM source.
Formats
Vector PDF/SVG,300 ppi PNG and separated spot-color PDF when required.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute creative brief and one consolidated proof review per refinement.
Client inputs
Brand/artist assets, exact wording, garment color, print dimensions and vendor process.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start is the proposed target preserving the newer one-week addendum; schedule accommodates two refinements.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated refinement rounds retained from GCM source. A new concept or added print surface is a change in scope; correcting agreed specifications is not a new direction.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for t shirt design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Garment printing, additional imprint surfaces, embroidered digitizing and a replacement creative concept require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Poster DesignPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Poster Design

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 poster design: One poster at the client’s choice of 11×17 or 18×24 inches; up to 250 words and five supplied images.
  • 1 print-ready export: One press PDF with bleed and embedded/outlined fonts according to printer specs.
  • 1 web version: One RGB JPG at 1080×1350 or a proportionate poster preview; one agreed size.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One poster subject and one printer specification.
Pages, words and records
One design at 11×17 or 18×24 inches;250 words; five images.
Formats
CMYK press PDF where printer requires; sRGB JPG web proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one consolidated proof review.
Client inputs
Final event/product facts, artwork licenses, brand assets and printer specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving current addendum’s one-week target; older main text states two weeks.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to approved content/specifications are distinct from new direction.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for poster design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, extra sizes beyond the included web export and added versions for different events require quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Poster Design

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 poster design: One poster at the client’s choice of 11×17 or 18×24 inches; up to 250 words and five supplied images.
  • 1 print-ready export: One press PDF with bleed and embedded/outlined fonts according to printer specs.
  • 1 web version: One RGB JPG at 1080×1350 or a proportionate poster preview; one agreed size.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One poster subject and one printer specification.
Pages, words and records
One design at 11×17 or 18×24 inches;250 words; five images.
Formats
CMYK press PDF where printer requires; sRGB JPG web proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute brief and one consolidated proof review.
Client inputs
Final event/product facts, artwork licenses, brand assets and printer specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, preserving current addendum’s one-week target; older main text states two weeks.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to approved content/specifications are distinct from new direction.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for poster design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, extra sizes beyond the included web export and added versions for different events require quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Album Art PrintsPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Album Art Prints

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artwork reproduction preparation: One existing album artwork prepared at one fine-art size up to 18×24 inches, with profile, resolution and bleed checked.
  • 1 included first fine-art print run: 25–50 prints retained from current store; exact quantity in this range, stock, size and vendor cost allowance fixed in the accepted order.
  • 1 vendor setup and proof cycle: One vendor account/specification setup, one physical or digital proof review and one coordinated shipment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One album image, one print size, one vendor and one destination.
Pages, words and records
Included initial run 25–50 prints; no new art concept.
Formats
Print-ready TIFF/PDF at approved size/profile; JPEG proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute reproduction brief and one proof review.
Client inputs
High-resolution album art, reproduction rights, print size/paper preference and shipping address.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted schedule must include vendor production/transit.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for album art prints.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New album-art design, framing, extra print runs and multiple destinations require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Album Art Prints

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 artwork reproduction preparation: One existing album artwork prepared at one fine-art size up to 18×24 inches, with profile, resolution and bleed checked.
  • 1 included first fine-art print run: 25–50 prints retained from current store; exact quantity in this range, stock, size and vendor cost allowance fixed in the accepted order.
  • 1 vendor setup and proof cycle: One vendor account/specification setup, one physical or digital proof review and one coordinated shipment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One album image, one print size, one vendor and one destination.
Pages, words and records
Included initial run 25–50 prints; no new art concept.
Formats
Print-ready TIFF/PDF at approved size/profile; JPEG proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute reproduction brief and one proof review.
Client inputs
High-resolution album art, reproduction rights, print size/paper preference and shipping address.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted schedule must include vendor production/transit.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for album art prints.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New album-art design, framing, extra print runs and multiple destinations require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
T Shirt + Print Production SetupPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

T Shirt + Print Production Setup

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one imprint surface, vector/raster exports and color separations if needed.
  • 1 vendor production setup: Configure one Printful, Stitch Texas or approved printer, one garment style and up to six size/color variants.
  • 1 first production order coordination: One client-approved first order of up to 100 units as a proposed administrative cap; proof/specification review, order handoff and status tracking. Published per-unit production is billed at cost.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One vendor, garment style and imprint surface; up to six variants.
Pages, words and records
One design and one coordinated order;100-unit administrative cap proposed.
Formats
Vector PDF and 300 ppi PNG; vendor product/size matrix and approval proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute design/production kickoff and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Artwork/brand files, garment selections, size breakdown, delivery address and approved vendor budget.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with the vendor lead time identified before acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for t shirt + print production setup.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional designs/surfaces, stocked inventory handling, fulfillment and additional orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

T Shirt + Print Production Setup

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 T-shirt design: One artwork composition for one imprint surface, vector/raster exports and color separations if needed.
  • 1 vendor production setup: Configure one Printful, Stitch Texas or approved printer, one garment style and up to six size/color variants.
  • 1 first production order coordination: One client-approved first order of up to 100 units as a proposed administrative cap; proof/specification review, order handoff and status tracking. Published per-unit production is billed at cost.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One vendor, garment style and imprint surface; up to six variants.
Pages, words and records
One design and one coordinated order;100-unit administrative cap proposed.
Formats
Vector PDF and 300 ppi PNG; vendor product/size matrix and approval proof.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute design/production kickoff and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Artwork/brand files, garment selections, size breakdown, delivery address and approved vendor budget.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with the vendor lead time identified before acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for t shirt + print production setup.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional designs/surfaces, stocked inventory handling, fulfillment and additional orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Brochure / Tri Fold DesignPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Brochure / Tri Fold Design

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tri-fold brochure: One six-panel brochure on 8.5×11-inch flat stock, up to 1,200 supplied words edited for clarity and up to 10 supplied images.
  • 1 print-ready package: One press PDF, folded panel order proof and a screen-readable PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization/campaign, one printer and one folded format.
Pages, words and records
Six panels;1,200 words;10 images.
Formats
Press PDF with vendor bleed; screen PDF with links where supplied.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute brief and one 30-minute folded-proof review.
Client inputs
Draft copy, logos/photos with rights, contact/CTA details and printer fold specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for brochure / tri fold design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, original photography, translation and a new research-based copywriting project are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brochure / Tri Fold Design

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tri-fold brochure: One six-panel brochure on 8.5×11-inch flat stock, up to 1,200 supplied words edited for clarity and up to 10 supplied images.
  • 1 print-ready package: One press PDF, folded panel order proof and a screen-readable PDF.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization/campaign, one printer and one folded format.
Pages, words and records
Six panels;1,200 words;10 images.
Formats
Press PDF with vendor bleed; screen PDF with links where supplied.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute brief and one 30-minute folded-proof review.
Client inputs
Draft copy, logos/photos with rights, contact/CTA details and printer fold specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for brochure / tri fold design.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, original photography, translation and a new research-based copywriting project are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Walmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU GroupPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Walmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU Group

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 retailer logo set: One existing brand mark exported in three formats/sizes according to one chosen retailer’s verified requirements.
  • 7 product image exports: Up to seven client-supplied images cleaned/cropped for one SKU group; includes one primary on-white image and up to six secondary/detail images.
  • 1 listing copy set: One title up to 200 characters, five bullets up to 200 characters each and description up to 500 words, subject to retailer category rules; up to five variants share the approved base copy.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One retailer (Walmart, Amazon or Target), one SKU group and up to five variants.
Pages, words and records
Seven images, one listing copy set, three logo exports.
Formats
Retailer-required JPG/PNG dimensions confirmed at start; copy in DOCX/CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute SKU/specification intake and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Product facts/specs, retailer category, SKU/variant matrix, trademark assets and cleared product photos.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for walmart / amazon retailer asset pack — one sku group.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Photography, seller-account applications, retailer fees, translation and compliance/approval guarantees are excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Walmart / Amazon Retailer Asset Pack — One SKU Group

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 retailer logo set: One existing brand mark exported in three formats/sizes according to one chosen retailer’s verified requirements.
  • 7 product image exports: Up to seven client-supplied images cleaned/cropped for one SKU group; includes one primary on-white image and up to six secondary/detail images.
  • 1 listing copy set: One title up to 200 characters, five bullets up to 200 characters each and description up to 500 words, subject to retailer category rules; up to five variants share the approved base copy.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One retailer (Walmart, Amazon or Target), one SKU group and up to five variants.
Pages, words and records
Seven images, one listing copy set, three logo exports.
Formats
Retailer-required JPG/PNG dimensions confirmed at start; copy in DOCX/CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute SKU/specification intake and one 30-minute proof review.
Client inputs
Product facts/specs, retailer category, SKU/variant matrix, trademark assets and cleared product photos.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for walmart / amazon retailer asset pack — one sku group.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Photography, seller-account applications, retailer fees, translation and compliance/approval guarantees are excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Print on Demand Integration — Three ProductsPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Print on Demand Integration — Three Products

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 POD vendor setup: Connect one client-owned Printful, Printify or Gelato account to one supported existing store.
  • 3 configured products: First three products configured with supplied artwork, proposed maximum five variants each, mockups, price fields and mapping.
  • 1 integration verification: Sandbox/draft checkout and order-routing inspection with no paid order; document any physical paid-test requirement for separate authorization.
  • 1 handoff guide: Up to six pages describing artwork changes, product sync and order troubleshooting.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One POD vendor, one existing store, three products and 15 total variants.
Pages, words and records
Three configured products; one routing test and six-page guide.
Formats
Provider art specifications; store product images; PDF handoff and test record.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute integration kickoff and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Client-owned store/vendor access, source artwork licenses, product selections, shipping policy and approved prices.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, supported platform access and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for print on demand integration — three products.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Store rebuild, additional products, inventory/returns management and production/shipping charges are outside service labor.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Print on Demand Integration — Three Products

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 POD vendor setup: Connect one client-owned Printful, Printify or Gelato account to one supported existing store.
  • 3 configured products: First three products configured with supplied artwork, proposed maximum five variants each, mockups, price fields and mapping.
  • 1 integration verification: Sandbox/draft checkout and order-routing inspection with no paid order; document any physical paid-test requirement for separate authorization.
  • 1 handoff guide: Up to six pages describing artwork changes, product sync and order troubleshooting.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One POD vendor, one existing store, three products and 15 total variants.
Pages, words and records
Three configured products; one routing test and six-page guide.
Formats
Provider art specifications; store product images; PDF handoff and test record.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute integration kickoff and one 45-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Client-owned store/vendor access, source artwork licenses, product selections, shipping policy and approved prices.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, supported platform access and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for print on demand integration — three products.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Store rebuild, additional products, inventory/returns management and production/shipping charges are outside service labor.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Catalog Design — 8 to 16 PagesPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Catalog Design — 8 to 16 Pages

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product/art catalog: One 8–16-page catalog, proposed maximum 40 entries, up to 4,000 supplied words and 50 supplied images; contents/grid and consistent item layout.
  • 2 final catalog editions: One press-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF; both represent the same catalog, not additional page inventory.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/catalog edition, one print format and one printer.
Pages, words and records
8–16 total pages including covers;40 entries;4,000 words;50 images.
Formats
Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4 chosen at kickoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute content/structure meeting and two 30-minute proof reviews.
Client inputs
Organized item spreadsheet, approved prices/specs, high-resolution photos, copy and printer specs.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for catalog design — 8 to 16 pages.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, photography, data cleanup beyond supplied table, translation and extra pages require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Catalog Design — 8 to 16 Pages

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product/art catalog: One 8–16-page catalog, proposed maximum 40 entries, up to 4,000 supplied words and 50 supplied images; contents/grid and consistent item layout.
  • 2 final catalog editions: One press-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF; both represent the same catalog, not additional page inventory.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/catalog edition, one print format and one printer.
Pages, words and records
8–16 total pages including covers;40 entries;4,000 words;50 images.
Formats
Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4 chosen at kickoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute content/structure meeting and two 30-minute proof reviews.
Client inputs
Organized item spreadsheet, approved prices/specs, high-resolution photos, copy and printer specs.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for catalog design — 8 to 16 pages.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, photography, data cleanup beyond supplied table, translation and extra pages require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Apparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 DesignsPrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Apparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 Designs

$5,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 apparel design slots: Published scope 3–5 designs retained; final count within this range agreed before purchase, across T-shirts, hoodies or totes; one imprint surface per design.
  • 1 production vendor setup: One POD or print vendor with agreed garment types and artwork specifications.
  • 5 storefront product configurations: Up to five products on one existing Bandcamp or Shopify storefront, one per approved design, up to six variants each; supplied pricing and mockups.
  • 1 production handoff: Design-file set, variant matrix and first-order checklist; no unapproved production purchase.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist/band, one production vendor, one existing storefront; up to five products/30 variants.
Pages, words and records
3–5 original designs; one surface per design; five product configurations.
Formats
Vector PDF/SVG or 300 ppi PNG; provider mockups; product matrix CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute creative/production kickoff and two 30-minute reviews.
Client inputs
Artist marks/references, merchandise rights, garment choices, vendor/store access, size/color choices and price approvals.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for apparel line for artist or band — 3 to 5 designs.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Extra designs/surfaces, store rebuild, physical inventory/fulfillment and unquoted print units require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Apparel Line for Artist or Band — 3 to 5 Designs

$5,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 apparel design slots: Published scope 3–5 designs retained; final count within this range agreed before purchase, across T-shirts, hoodies or totes; one imprint surface per design.
  • 1 production vendor setup: One POD or print vendor with agreed garment types and artwork specifications.
  • 5 storefront product configurations: Up to five products on one existing Bandcamp or Shopify storefront, one per approved design, up to six variants each; supplied pricing and mockups.
  • 1 production handoff: Design-file set, variant matrix and first-order checklist; no unapproved production purchase.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One artist/band, one production vendor, one existing storefront; up to five products/30 variants.
Pages, words and records
3–5 original designs; one surface per design; five product configurations.
Formats
Vector PDF/SVG or 300 ppi PNG; provider mockups; product matrix CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute creative/production kickoff and two 30-minute reviews.
Client inputs
Artist marks/references, merchandise rights, garment choices, vendor/store access, size/color choices and price approvals.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for apparel line for artist or band — 3 to 5 designs.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Extra designs/surfaces, store rebuild, physical inventory/fulfillment and unquoted print units require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$5,500 one timeView Scope
Catalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom ScopePrint & Merchandise
Included scope and billing

Catalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom Scope

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 large catalog: Proposed new-order base 20–32 pages including covers, up to 100 entries,8,000 supplied words and 120 supplied images; larger editions individually scoped.
  • 1 image direction and curation pass: Select and sequence up to 120 client-provided images; one image register noting crops and resolution issues.
  • 2 final catalog editions: One print-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF at one chosen page size.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/catalog edition, one chosen page size and one print vendor.
Pages, words and records
Proposed 20–32-page base;100 entries;8,000 words;120 images. Original 20+ scope retained as open custom quote for larger editions.
Formats
Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute structure workshop and two 45-minute proof reviews.
Client inputs
Organized product/art records, cleared high-resolution images, copy/price approvals and printer specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
25 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for the proposed 32-page maximum.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for catalog design — 20 to 32 pages, custom scope.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Pages above the accepted count, printing, original photography and extensive product-data reconstruction require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Catalog Design — 20 to 32 Pages, Custom Scope

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 large catalog: Proposed new-order base 20–32 pages including covers, up to 100 entries,8,000 supplied words and 120 supplied images; larger editions individually scoped.
  • 1 image direction and curation pass: Select and sequence up to 120 client-provided images; one image register noting crops and resolution issues.
  • 2 final catalog editions: One print-ready PDF and one linked screen PDF at one chosen page size.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand/catalog edition, one chosen page size and one print vendor.
Pages, words and records
Proposed 20–32-page base;100 entries;8,000 words;120 images. Original 20+ scope retained as open custom quote for larger editions.
Formats
Press PDF and optimized screen PDF; US Letter or A4.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute structure workshop and two 45-minute proof reviews.
Client inputs
Organized product/art records, cleared high-resolution images, copy/price approvals and printer specifications.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
25 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for the proposed 32-page maximum.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority to provide source text, images, trademarks and data. Third-party assets require a documented license appropriate to the intended use. Final ownership, editable-file transfer and usage permissions follow the signed agreement; this proposal creates no new legal grant.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm source assets, intended reproduction method and written production allowance.
  • Approve the working proof for catalog design — 20 to 32 pages, custom scope.
  • Consolidate revisions and approve final dimensions, colors, copy and quantity.
  • Handoff final files; coordinate the included order only after the approved vendor quote.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Pages above the accepted count, printing, original photography and extensive product-data reconstruction require written quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Calendly / Booking System SetupBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Calendly / Booking System Setup

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking account configuration: One client-owned Calendly or Acuity account, one staff calendar, availability/timezone/buffers and cancellation text supplied by client.
  • 3 meeting types: Up to three types with duration, location, intake fields and confirmation/reminder settings.
  • 1 website embed: One booking embed or link on one existing page with desktop/mobile verification.
  • 1 handoff: One concise configuration sheet and three controlled test bookings, cancelled after verification.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One booking account, one staff calendar and one existing website.
Pages, words and records
Three meeting types; up to five intake fields per type; one page embed.
Formats
Native booking configuration; PDF settings checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute availability intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Calendar access, timezone, meeting durations, availability, policies and existing site access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Three business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves store’s three-day setup target.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to agreed configuration separate from new meeting types.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for calendly / booking system setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multiple staff calendars, payment collection, custom routing and ongoing scheduling service require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Calendly / Booking System Setup

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking account configuration: One client-owned Calendly or Acuity account, one staff calendar, availability/timezone/buffers and cancellation text supplied by client.
  • 3 meeting types: Up to three types with duration, location, intake fields and confirmation/reminder settings.
  • 1 website embed: One booking embed or link on one existing page with desktop/mobile verification.
  • 1 handoff: One concise configuration sheet and three controlled test bookings, cancelled after verification.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One booking account, one staff calendar and one existing website.
Pages, words and records
Three meeting types; up to five intake fields per type; one page embed.
Formats
Native booking configuration; PDF settings checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute availability intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Calendar access, timezone, meeting durations, availability, policies and existing site access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Three business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; preserves store’s three-day setup target.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round from current addendum; corrections to agreed configuration separate from new meeting types.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for calendly / booking system setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multiple staff calendars, payment collection, custom routing and ongoing scheduling service require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$875 one timeView Scope
Email Forwarding + Custom Domain EmailBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Email Forwarding + Custom Domain Email

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 domain mail-routing configuration: One authoritative DNS zone: document existing MX, configure approved forwarding provider and preserve existing records not in scope.
  • 3 forwarding aliases: Proposed maximum three custom-domain addresses forwarding to one verified existing destination inbox.
  • 1 sender-authentication check: Review SPF and configure supported DKIM for the selected sending service; document DMARC status and delivery test results. Forwarding alone does not establish outbound authenticated sending.
  • 1 handoff record: DNS change list, rollback values and secure ownership/access record in the client account spreadsheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, one forwarding provider, one destination mailbox; up to three aliases.
Pages, words and records
One DNS zone and three delivery tests; no mailbox migration.
Formats
DNS record inventory and PDF setup/rollback notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute routing review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Registrar/DNS authorization, existing MX/provider details, destination inbox verification and outbound-sender requirements.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider/DNS propagation dependency documented.
Revision rounds
One consolidated configuration review; corrective DNS changes are distinguished from changing mail architecture.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for email forwarding + custom domain email.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Full mailbox hosting, historical-mail migration, multiple domains and unsupported outbound sending require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Email Forwarding + Custom Domain Email

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 domain mail-routing configuration: One authoritative DNS zone: document existing MX, configure approved forwarding provider and preserve existing records not in scope.
  • 3 forwarding aliases: Proposed maximum three custom-domain addresses forwarding to one verified existing destination inbox.
  • 1 sender-authentication check: Review SPF and configure supported DKIM for the selected sending service; document DMARC status and delivery test results. Forwarding alone does not establish outbound authenticated sending.
  • 1 handoff record: DNS change list, rollback values and secure ownership/access record in the client account spreadsheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One domain, one forwarding provider, one destination mailbox; up to three aliases.
Pages, words and records
One DNS zone and three delivery tests; no mailbox migration.
Formats
DNS record inventory and PDF setup/rollback notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute routing review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Registrar/DNS authorization, existing MX/provider details, destination inbox verification and outbound-sender requirements.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider/DNS propagation dependency documented.
Revision rounds
One consolidated configuration review; corrective DNS changes are distinguished from changing mail architecture.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for email forwarding + custom domain email.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Full mailbox hosting, historical-mail migration, multiple domains and unsupported outbound sending require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Zapier Automation, Single WorkflowBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Zapier Automation, Single Workflow

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 multi-step Zap: One trigger, up to four action steps and one filter/path; connect up to three client-owned apps.
  • 1 workflow documentation: Trigger/action map, field mapping, credentials ownership references and failure/retry guidance, up to six pages.
  • 10 test cases: Up to 10 accepted test records covering normal, missing-field and duplicate inputs without live customer messages.
  • 4 first-month monitoring checks: One scheduled check per week for the first four weeks, error-log review and corrections against the accepted workflow.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Zapier workspace, one Zap and up to three app accounts.
Pages, words and records
Four action steps, one branch/filter,10 tests; four weekly monitoring checks.
Formats
Native Zap; PDF diagram/settings; sample CSV test records.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute process intake and one 45-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized app access, field schema, sample records, trigger rules and data/privacy approvals.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for build; first-month monitoring follows acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for zapier automation, single workflow.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional workflows, historical data backfill, round-the-clock monitoring and paid-app charges require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Zapier Automation, Single Workflow

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 multi-step Zap: One trigger, up to four action steps and one filter/path; connect up to three client-owned apps.
  • 1 workflow documentation: Trigger/action map, field mapping, credentials ownership references and failure/retry guidance, up to six pages.
  • 10 test cases: Up to 10 accepted test records covering normal, missing-field and duplicate inputs without live customer messages.
  • 4 first-month monitoring checks: One scheduled check per week for the first four weeks, error-log review and corrections against the accepted workflow.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Zapier workspace, one Zap and up to three app accounts.
Pages, words and records
Four action steps, one branch/filter,10 tests; four weekly monitoring checks.
Formats
Native Zap; PDF diagram/settings; sample CSV test records.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute process intake and one 45-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized app access, field schema, sample records, trigger rules and data/privacy approvals.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start for build; first-month monitoring follows acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for zapier automation, single workflow.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional workflows, historical data backfill, round-the-clock monitoring and paid-app charges require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Google Workspace Setup — Up to Five UsersBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Google Workspace Setup — Up to Five Users

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Workspace tenant/domain setup: Verify one client-owned domain and provision selected Workspace plan; configure authorized MX and authentication records without disrupting unrelated DNS.
  • 5 user account setups: Up to five licensed users, secure invitation/recovery ownership and basic mail/calendar access checks; credentials recorded privately where available.
  • 3 mail forwarding/group configurations: Proposed maximum three routing aliases/groups with membership and owner documented.
  • 1 calendar and Drive structure: One shared calendar and up to five shared folders or supported shared-drive areas with an access matrix.
  • 1 administrator handoff: One setup checklist, DNS rollback record, ownership record and client admin walkthrough.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Workspace organization/domain; up to five licensed users.
Pages, words and records
Five users; three groups/aliases; five shared storage areas and one calendar.
Formats
Native Workspace configuration; access matrix XLSX/PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute requirements meeting and one 60-minute admin handoff.
Client inputs
Domain/DNS authorization, chosen paid plan, five-user roster, recovery/admin owner, desired groups and existing mail architecture.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs, licensing availability and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for google workspace setup — up to five users.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mailbox migration, device management, advanced retention/e-discovery, multiple domains and additional users require written scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Google Workspace Setup — Up to Five Users

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Workspace tenant/domain setup: Verify one client-owned domain and provision selected Workspace plan; configure authorized MX and authentication records without disrupting unrelated DNS.
  • 5 user account setups: Up to five licensed users, secure invitation/recovery ownership and basic mail/calendar access checks; credentials recorded privately where available.
  • 3 mail forwarding/group configurations: Proposed maximum three routing aliases/groups with membership and owner documented.
  • 1 calendar and Drive structure: One shared calendar and up to five shared folders or supported shared-drive areas with an access matrix.
  • 1 administrator handoff: One setup checklist, DNS rollback record, ownership record and client admin walkthrough.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Workspace organization/domain; up to five licensed users.
Pages, words and records
Five users; three groups/aliases; five shared storage areas and one calendar.
Formats
Native Workspace configuration; access matrix XLSX/PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute requirements meeting and one 60-minute admin handoff.
Client inputs
Domain/DNS authorization, chosen paid plan, five-user roster, recovery/admin owner, desired groups and existing mail architecture.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs, licensing availability and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for google workspace setup — up to five users.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Mailbox migration, device management, advanced retention/e-discovery, multiple domains and additional users require written scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Reservation System SetupBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Reservation System Setup

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 reservation platform setup: One OpenTable, Resy or Tock account/location with client-approved service hours, booking rules and guest messages.
  • 1 floorplan and table configuration: Proposed maximum 30 tables, three seating zones and two recurring service periods.
  • 1 website reservation integration: One native widget/link on one existing website page.
  • 6 reservation test scenarios: Create/cancel controlled test records covering party sizes, availability, blocked time and confirmation rules; no paid reservations.
  • 1 operator handoff: One staff guide up to eight pages and role/access checklist.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One restaurant/venue location, one reservation platform and one website.
Pages, words and records
30 tables; three zones; two service periods; six tests.
Formats
Native configuration, floorplan reference and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute floorplan/service meeting and one 60-minute staff handoff.
Client inputs
Measured floorplan, capacities, service hours, reservation policies, authorized platform/site access and approving manager.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, provider onboarding and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as in current addendum; correction versus altered service policy distinguished.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for reservation system setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Floorplan surveying, staffing operations, paid guest deposits, multi-location rollout and provider approval guarantees excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Reservation System Setup

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 reservation platform setup: One OpenTable, Resy or Tock account/location with client-approved service hours, booking rules and guest messages.
  • 1 floorplan and table configuration: Proposed maximum 30 tables, three seating zones and two recurring service periods.
  • 1 website reservation integration: One native widget/link on one existing website page.
  • 6 reservation test scenarios: Create/cancel controlled test records covering party sizes, availability, blocked time and confirmation rules; no paid reservations.
  • 1 operator handoff: One staff guide up to eight pages and role/access checklist.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One restaurant/venue location, one reservation platform and one website.
Pages, words and records
30 tables; three zones; two service periods; six tests.
Formats
Native configuration, floorplan reference and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute floorplan/service meeting and one 60-minute staff handoff.
Client inputs
Measured floorplan, capacities, service hours, reservation policies, authorized platform/site access and approving manager.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, provider onboarding and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as in current addendum; correction versus altered service policy distinguished.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for reservation system setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Floorplan surveying, staffing operations, paid guest deposits, multi-location rollout and provider approval guarantees excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Document Automation — Up to Three TemplatesBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Document Automation — Up to Three Templates

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 automated document templates: Up to three client-supplied templates, maximum 10 pages and 25 merge fields each, in PandaDoc, Documint or agreed equivalent.
  • 1 data-to-document workflow: One source table/form mapped to approved fields; up to two conditional sections per template.
  • 1 signature integration: One existing e-signature provider connected where supported and needed, with up to two signer roles.
  • 9 template acceptance tests: Three populated test documents per template, using nonproduction sample data, plus mapping/handoff guide.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One document platform, one data source, one signature provider.
Pages, words and records
Three templates;30 pages total;75 fields total; two signer roles.
Formats
Native templates, PDF output, field-mapping CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute template workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Counsel/client-approved source documents, field definitions, sample data, signer order and authorized platform accounts.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for document automation — up to three templates.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal drafting, additional data sources, custom enterprise SSO and unapproved signature sends are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Document Automation — Up to Three Templates

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 automated document templates: Up to three client-supplied templates, maximum 10 pages and 25 merge fields each, in PandaDoc, Documint or agreed equivalent.
  • 1 data-to-document workflow: One source table/form mapped to approved fields; up to two conditional sections per template.
  • 1 signature integration: One existing e-signature provider connected where supported and needed, with up to two signer roles.
  • 9 template acceptance tests: Three populated test documents per template, using nonproduction sample data, plus mapping/handoff guide.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One document platform, one data source, one signature provider.
Pages, words and records
Three templates;30 pages total;75 fields total; two signer roles.
Formats
Native templates, PDF output, field-mapping CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute template workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Counsel/client-approved source documents, field definitions, sample data, signer order and authorized platform accounts.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for document automation — up to three templates.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal drafting, additional data sources, custom enterprise SSO and unapproved signature sends are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Make.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped WorkflowBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Make.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped Workflow

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 automation scoping specification: Document one business process, up to four connected apps, normal/failure paths, data mappings and acceptance checks.
  • 1 custom workflow build: Proposed base up to 12 nodes/steps, three branches and one webhook; up to two short custom-code transforms of 100 lines each.
  • 15 acceptance test cases: Sample-data tests covering validation, retries, deduplication and error reporting.
  • 1 operations handoff: Diagram, environment/configuration list and operating guide up to 10 pages; owner-controlled credentials.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Make organization or one existing n 8 n instance, four apps and one workflow.
Pages, words and records
12 steps; three branches; one webhook; two code transforms;15 tests.
Formats
Native workflow export/JSON where supported; PDF documentation; test CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute scoping session and two 45-minute review/handoff sessions.
Client inputs
Current process map, supported app/API access, sample inputs, security requirements and expected run volumes.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
3–6 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted scope fixes dependencies and release date.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for make.com / n 8 n custom automation — scoped workflow.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New enterprise infrastructure, unrestricted custom software, multiple workflows and ongoing uptime operations require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Make.com / N 8 n Custom Automation — Scoped Workflow

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 automation scoping specification: Document one business process, up to four connected apps, normal/failure paths, data mappings and acceptance checks.
  • 1 custom workflow build: Proposed base up to 12 nodes/steps, three branches and one webhook; up to two short custom-code transforms of 100 lines each.
  • 15 acceptance test cases: Sample-data tests covering validation, retries, deduplication and error reporting.
  • 1 operations handoff: Diagram, environment/configuration list and operating guide up to 10 pages; owner-controlled credentials.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Make organization or one existing n 8 n instance, four apps and one workflow.
Pages, words and records
12 steps; three branches; one webhook; two code transforms;15 tests.
Formats
Native workflow export/JSON where supported; PDF documentation; test CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute scoping session and two 45-minute review/handoff sessions.
Client inputs
Current process map, supported app/API access, sample inputs, security requirements and expected run volumes.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
3–6 business weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start; accepted scope fixes dependencies and release date.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for make.com / n 8 n custom automation — scoped workflow.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New enterprise infrastructure, unrestricted custom software, multiple workflows and ongoing uptime operations require separate quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,200 one timeView Scope
CRM SetupBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

CRM Setup

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 CRM workspace configuration: One HubSpot, Pipedrive or Notion CRM workspace; up to five users with agreed roles.
  • 1 sales pipeline: Up to eight stages and 15 custom fields with owner/next-action rules.
  • 3 automation rules: Up to three native rules for assignment, reminders or stage changes.
  • 1 existing-contact migration: One validated CSV import of up to 1,000 contact records, one field mapping and duplicate check; client supplies lawful data.
  • 1 handoff and acceptance: 10 test records and one guide covering import, pipeline upkeep and reports.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One CRM workspace; five users; one pipeline and one CSV source.
Pages, words and records
1,000 contacts;15 fields; eight stages; three rules.
Formats
Native CRM; CSV mapping and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute sales-process workshop and one 60-minute team training.
Client inputs
Clean contact export, approved pipeline stages, user roster, field definitions and client-owned platform access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for crm setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Enterprise implementation, multiple pipelines, custom integrations, extensive data repair and records above accepted cap require scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

CRM Setup

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 CRM workspace configuration: One HubSpot, Pipedrive or Notion CRM workspace; up to five users with agreed roles.
  • 1 sales pipeline: Up to eight stages and 15 custom fields with owner/next-action rules.
  • 3 automation rules: Up to three native rules for assignment, reminders or stage changes.
  • 1 existing-contact migration: One validated CSV import of up to 1,000 contact records, one field mapping and duplicate check; client supplies lawful data.
  • 1 handoff and acceptance: 10 test records and one guide covering import, pipeline upkeep and reports.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One CRM workspace; five users; one pipeline and one CSV source.
Pages, words and records
1,000 contacts;15 fields; eight stages; three rules.
Formats
Native CRM; CSV mapping and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute sales-process workshop and one 60-minute team training.
Client inputs
Clean contact export, approved pipeline stages, user roster, field definitions and client-owned platform access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for crm setup.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Enterprise implementation, multiple pipelines, custom integrations, extensive data repair and records above accepted cap require scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Intake Form to CRM PipelineBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Intake Form to CRM Pipeline

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 website intake form: One form with up to 15 fields, required-field validation, consent text supplied/approved by client and spam-control configuration.
  • 1 CRM record integration: Map one form to one CRM pipeline; create/update records with duplicate handling and source attribution.
  • 1 internal notification: One Slack channel or one internal email destination receives approved submission summary.
  • 1 automatic acknowledgement: One client-approved auto-reply up to 200 words, with recipient validation and test mode.
  • 3 follow-up messages: Three distinct messages up to 200 words each; client-approved timing, suppression and stop conditions.
  • 10 acceptance tests: Normal, incomplete, duplicate and opt-out/stop-path records, with guide and ownership handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One website, one form, one CRM, one internal notification destination and one messaging platform.
Pages, words and records
15 form fields; one acknowledgement plus three follow-ups;10 test records.
Formats
Native form/workflow; HTML/plain text messages; field mapping and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute intake journey workshop and one 45-minute acceptance review.
Client inputs
Field definitions, CRM stages, lawful contact/use policy, approved messages/timing, access and named response owner.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, approved copy and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round per current addendum; errors against approved mapping corrected separately from new routing.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for intake form to crm pipeline.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional forms/pipelines, inbound human sales support, purchased contact lists and live bulk sending are outside build scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Intake Form to CRM Pipeline

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 website intake form: One form with up to 15 fields, required-field validation, consent text supplied/approved by client and spam-control configuration.
  • 1 CRM record integration: Map one form to one CRM pipeline; create/update records with duplicate handling and source attribution.
  • 1 internal notification: One Slack channel or one internal email destination receives approved submission summary.
  • 1 automatic acknowledgement: One client-approved auto-reply up to 200 words, with recipient validation and test mode.
  • 3 follow-up messages: Three distinct messages up to 200 words each; client-approved timing, suppression and stop conditions.
  • 10 acceptance tests: Normal, incomplete, duplicate and opt-out/stop-path records, with guide and ownership handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One website, one form, one CRM, one internal notification destination and one messaging platform.
Pages, words and records
15 form fields; one acknowledgement plus three follow-ups;10 test records.
Formats
Native form/workflow; HTML/plain text messages; field mapping and PDF guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute intake journey workshop and one 45-minute acceptance review.
Client inputs
Field definitions, CRM stages, lawful contact/use policy, approved messages/timing, access and named response owner.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, approved copy and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round per current addendum; errors against approved mapping corrected separately from new routing.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for intake form to crm pipeline.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional forms/pipelines, inbound human sales support, purchased contact lists and live bulk sending are outside build scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Online Ordering IntegrationBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Online Ordering Integration

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 online ordering platform configuration: One ChowNow, Toast, Square Online or agreed supported account/location with client-approved business and fulfillment settings.
  • 1 menu and pricing build: Up to 60 items,10 categories and 30 modifier groups from a client-approved menu table.
  • 1 website ordering integration: One ordering link/widget or supported native embed on one existing site.
  • 1 supported POS synchronization: Connect one compatible existing POS where applicable; verify 10 sample SKU/price mappings and document unsupported fields.
  • 8 ordering acceptance scenarios: Use sandbox/draft orders for pickup windows, modifiers, unavailable items and tax/shipping settings supplied by client; no real charge.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One ordering platform, one venue, one POS and one website.
Pages, words and records
60 items;10 categories;30 modifier groups; eight test scenarios.
Formats
Native menu configuration; mapping CSV; PDF operator notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute ordering/menu workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved menu/prices/modifiers, operating hours, fulfillment policies, provider/POS access and tax settings from client adviser.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, provider readiness and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as current addendum specifies; correction of approved menu settings separate from menu redesign.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for online ordering integration.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • POS hardware, food photography, accounting/tax advice, additional locations and paid test orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Online Ordering Integration

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 online ordering platform configuration: One ChowNow, Toast, Square Online or agreed supported account/location with client-approved business and fulfillment settings.
  • 1 menu and pricing build: Up to 60 items,10 categories and 30 modifier groups from a client-approved menu table.
  • 1 website ordering integration: One ordering link/widget or supported native embed on one existing site.
  • 1 supported POS synchronization: Connect one compatible existing POS where applicable; verify 10 sample SKU/price mappings and document unsupported fields.
  • 8 ordering acceptance scenarios: Use sandbox/draft orders for pickup windows, modifiers, unavailable items and tax/shipping settings supplied by client; no real charge.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One ordering platform, one venue, one POS and one website.
Pages, words and records
60 items;10 categories;30 modifier groups; eight test scenarios.
Formats
Native menu configuration; mapping CSV; PDF operator notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute ordering/menu workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Approved menu/prices/modifiers, operating hours, fulfillment policies, provider/POS access and tax settings from client adviser.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs, provider readiness and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated review round as current addendum specifies; correction of approved menu settings separate from menu redesign.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for online ordering integration.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • POS hardware, food photography, accounting/tax advice, additional locations and paid test orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Zapier Automation Pack — Five WorkflowsBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Zapier Automation Pack — Five Workflows

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 multi-step Zaps: Exactly five workflows selected at kickoff; each one trigger, up to four actions and one filter/path; up to five shared app accounts across the pack.
  • 5 workflow documentation sets: One diagram, field map and failure/retry note per Zap; consolidated administrator guide.
  • 30 acceptance test cases: Six test records per workflow, including failed validation and duplicate handling.
  • 4 first-month monitoring checks: Weekly inspection of all five workflows for four weeks; correct failures against the accepted design.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Zapier workspace, five Zaps and up to five connected app accounts.
Pages, words and records
Five workflows;20 actions total; five branches;30 tests.
Formats
Native Zaps; PDF diagrams/guide; sample CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute prioritization workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Ranked five use cases, authorized app access, field mappings, sample data and expected volumes.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; four monitoring weeks follow acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for zapier automation pack — five workflows.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Sixth workflow, historical backfills, complex custom API code and continuous support require written scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Zapier Automation Pack — Five Workflows

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 5 multi-step Zaps: Exactly five workflows selected at kickoff; each one trigger, up to four actions and one filter/path; up to five shared app accounts across the pack.
  • 5 workflow documentation sets: One diagram, field map and failure/retry note per Zap; consolidated administrator guide.
  • 30 acceptance test cases: Six test records per workflow, including failed validation and duplicate handling.
  • 4 first-month monitoring checks: Weekly inspection of all five workflows for four weeks; correct failures against the accepted design.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Zapier workspace, five Zaps and up to five connected app accounts.
Pages, words and records
Five workflows;20 actions total; five branches;30 tests.
Formats
Native Zaps; PDF diagrams/guide; sample CSV.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute prioritization workshop and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Ranked five use cases, authorized app access, field mappings, sample data and expected volumes.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; four monitoring weeks follow acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for zapier automation pack — five workflows.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Sixth workflow, historical backfills, complex custom API code and continuous support require written scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Phone / SMS Automation — TwilioBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Phone / SMS Automation — Twilio

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 client-owned Twilio setup: One project/account and one phone number subject to provider availability and registration requirements.
  • 1 routing map: Up to three destination contacts and two routing branches for the agreed intake/notification purpose.
  • 1 SMS automation flow: Up to six approved message templates of 320 characters each, opt-out/stop handling and one inbound data destination.
  • 12 test scenarios: Nonproduction verification of delivery, routing, missing inputs, replies and stop requests; document provider errors.
  • 1 operator guide: Configuration, usage controls, number ownership and incident/escalation notes up to 10 pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Twilio account, one number, one workflow, three destinations and one data integration.
Pages, words and records
Six templates; two branches;12 tests; production message volume fixed in accepted usage allowance.
Formats
SMS/plaintext templates; native workflow; PDF configuration and test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute routing/consent workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Business registration data supplied directly to provider, approved message/consent text, authorized account access, routing roster and expected send volume.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider registration/number approval dates remain an explicit dependency.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for phone / sms automation — twilio.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Voice call center,24/7 human response, unsolicited campaigns, legal compliance certification and provider approval guarantees excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Phone / SMS Automation — Twilio

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 client-owned Twilio setup: One project/account and one phone number subject to provider availability and registration requirements.
  • 1 routing map: Up to three destination contacts and two routing branches for the agreed intake/notification purpose.
  • 1 SMS automation flow: Up to six approved message templates of 320 characters each, opt-out/stop handling and one inbound data destination.
  • 12 test scenarios: Nonproduction verification of delivery, routing, missing inputs, replies and stop requests; document provider errors.
  • 1 operator guide: Configuration, usage controls, number ownership and incident/escalation notes up to 10 pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Twilio account, one number, one workflow, three destinations and one data integration.
Pages, words and records
Six templates; two branches;12 tests; production message volume fixed in accepted usage allowance.
Formats
SMS/plaintext templates; native workflow; PDF configuration and test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute routing/consent workshop and one 60-minute acceptance/handoff.
Client inputs
Business registration data supplied directly to provider, approved message/consent text, authorized account access, routing roster and expected send volume.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider registration/number approval dates remain an explicit dependency.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for phone / sms automation — twilio.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Voice call center,24/7 human response, unsolicited campaigns, legal compliance certification and provider approval guarantees excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Inventory or Order Management — Custom ScopeBusiness Operations
Included scope and billing

Inventory or Order Management — Custom Scope

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 platform selection and setup: Evaluate up to three supported options against one agreed inventory/order process; configure one selected client-owned account.
  • 1 initial inventory import: One CSV import of up to 500 SKUs across up to two storage locations; mapping and duplicate/unit checks.
  • 3 inventory alert rules: Low-stock alert, supplier reorder reminder and one exception rule, with up to five notification recipients.
  • 1 order status workflow: One existing order-source connection where supported, up to six statuses and one reconciliation report.
  • 15 acceptance test records: Validate stock movement, low-stock thresholds, cancelled orders and duplicate imports; guide and handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One inventory platform, one order source, two storage locations and five users.
Pages, words and records
500 SKUs; six order statuses; three alert rules;15 tests.
Formats
Native system setup; import/mapping CSV; PDF operating guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute process workshop and two 45-minute review/training sessions.
Client inputs
Current inventory CSV, unit definitions, location/supplier lists, reorder thresholds, permissions and supported order-system access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; final written scope reflects source-data condition.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for inventory or order management — custom scope.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Warehouse operations, physical stock counting, enterprise ERP migration, hardware and accounting integration beyond one connection require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Inventory or Order Management — Custom Scope

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 platform selection and setup: Evaluate up to three supported options against one agreed inventory/order process; configure one selected client-owned account.
  • 1 initial inventory import: One CSV import of up to 500 SKUs across up to two storage locations; mapping and duplicate/unit checks.
  • 3 inventory alert rules: Low-stock alert, supplier reorder reminder and one exception rule, with up to five notification recipients.
  • 1 order status workflow: One existing order-source connection where supported, up to six statuses and one reconciliation report.
  • 15 acceptance test records: Validate stock movement, low-stock thresholds, cancelled orders and duplicate imports; guide and handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One inventory platform, one order source, two storage locations and five users.
Pages, words and records
500 SKUs; six order statuses; three alert rules;15 tests.
Formats
Native system setup; import/mapping CSV; PDF operating guide.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute process workshop and two 45-minute review/training sessions.
Client inputs
Current inventory CSV, unit definitions, location/supplier lists, reorder thresholds, permissions and supported order-system access.
Approval
One named client decision-maker supplies consolidated approval; third-party permissions remain subject to the respective owner.
Delivery
20 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; final written scope reflects source-data condition.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Client retains control of its accounts and supplies authorized data/access. Provider software remains subject to its own license and plan. Proposed handoff documents configured workflows and account ownership; final custom-code/file permissions follow the signed agreement, with no new legal grant. Any created account must be recorded securely in the client’s existing account spreadsheet at fulfillment.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Inventory current access, data, dependencies and approved usage allowance.
  • Approve configuration map for inventory or order management — custom scope.
  • Build in draft/test mode; demonstrate agreed success and failure cases.
  • Obtain client acceptance, document configuration and transfer controlled ownership.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Warehouse operations, physical stock counting, enterprise ERP migration, hardware and accounting integration beyond one connection require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Attorney BioLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Attorney Bio

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 long attorney biography: One 500–700-word biography with verified supplied education, admissions, roles and experience.
  • 1 short attorney biography: One 150–250-word derivative for speaking/profile use.
  • 1 qualification/source checklist: A factual approval list covering titles, jurisdictions, dates, awards and claims; unresolved items identified.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One attorney and one firm.
Pages, words and records
Long 700 words maximum; short 250 words; one interview.
Formats
DOCX with tracked revisions and clean PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute attorney interview and one 20-minute approval review.
Client inputs
CurrentCV, firm positioning, verified qualifications, headshot rights and preferred pronouns/name.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Up to two consolidated revision rounds retained from current store; correction of approved facts separate from a new positioning direction.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for attorney bio.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional attorneys, resume drafting, publishing and legal verification beyond supplied evidence require scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Attorney Bio

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 long attorney biography: One 500–700-word biography with verified supplied education, admissions, roles and experience.
  • 1 short attorney biography: One 150–250-word derivative for speaking/profile use.
  • 1 qualification/source checklist: A factual approval list covering titles, jurisdictions, dates, awards and claims; unresolved items identified.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One attorney and one firm.
Pages, words and records
Long 700 words maximum; short 250 words; one interview.
Formats
DOCX with tracked revisions and clean PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute attorney interview and one 20-minute approval review.
Client inputs
CurrentCV, firm positioning, verified qualifications, headshot rights and preferred pronouns/name.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Up to two consolidated revision rounds retained from current store; correction of approved facts separate from a new positioning direction.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for attorney bio.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional attorneys, resume drafting, publishing and legal verification beyond supplied evidence require scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Domain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to TenLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Domain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to Ten

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 domain forwarding configurations: Up to 10 client-owned domains routed to 10 approved existing destination URLs; configure supported HTTPS redirects and preserve unrelated mail/DNS records.
  • 1 domain/redirect register: For each domain: current registrar/DNS, target, redirect behavior and certificate/hosting dependency.
  • 20 redirect checks: HTTP and HTTPS tests for each of 10 domains, including destination and loop detection.
  • 1 rollback/handoff package: Before/after DNS/redirect record and secure account-ownership notes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to 10 domains; one destination site; supported registrar/hosting redirect methods.
Pages, words and records
10 redirects;20 checks; one change register.
Formats
DNS/redirect CSV and PDF test/rollback record.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute domain inventory review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized registrar/DNS/hosting access,10 domain names, approved destination mapping and mail-service record inventory.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; DNS/certificate dependencies tracked.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for domain forwarding for multiple practice urls — up to ten.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Domain purchases, site migrations, backlink repair, ranking guarantees and unrelated email changes excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Domain Forwarding for Multiple Practice URLs — Up to Ten

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 10 domain forwarding configurations: Up to 10 client-owned domains routed to 10 approved existing destination URLs; configure supported HTTPS redirects and preserve unrelated mail/DNS records.
  • 1 domain/redirect register: For each domain: current registrar/DNS, target, redirect behavior and certificate/hosting dependency.
  • 20 redirect checks: HTTP and HTTPS tests for each of 10 domains, including destination and loop detection.
  • 1 rollback/handoff package: Before/after DNS/redirect record and secure account-ownership notes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Up to 10 domains; one destination site; supported registrar/hosting redirect methods.
Pages, words and records
10 redirects;20 checks; one change register.
Formats
DNS/redirect CSV and PDF test/rollback record.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute domain inventory review and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized registrar/DNS/hosting access,10 domain names, approved destination mapping and mail-service record inventory.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; DNS/certificate dependencies tracked.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for domain forwarding for multiple practice urls — up to ten.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Domain purchases, site migrations, backlink repair, ranking guarantees and unrelated email changes excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Practice Area Page — Law FirmLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Practice Area Page — Law Firm

$1,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 practice area page: One 800–1,200-word page for one practice area, with title/meta description, headings, service/process explanation and intakeCTA.
  • 1 claims and terminology review: Check consistency of client-supplied legal facts, qualifications and disclaimers; attorney resolves legal accuracy.
  • 1 existing-site publication: Publish one approved page into one existing template, add up to three internal links and verify desktop/mobile display.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one practice area and one existing website template.
Pages, words and records
One page up to 1,200 words; up to five supplied reference sources; three internal links.
Formats
DOCX draft, clean PDF and one native CMS page.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute attorney interview and one 30-minute final review.
Client inputs
Practice description, approved claims/disclaimers, sources, intake routing and authorized CMS access.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with publication following attorney approval.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for practice area page — law firm.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New website layout, additional practice areas, Bar filing/fees, legal opinions and guaranteed compliance excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Practice Area Page — Law Firm

$1,400 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 practice area page: One 800–1,200-word page for one practice area, with title/meta description, headings, service/process explanation and intakeCTA.
  • 1 claims and terminology review: Check consistency of client-supplied legal facts, qualifications and disclaimers; attorney resolves legal accuracy.
  • 1 existing-site publication: Publish one approved page into one existing template, add up to three internal links and verify desktop/mobile display.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one practice area and one existing website template.
Pages, words and records
One page up to 1,200 words; up to five supplied reference sources; three internal links.
Formats
DOCX draft, clean PDF and one native CMS page.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute attorney interview and one 30-minute final review.
Client inputs
Practice description, approved claims/disclaimers, sources, intake routing and authorized CMS access.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start, with publication following attorney approval.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for practice area page — law firm.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • New website layout, additional practice areas, Bar filing/fees, legal opinions and guaranteed compliance excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,400 one timeView Scope
Firm About PageLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Firm About Page

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 firm About page: One 600–1,000-word page explaining firm history, approach, team structure and client service; title/meta/CTA included.
  • 1 factual approval checklist: List source-dependent claims, affiliations, dates and client-service representations for attorney approval.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One law firm and one website page.
Pages, words and records
Up to 1,000 words; one firm interview; up to five source documents.
Formats
DOCX with tracked changes and clean PDF; publishing separately specified.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute firm interview and one 20-minute approval review.
Client inputs
Firm history, team roster, approved positioning, factual supporting records and preferred intakeCTA.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Up to two consolidated revision rounds as currently stated; changed firm positioning is new scope.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for firm about page.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Individual attorney biographies, website redesign, photography and independent legal opinion require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Firm About Page

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 firm About page: One 600–1,000-word page explaining firm history, approach, team structure and client service; title/meta/CTA included.
  • 1 factual approval checklist: List source-dependent claims, affiliations, dates and client-service representations for attorney approval.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One law firm and one website page.
Pages, words and records
Up to 1,000 words; one firm interview; up to five source documents.
Formats
DOCX with tracked changes and clean PDF; publishing separately specified.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute firm interview and one 20-minute approval review.
Client inputs
Firm history, team roster, approved positioning, factual supporting records and preferred intakeCTA.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Five business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Up to two consolidated revision rounds as currently stated; changed firm positioning is new scope.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for firm about page.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Individual attorney biographies, website redesign, photography and independent legal opinion require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
CLE / Speaker PromotionLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

CLE / Speaker Promotion

$2,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 speaker announcement package: One announcement up to 350 words, speaker bio excerpt up to 150 words and review of one supplied headshot for crop/resolution/rights.
  • 2 original pre-event social concepts: Two announcement/reminder messages, each with up to 150 caption words and 1080 square/portrait exports; up to four placements on two firm accounts.
  • 1 day-of social concept: One approved event-day message and image, adapted to two accounts; remote scheduled posting.
  • 1 post-event recap: One 400–600-word recap using approved supplied notes plus one social excerpt up to 150 words.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One speaker/event, up to two social accounts and one firm website or email handoff.
Pages, words and records
Four original messages total: two pre-event, one day-of and one recap excerpt; up to eight placements if all approved.
Formats
JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; DOCX/PDF copy; headshot crop.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute speaker briefing and one 30-minute copy review.
Client inputs
Confirmed event details, approved topic/title, registration link, headshot permissions, speaking bio and post-event notes.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days across the accepted event schedule after complete inputs; recap within five business days after approved event notes arrive.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for cle / speaker promotion.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • CLE accreditation, headshot photography, onsite coverage, paid media and guaranteed attendance excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

CLE / Speaker Promotion

$2,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 speaker announcement package: One announcement up to 350 words, speaker bio excerpt up to 150 words and review of one supplied headshot for crop/resolution/rights.
  • 2 original pre-event social concepts: Two announcement/reminder messages, each with up to 150 caption words and 1080 square/portrait exports; up to four placements on two firm accounts.
  • 1 day-of social concept: One approved event-day message and image, adapted to two accounts; remote scheduled posting.
  • 1 post-event recap: One 400–600-word recap using approved supplied notes plus one social excerpt up to 150 words.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One speaker/event, up to two social accounts and one firm website or email handoff.
Pages, words and records
Four original messages total: two pre-event, one day-of and one recap excerpt; up to eight placements if all approved.
Formats
JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350; DOCX/PDF copy; headshot crop.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute speaker briefing and one 30-minute copy review.
Client inputs
Confirmed event details, approved topic/title, registration link, headshot permissions, speaking bio and post-event notes.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days across the accepted event schedule after complete inputs; recap within five business days after approved event notes arrive.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for cle / speaker promotion.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • CLE accreditation, headshot photography, onsite coverage, paid media and guaranteed attendance excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,000 one timeView Scope
Review Management Setup — Three PlatformsLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Review Management Setup — Three Platforms

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 review platform profile configurations: One firm location on Google, Avvo and Yelp; assess supported ownership/access and complete approved factual profile fields.
  • 1 review request workflow: One client-approved request process, one message template and one staff checklist; platform-specific restrictions and confidentiality reviewed by firm counsel.
  • 6 response templates: Two positive, two neutral and two sensitive/negative-response drafts, each up to 150 words; firm approval required before use.
  • 1 ethics and escalation note: Up to four pages defining attorney approval, confidential-matter boundaries and complaint escalation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Three named platforms, one firm/location; provider eligibility verified.
Pages, words and records
Three profiles; one request workflow; six response drafts.
Formats
Native profile edits; DOCX/PDF templates and workflow.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute profile/process review and one 45-minute staff handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized profiles, accurate firm information, counsel-approved request/response rules and named escalation owner.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider verification may extend external steps.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for review management setup — three platforms.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Review incentives, fabricated reviews, guaranteed removal/rating changes and ongoing response management excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Review Management Setup — Three Platforms

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 3 review platform profile configurations: One firm location on Google, Avvo and Yelp; assess supported ownership/access and complete approved factual profile fields.
  • 1 review request workflow: One client-approved request process, one message template and one staff checklist; platform-specific restrictions and confidentiality reviewed by firm counsel.
  • 6 response templates: Two positive, two neutral and two sensitive/negative-response drafts, each up to 150 words; firm approval required before use.
  • 1 ethics and escalation note: Up to four pages defining attorney approval, confidential-matter boundaries and complaint escalation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Three named platforms, one firm/location; provider eligibility verified.
Pages, words and records
Three profiles; one request workflow; six response drafts.
Formats
Native profile edits; DOCX/PDF templates and workflow.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute profile/process review and one 45-minute staff handoff.
Client inputs
Authorized profiles, accurate firm information, counsel-approved request/response rules and named escalation owner.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; provider verification may extend external steps.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for review management setup — three platforms.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Review incentives, fabricated reviews, guaranteed removal/rating changes and ongoing response management excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Texas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing InventoryLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Texas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing Inventory

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 marketing-surface inventory: Before acceptance enumerate the firm’s entire current public surface; proposed base up to 20 web pages, three social profiles,10 ads and two brochures totaling 20 pages.
  • 1 documented marketing review: Assess stated claims, qualifications, disclaimers, contact information and source-supported advertising concerns against attorney-approved review criteria; flag matters requiring current rule/counsel verification.
  • 1 issues and recommended-language register: Up to 40 distinct findings with URL/page reference, evidence, risk category and proposed correction language.
  • 1 review memorandum: Up to 12 pages with priority actions and a responsible-attorney approval checklist.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm; complete named public inventory fixed before acceptance.
Pages, words and records
Proposed base 20 web pages, three profiles,10 ads and 20 brochure pages;40 findings. Larger inventory custom scoped.
Formats
XLSX findings register and PDF/DOCX memorandum.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute inventory/criteria meeting and one 60-minute findings review.
Client inputs
Full URL/account/ad/brochure inventory, intended jurisdictions, current counsel guidance, approved claims evidence and disclosure policies.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inventory, current review criteria and scheduled start; larger inventories require a written schedule.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for texas attorney advertising review — defined marketing inventory.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice, legal-compliance certification, Bar filing/fees and implementation beyond recommended language excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Texas Attorney Advertising Review — Defined Marketing Inventory

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 marketing-surface inventory: Before acceptance enumerate the firm’s entire current public surface; proposed base up to 20 web pages, three social profiles,10 ads and two brochures totaling 20 pages.
  • 1 documented marketing review: Assess stated claims, qualifications, disclaimers, contact information and source-supported advertising concerns against attorney-approved review criteria; flag matters requiring current rule/counsel verification.
  • 1 issues and recommended-language register: Up to 40 distinct findings with URL/page reference, evidence, risk category and proposed correction language.
  • 1 review memorandum: Up to 12 pages with priority actions and a responsible-attorney approval checklist.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm; complete named public inventory fixed before acceptance.
Pages, words and records
Proposed base 20 web pages, three profiles,10 ads and 20 brochure pages;40 findings. Larger inventory custom scoped.
Formats
XLSX findings register and PDF/DOCX memorandum.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute inventory/criteria meeting and one 60-minute findings review.
Client inputs
Full URL/account/ad/brochure inventory, intended jurisdictions, current counsel guidance, approved claims evidence and disclosure policies.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
10 business days after complete inventory, current review criteria and scheduled start; larger inventories require a written schedule.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for texas attorney advertising review — defined marketing inventory.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice, legal-compliance certification, Bar filing/fees and implementation beyond recommended language excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Firm Newsletter Setup + First IssueLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Firm Newsletter Setup + First Issue

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 email platform setup: One client-owned Mailchimp or Beehiiv account, sender/domain configuration where authorized, one consented-list import up to 2,500 records and three segments.
  • 1 branded newsletter template: One reusable responsive template with firm logo, attorney-approved footer, unsubscribe mechanism and text fallback.
  • 1 first newsletter issue: One 600–900-word issue, subject/preheader, up to four supplied images and two intake/resourceCTAs.
  • 1 approved distribution: One test proof and one send to one approved audience after attorney sign-off; record delivery/report metrics.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one email provider, one sending domain and one audience.
Pages, words and records
2,500 contacts; three segments; one issue 900 words; four images.
Formats
Native responsive email and plaintext; DOCX copy; PDF send report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute editorial/setup meeting and one 30-minute attorney proof review.
Client inputs
Lawfully collected recipient list, sender/DNS access, brand files, approved sources/articles, footer policy and attorney approver.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; send date requires approved proof and sender readiness.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for firm newsletter setup + first issue.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Purchased lists, recurring issues, domain-mail migration, original photography and guaranteed inbox placement excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Firm Newsletter Setup + First Issue

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 email platform setup: One client-owned Mailchimp or Beehiiv account, sender/domain configuration where authorized, one consented-list import up to 2,500 records and three segments.
  • 1 branded newsletter template: One reusable responsive template with firm logo, attorney-approved footer, unsubscribe mechanism and text fallback.
  • 1 first newsletter issue: One 600–900-word issue, subject/preheader, up to four supplied images and two intake/resourceCTAs.
  • 1 approved distribution: One test proof and one send to one approved audience after attorney sign-off; record delivery/report metrics.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one email provider, one sending domain and one audience.
Pages, words and records
2,500 contacts; three segments; one issue 900 words; four images.
Formats
Native responsive email and plaintext; DOCX copy; PDF send report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute editorial/setup meeting and one 30-minute attorney proof review.
Client inputs
Lawfully collected recipient list, sender/DNS access, brand files, approved sources/articles, footer policy and attorney approver.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; send date requires approved proof and sender readiness.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for firm newsletter setup + first issue.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Purchased lists, recurring issues, domain-mail migration, original photography and guaranteed inbox placement excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Solo / Two Attorney Firm RetainerLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Solo / Two Attorney Firm Retainer

$4,400 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 article per month: One attorney-reviewed article 800–1,200 words, title/meta/CTA and up to five supplied reference sources.
  • 4 original social concepts per month: Four article/service messages for one platform, each 150 words maximum with one static visual; four publishing placements.
  • 2 site maintenance updates per month: Two content updates up to 300 words each on existing pages, plus one monthly backup/update-status check within current access.
  • 1 monthly report: One activity/available-metrics report and 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm with one or two attorneys, one existing website and one social platform.
Pages, words and records
One 1,200-word article; four social units; two 300-word updates/month.
Formats
Native CMS/social publication;1080 square/portrait as the chosen platform requires; PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding; one 30-minute planning/review each month.
Client inputs
Monthly attorney topic/source approvals, site/social access, current maintenance architecture and one firm approver.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Monthly schedule begins after complete onboarding and an accepted calendar slot; initial calendar in 10 business days.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for solo / two attorney firm retainer.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional attorneys beyond two, emergency security response, hosting costs, paid media and new site sections require scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Solo / Two Attorney Firm Retainer

$4,400 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 6 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 article per month: One attorney-reviewed article 800–1,200 words, title/meta/CTA and up to five supplied reference sources.
  • 4 original social concepts per month: Four article/service messages for one platform, each 150 words maximum with one static visual; four publishing placements.
  • 2 site maintenance updates per month: Two content updates up to 300 words each on existing pages, plus one monthly backup/update-status check within current access.
  • 1 monthly report: One activity/available-metrics report and 30-minute review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm with one or two attorneys, one existing website and one social platform.
Pages, words and records
One 1,200-word article; four social units; two 300-word updates/month.
Formats
Native CMS/social publication;1080 square/portrait as the chosen platform requires; PDF report.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute onboarding; one 30-minute planning/review each month.
Client inputs
Monthly attorney topic/source approvals, site/social access, current maintenance architecture and one firm approver.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Monthly schedule begins after complete onboarding and an accepted calendar slot; initial calendar in 10 business days.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for solo / two attorney firm retainer.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional attorneys beyond two, emergency security response, hosting costs, paid media and new site sections require scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,400 / monthView Scope
Text the Attorney Intake SetupLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Text the Attorney Intake Setup

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Twilio number and firm routing: One client-owned account/number, up to two attorney destinations and one administrator fallback.
  • 1 text intake workflow: Up to eight intake prompts, six approved message templates and one appointment/intake record destination; explicitly route conflict/representation decisions to the attorney.
  • 1 website integration: One click-to-text/contact block on an existing firm page with approved disclosure/consent text.
  • 12 acceptance scenarios: Test routing, declined/stop responses, missing information and handoff failures with synthetic data; no real prospective-client messages.
  • 1 handoff guide: Number ownership, usage limits, retention choices and escalation checklist up to 10 pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one Twilio number, two attorneys, one admin and one website.
Pages, words and records
Eight prompts; six templates; one record destination;12 tests.
Formats
SMS/plaintext; native workflow; PDF guide and test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute intake/confidentiality workshop and one 60-minute attorney acceptance review.
Client inputs
Attorney-approved prompts/disclosures, routing roster, provider registration information, data-retention decisions and authorized site/account access.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; carrier/provider approval is an external dependency.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for text the attorney intake setup.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Automated legal advice, conflict clearance, representation acceptance,24/7 human response and compliance certification excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Text the Attorney Intake Setup

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Twilio number and firm routing: One client-owned account/number, up to two attorney destinations and one administrator fallback.
  • 1 text intake workflow: Up to eight intake prompts, six approved message templates and one appointment/intake record destination; explicitly route conflict/representation decisions to the attorney.
  • 1 website integration: One click-to-text/contact block on an existing firm page with approved disclosure/consent text.
  • 12 acceptance scenarios: Test routing, declined/stop responses, missing information and handoff failures with synthetic data; no real prospective-client messages.
  • 1 handoff guide: Number ownership, usage limits, retention choices and escalation checklist up to 10 pages.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, one Twilio number, two attorneys, one admin and one website.
Pages, words and records
Eight prompts; six templates; one record destination;12 tests.
Formats
SMS/plaintext; native workflow; PDF guide and test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute intake/confidentiality workshop and one 60-minute attorney acceptance review.
Client inputs
Attorney-approved prompts/disclosures, routing roster, provider registration information, data-retention decisions and authorized site/account access.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start; carrier/provider approval is an external dependency.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for text the attorney intake setup.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Automated legal advice, conflict clearance, representation acceptance,24/7 human response and compliance certification excluded.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Law Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day RoadmapLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Law Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day Roadmap

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 marketing audit: One firm/site up to 30 public pages, three profiles, one email program, one intake path and three local competitors.
  • 1 advertising/content concern register: Document source-supported claims/disclosure issues requiring attorney review; up to 30 findings with evidence links.
  • 1 90-day roadmap: Three 30-day phases with up to 15 prioritized actions, owners, dependencies and planning budgets labeled assumptions.
  • 1 findings presentation: A 12–18-page report and a 60-minute decision session.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm/site, three profiles, one email platform and one intake workflow.
Pages, words and records
30 pages; three competitors;30 findings;15 roadmap actions over 90 days.
Formats
PDF report and XLSX action register.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 60-minute findings workshop.
Client inputs
Marketing/account inventory, analytics access where available, business priorities, attorney-approved claims and existing vendor contracts.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for law firm marketing audit + 90-day roadmap.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, original content production, paid campaigns and legal-compliance certification are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Law Firm Marketing Audit + 90-Day Roadmap

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 marketing audit: One firm/site up to 30 public pages, three profiles, one email program, one intake path and three local competitors.
  • 1 advertising/content concern register: Document source-supported claims/disclosure issues requiring attorney review; up to 30 findings with evidence links.
  • 1 90-day roadmap: Three 30-day phases with up to 15 prioritized actions, owners, dependencies and planning budgets labeled assumptions.
  • 1 findings presentation: A 12–18-page report and a 60-minute decision session.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm/site, three profiles, one email platform and one intake workflow.
Pages, words and records
30 pages; three competitors;30 findings;15 roadmap actions over 90 days.
Formats
PDF report and XLSX action register.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute discovery and one 60-minute findings workshop.
Client inputs
Marketing/account inventory, analytics access where available, business priorities, attorney-approved claims and existing vendor contracts.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
15 business days after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for law firm marketing audit + 90-day roadmap.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, original content production, paid campaigns and legal-compliance certification are separate.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Mid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six AttorneysLaw Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Mid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six Attorneys

$6,900 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 articles per month: Two attorney-reviewed articles 800–1,200 words each, with titles/meta/CTA and documented supplied sources.
  • 8 original social concepts per month: Eight unique messages, including article derivatives, adapted across two platforms for up to 16 placements; static images and captions 150 words maximum.
  • 4 site maintenance updates per month: Four existing-page content updates up to 300 words each plus monthly backup/update-status review.
  • 1 quarterly advertising review: Once each quarter, review up to 10 changed pages and 20 recent social posts; provide issue/correction notes for attorney approval.
  • 1 monthly activity report: One report and 45-minute review; quarterly review is included once in its quarter, not charged as a standalone audit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm with three to six attorneys, one existing site and two social platforms.
Pages, words and records
Two 1,200-word articles; eight originals/16 placements; four 300-word updates/month; quarterly review 10 pages/20 posts.
Formats
DOCX/CMS;1080 square/portrait visuals; PDF/XLSX report.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute onboarding; one 45-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly review.
Client inputs
Attorney reviewer roster, monthly topics/source records, site/social access, brand assets and change priorities.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Monthly production begins after complete inputs and accepted calendar; first calendar in 10 business days; quarterly review date fixed in the plan.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for mid size firm retainer — three to six attorneys.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Seven or more attorneys, emergency incident response, new website sections, ad spend and legal opinions require custom scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Mid Size Firm Retainer — Three to Six Attorneys

$6,900 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 articles per month: Two attorney-reviewed articles 800–1,200 words each, with titles/meta/CTA and documented supplied sources.
  • 8 original social concepts per month: Eight unique messages, including article derivatives, adapted across two platforms for up to 16 placements; static images and captions 150 words maximum.
  • 4 site maintenance updates per month: Four existing-page content updates up to 300 words each plus monthly backup/update-status review.
  • 1 quarterly advertising review: Once each quarter, review up to 10 changed pages and 20 recent social posts; provide issue/correction notes for attorney approval.
  • 1 monthly activity report: One report and 45-minute review; quarterly review is included once in its quarter, not charged as a standalone audit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm with three to six attorneys, one existing site and two social platforms.
Pages, words and records
Two 1,200-word articles; eight originals/16 placements; four 300-word updates/month; quarterly review 10 pages/20 posts.
Formats
DOCX/CMS;1080 square/portrait visuals; PDF/XLSX report.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute onboarding; one 45-minute monthly review and one 60-minute quarterly review.
Client inputs
Attorney reviewer roster, monthly topics/source records, site/social access, brand assets and change priorities.
Approval
One designated responsible attorney approves factual statements, legal content, confidentiality handling and final publication; one firm administrator coordinates consolidated feedback.
Delivery
Monthly production begins after complete inputs and accepted calendar; first calendar in 10 business days; quarterly review date fixed in the plan.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved scope. Corrections to agreed specifications are distinguished from a new concept, additional deliverable, or changed source material.
Rights and licensing
Firm supplies authorized logos, biographies, photographs, approved legal source text and appropriately disclosed data. No client/matter information is used publicly without firm authorization. Asset licenses and final file/usage rights follow the provider licenses and signed agreement; no new legal grant or privilege guarantee is created.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm attorney reviewer, source evidence, access and confidentiality boundaries.
  • Approve content/configuration outline for mid size firm retainer — three to six attorneys.
  • Complete draft or controlled configuration and consolidate attorney feedback.
  • Obtain responsible-attorney sign-off, then deliver or publish only the approved package.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Seven or more attorneys, emergency incident response, new website sections, ad spend and legal opinions require custom scope.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,900 / monthView Scope
Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)Law Office Marketing & Operations
Included scope and billing

Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)

$18,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
  • 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
  • 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
  • 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
Pages, words and records
Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
Formats
Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
  • Draft/design pages
  • Obtain legal-content approval
  • Build and test intake/search
  • Handoff accepted site

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
  • Trust/IOLTA systems
  • Custom case-management integration
  • Client matter review

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Law Firm Website (Prepared for Attorney Review)

$18,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 8 law-firm website pages: Up to eight pages, including up to four practice-area pages and up to two attorney biographies within the total.
  • 1 attorney-review copy pass: Up to 5,000 words of light copy/editing with advertising claims, credentials and disclaimers flagged for attorney decision.
  • 1 intake path: One form up to 12 fields with one approved routing destination, privacy/confidentiality language supplied or approved by the firm.
  • 1 search, testing and handoff package: Metadata for included pages, basic analytics, mobile/desktop and form-route tests, editing guidance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One firm, website/domain and intake destination; up to two attorneys and four practice areas.
Pages, words and records
Eight pages maximum; 5,000 words; 30 supplied images; 12 intake fields.
Formats
Responsive website; editable page copy and attorney-review checklist.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute discovery, one 60-minute design/content review with attorney approver and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Firm facts, bar/credential information, reviewed service descriptions, privacy/intake policy, authorized access and final attorney approval.
Approval
One client-designated approval owner consolidates feedback and confirms factual accuracy, permissions and final acceptance. Attorney, rights holder or platform account owner approvals are additionally required where specified.
Delivery
6–8 business weeks after complete inputs, access and the agreed scheduled start; availability is confirmed in the proposal.
Revision rounds
Two rounds of consolidated feedback on the approved direction. A round is one combined response from the approval owner; factual or production corrections are distinguished from new concepts, changed inputs or added scope, which require a written change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies material it is authorized to use and identifies attribution or usage restrictions. Third-party fonts, images, music, software and licenses are separately approved and documented; inclusion does not transfer third-party rights. Ownership and any grant of rights are stated in the written agreement; this proposed card creates no new license terms.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Approve sitemap and attorney review responsibilities
  • Draft/design pages
  • Obtain legal-content approval
  • Build and test intake/search
  • Handoff accepted site

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Legal advice or advertising-compliance certification
  • Trust/IOLTA systems
  • Custom case-management integration
  • Client matter review

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Scope Note: This service provides marketing and administrative support for a law office. It is not legal advice, and it does not create an attorney client relationship. Final review of any legal content rests with your own counsel.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$18,800 one timeView Scope
Bandcamp SetupOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Bandcamp Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bandcamp setup package: One Bandcamp account; one initial release up to 20 tracks using supplied masters/artwork and approved copy; five merch entries; native listing checks and a 30-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
Pages, words and records
One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
Formats
Native release/merch pages, supplied artwork exports and listing/ownership handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Mastered audio, artwork, approved descriptions/prices, rights/splits, shipping settings and account access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing correction and one upload-error correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Bandcamp Setup

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 bandcamp setup package: One Bandcamp account; one initial release up to 20 tracks using supplied masters/artwork and approved copy; five merch entries; native listing checks and a 30-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
Pages, words and records
One client-owned Bandcamp account, one initial release up to 20 tracks and five merch listings.
Formats
Native release/merch pages, supplied artwork exports and listing/ownership handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Mastered audio, artwork, approved descriptions/prices, rights/splits, shipping settings and account access.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing correction and one upload-error correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Product Description Writing (10 SKUs)Online Commerce
Included scope and billing

Product Description Writing (10 SKUs)

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product description writing (10 skus) package: Existing ten SKU descriptions of 100–200 words, facts/specifications/search title/meta, one factual revision/spreadsheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
Pages, words and records
Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
Formats
Editable spreadsheet keyed to the ten client SKU identifiers.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute product/voice briefing.
Client inputs
Accurate specifications, approved claims, product photos, audience and brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual/style revision per description, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Product Description Writing (10 SKUs)

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product description writing (10 skus) package: Existing ten SKU descriptions of 100–200 words, facts/specifications/search title/meta, one factual revision/spreadsheet.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
Pages, words and records
Ten SKUs, one 100–200-word description each, ten search titles/meta descriptions and one language.
Formats
Editable spreadsheet keyed to the ten client SKU identifiers.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute product/voice briefing.
Client inputs
Accurate specifications, approved claims, product photos, audience and brand voice.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
1 week. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual/style revision per description, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Abandoned Cart Email SequenceOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Abandoned Cart Email Sequence

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 abandoned cart email sequence package: Existing 3 emails up to 350 words, subjects/preheaders/CTAs/layout/timing in one existing store-email integration, 6 tests/one revision.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
Pages, words and records
One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
Formats
Three designed native templates, subject/preheader/CTA copy and timing/test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute flow briefing and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Existing store/ESP access, brand assets, recovery links, approved discounts and client-approved consent rules.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated copy/design rounds and one configuration correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Abandoned Cart Email Sequence

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 abandoned cart email sequence package: Existing 3 emails up to 350 words, subjects/preheaders/CTAs/layout/timing in one existing store-email integration, 6 tests/one revision.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
Pages, words and records
One store/email integration, three emails up to 350 words each, one trigger flow and six test cases.
Formats
Three designed native templates, subject/preheader/CTA copy and timing/test log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute flow briefing and one 30-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Existing store/ESP access, brand assets, recovery links, approved discounts and client-approved consent rules.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated copy/design rounds and one configuration correction cycle.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,900 one timeView Scope
Product PhotographyOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Product Photography

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product photography package: One 240-minute product session at the GCM office covering up to 25 physical products; one agreed background/lighting system; 25 primary edited images plus up to 25 second-angle images; full-resolution and web JPEG exports.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
Pages, words and records
One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
Formats
JPEG full-resolution/web and indexed file delivery.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute shot briefing plus the 240-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Clean assembled products, shot priorities, shipping/collection arrangements and image-use requirements.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Within five business days after the scheduled shoot and complete product information.
Revision rounds
One consolidated correction round on the selected images; new styling or reshoots are separately scoped.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Models, custom props, advanced compositing, additional products, shipping and location rental.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Product Photography

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 product photography package: One 240-minute product session at the GCM office covering up to 25 physical products; one agreed background/lighting system; 25 primary edited images plus up to 25 second-angle images; full-resolution and web JPEG exports.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
Pages, words and records
One business; 25 products; up to 50 distinct final images.
Formats
JPEG full-resolution/web and indexed file delivery.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute shot briefing plus the 240-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Clean assembled products, shot priorities, shipping/collection arrangements and image-use requirements.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Within five business days after the scheduled shoot and complete product information.
Revision rounds
One consolidated correction round on the selected images; new styling or reshoots are separately scoped.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Models, custom props, advanced compositing, additional products, shipping and location rental.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Print on Demand Storefront SetupOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Print on Demand Storefront Setup

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 print on demand storefront setup package: One store and one print-on-demand provider; ten product styles with 50 variants, supplied artwork, mockups, approved pricing/shipping and one end-to-end test-order verification; one 60-minute handoff. A real sample order requires the client’s express approval of production/shipping costs before purchase.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
Pages, words and records
One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
Formats
Native product/mockup setup, pricing/shipping matrix and verification record.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Client-owned provider/store accounts, print-ready art, approved prices/shipping and provider product choices.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated listing/configuration revisions; new art is separately scoped.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Vendor production/shipping charges for any real sample order are client-paid and require express approval before purchase. The included service covers one end-to-end test-order verification; ongoing fulfillment, returns and additional test orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Print on Demand Storefront Setup

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 print on demand storefront setup package: One store and one print-on-demand provider; ten product styles with 50 variants, supplied artwork, mockups, approved pricing/shipping and one end-to-end test-order verification; one 60-minute handoff. A real sample order requires the client’s express approval of production/shipping costs before purchase.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
Pages, words and records
One storefront, one POD provider, ten product styles and 50 variants; one test-order path.
Formats
Native product/mockup setup, pricing/shipping matrix and verification record.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Client-owned provider/store accounts, print-ready art, approved prices/shipping and provider product choices.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated listing/configuration revisions; new art is separately scoped.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Vendor production/shipping charges for any real sample order are client-paid and require express approval before purchase. The included service covers one end-to-end test-order verification; ongoing fulfillment, returns and additional test orders require separate scope.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Etsy Storefront Setup + Listing OptimizationOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Etsy Storefront Setup + Listing Optimization

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 etsy storefront setup + listing optimization package: One Etsy shop/banner/profile/approved policies, existing 10 listings with copy/tags/photos, payment/shipping and 60-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
Pages, words and records
One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
Formats
Native shop/listings, approved policy pages, listing keyword sheet and handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Verified owner account, product facts/photos, prices, shipping/return policy and rights to sell.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds across the shop and listings.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Etsy Storefront Setup + Listing Optimization

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 etsy storefront setup + listing optimization package: One Etsy shop/banner/profile/approved policies, existing 10 listings with copy/tags/photos, payment/shipping and 60-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
Pages, words and records
One Etsy shop, ten listings, 50 variants and one branded banner.
Formats
Native shop/listings, approved policy pages, listing keyword sheet and handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 60-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Verified owner account, product facts/photos, prices, shipping/return policy and rights to sell.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
3 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds across the shop and listings.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Amazon Handmade / Seller Central SetupOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Amazon Handmade / Seller Central Setup

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 amazon handmade / seller central setup package: One Amazon application/brand/10 listings/30 variants, document checklist/category metadata, supplied assets/fulfillment, one response cycle/90-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
Pages, words and records
One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
Formats
Application/checklist, native listings and provider response/error log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Legal owner account, verification documents, brand/trademark eligibility, product identifiers and fulfillment policies.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; acceptance is provider-controlled.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Amazon Handmade / Seller Central Setup

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 amazon handmade / seller central setup package: One Amazon application/brand/10 listings/30 variants, document checklist/category metadata, supplied assets/fulfillment, one response cycle/90-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
Pages, words and records
One seller entity, one Amazon application, one eligible brand-registry submission and ten listings with 30 variants.
Formats
Application/checklist, native listings and provider response/error log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Legal owner account, verification documents, brand/trademark eligibility, product identifiers and fulfillment policies.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; acceptance is provider-controlled.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Walmart Marketplace SetupOnline Commerce
Included scope and billing

Walmart Marketplace Setup

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 walmart marketplace setup package: One Walmart Marketplace application/brand setup and up to five listings with 15 variants; document checklist, approved shipping/returns, import/error log, one marketplace response cycle and 90-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
Pages, words and records
One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
Formats
Application checklist, listing import/error log and native listings if approved.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Owner verification, product identifiers, inventory/fulfillment policies and approved assets/prices.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; approval is not guaranteed.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Walmart Marketplace Setup

$8,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 walmart marketplace setup package: One Walmart Marketplace application/brand setup and up to five listings with 15 variants; document checklist, approved shipping/returns, import/error log, one marketplace response cycle and 90-minute handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
Pages, words and records
One seller entity, one Walmart Marketplace application, one brand setup and five listings with 15 variants.
Formats
Application checklist, listing import/error log and native listings if approved.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute intake and one 90-minute handoff.
Client inputs
Owner verification, product identifiers, inventory/fulfillment policies and approved assets/prices.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 to 8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated listing revision and one marketplace response cycle; approval is not guaranteed.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Marketplace/listing/referral/payment/fulfillment fees, samples/manufacturing/barcodes/shipping/taxes. Client approves product facts-prices-terms; platform controls acceptance.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$8,800 one timeView Scope
Podcast Recording SessionPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Podcast Recording Session

$750 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 podcast recording session package: One guided audio-recording session lasting 60–90 minutes for up to three participants; one edited audio episode from that session, up to 90 minutes; one draft show-note document up to 600 words.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
Pages, words and records
One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
Formats
WAV master, MP3 listening copy and DOCX show notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute preparation call and the 60–90-minute recording session.
Client inputs
Prepared discussion outline, participant consent/availability, recording access and any supplied authorized media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as recording; exact acceptance deadline confirmed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual note correction and one edit correction to agreed specifications.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Guest booking, licensed music/clips, video, extensive restoration, transcripts, publishing, distribution and promotion.

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a recording time. Good Creative Media confirms the session plan and availability before acceptance; if the session cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Podcast Recording Session

$750 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 podcast recording session package: One guided audio-recording session lasting 60–90 minutes for up to three participants; one edited audio episode from that session, up to 90 minutes; one draft show-note document up to 600 words.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
Pages, words and records
One episode, one recording location/connection and three participants; one agreed straightforward edit pass.
Formats
WAV master, MP3 listening copy and DOCX show notes.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute preparation call and the 60–90-minute recording session.
Client inputs
Prepared discussion outline, participant consent/availability, recording access and any supplied authorized media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as recording; exact acceptance deadline confirmed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual note correction and one edit correction to agreed specifications.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Guest booking, licensed music/clips, video, extensive restoration, transcripts, publishing, distribution and promotion.

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests a recording time. Good Creative Media confirms the session plan and availability before acceptance; if the session cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$750 one timeView Scope
Headshot SessionPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Headshot Session

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 headshot session package: One 90-minute headshot session at one agreed studio or local location for one person; up to two wardrobe looks; five edited final images, each in full-resolution and web JPEG.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
Pages, words and records
One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs with one selection gallery.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute preparation call and the 90-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Subject availability, wardrobe, intended uses, access and any specific image requirements.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated retouch correction on the five selected photographs.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Hair/makeup, studio/location rental, travel outside the accepted area, extra subjects, extra selects and complex composites.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Headshot Session

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 headshot session package: One 90-minute headshot session at one agreed studio or local location for one person; up to two wardrobe looks; five edited final images, each in full-resolution and web JPEG.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
Pages, words and records
One subject, one location, two looks and five distinct final photographs.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs with one selection gallery.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute preparation call and the 90-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Subject availability, wardrobe, intended uses, access and any specific image requirements.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated retouch correction on the five selected photographs.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Hair/makeup, studio/location rental, travel outside the accepted area, extra subjects, extra selects and complex composites.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Short Form Vertical Video (Single)Photography & Video
Included scope and billing

Short Form Vertical Video (Single)

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 short form vertical video (single) package: One concept and one 15–60-second vertical video for one named platform; one shoot up to 90 minutes at one location, simple edit/color/audio, readable captions, hook and cover frame.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
Formats
1080×1920 H.264 MP4, cover JPG and caption file where applicable.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute concept briefing, the 90-minute capture session and one 20-minute review.
Client inputs
Approved offer/script, subject permissions, location access and rights to supplied music/media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
One week after complete inputs and scheduled capture.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions on the agreed concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Platform management, paid spend, actors, additional locations, complex animation and alternate concepts.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Short Form Vertical Video (Single)

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 short form vertical video (single) package: One concept and one 15–60-second vertical video for one named platform; one shoot up to 90 minutes at one location, simple edit/color/audio, readable captions, hook and cover frame.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one concept, one location and one finished vertical video.
Formats
1080×1920 H.264 MP4, cover JPG and caption file where applicable.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute concept briefing, the 90-minute capture session and one 20-minute review.
Client inputs
Approved offer/script, subject permissions, location access and rights to supplied music/media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
One week after complete inputs and scheduled capture.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated revisions on the agreed concept.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Platform management, paid spend, actors, additional locations, complex animation and alternate concepts.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Photo Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)Photography & Video
Included scope and billing

Photo Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 photo editing / retouching pack (10 images) package: Ten client-supplied photographs; color/exposure correction plus ordinary portrait/object retouching; deliver one standard and one retouched version per original, 20 final files.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
Formats
High-resolution JPEG/TIFF as agreed plus web JPEG copies; versions remain ten distinct subjects.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute retouch briefing.
Client inputs
Ten original high-resolution files, reference look, intended output and specific retouch notes.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
One week after complete input files and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated correction round on all ten originals.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Compositing, new objects/background construction, severe restoration, extra images and source photography.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Photo Editing / Retouching Pack (10 Images)

$1,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 photo editing / retouching pack (10 images) package: Ten client-supplied photographs; color/exposure correction plus ordinary portrait/object retouching; deliver one standard and one retouched version per original, 20 final files.
Platforms, accounts and locations
Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
Pages, words and records
Ten original images, two versions each; one agreed visual treatment.
Formats
High-resolution JPEG/TIFF as agreed plus web JPEG copies; versions remain ten distinct subjects.
Meetings and sessions
One 20-minute retouch briefing.
Client inputs
Ten original high-resolution files, reference look, intended output and specific retouch notes.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
One week after complete input files and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
One consolidated correction round on all ten originals.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Compositing, new objects/background construction, severe restoration, extra images and source photography.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,200 one timeView Scope
Drone Aerial PhotographyPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Drone Aerial Photography

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 drone aerial photography package: One aerial-stills visit at one venue/property/event with up to 90 minutes of flight time, subject to approved operating conditions; 20 edited final photographs and documented flight conditions/required authorization.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
Pages, words and records
One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs plus operating-condition/authorization record.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute flight/shot briefing and the agreed onsite flight window.
Client inputs
Site coordinates, owner access, requested views, event schedule and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date and weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction to 20 selected images; an additional flight is a separate scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel outside accepted area, permits/third-party fees, extra visits and flight that cannot be lawfully or safely conducted.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Drone Aerial Photography

$1,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 drone aerial photography package: One aerial-stills visit at one venue/property/event with up to 90 minutes of flight time, subject to approved operating conditions; 20 edited final photographs and documented flight conditions/required authorization.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
Pages, words and records
One site, one scheduled visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and 20 distinct images.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs plus operating-condition/authorization record.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute flight/shot briefing and the agreed onsite flight window.
Client inputs
Site coordinates, owner access, requested views, event schedule and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date and weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction to 20 selected images; an additional flight is a separate scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel outside accepted area, permits/third-party fees, extra visits and flight that cannot be lawfully or safely conducted.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,700 one timeView Scope
Event Photography, Half DayPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Event Photography, Half Day

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event photography, half day package: One event photography visit up to 240 consecutive minutes at one venue; a proposed new-order target of 40 edited distinct selects, confirmed with the event plan before acceptance; full-resolution and web JPEG gallery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
Pages, words and records
One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
Formats
Private digital gallery, print-resolution and web-resolution JPEGs; owned website/social usage retained.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute production briefing and the 240-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Event schedule, access/permissions, priority list, organizer contact and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction to the agreed selects.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, extensive retouching, commercial resale rights, travel outside accepted area and extended coverage.

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the date. Good Creative Media confirms availability and the written coverage plan before the booking is accepted; if the date cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Event Photography, Half Day

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event photography, half day package: One event photography visit up to 240 consecutive minutes at one venue; a proposed new-order target of 40 edited distinct selects, confirmed with the event plan before acceptance; full-resolution and web JPEG gallery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
Pages, words and records
One event, one venue, 240-minute capture window and 40 selected final photographs for new orders.
Formats
Private digital gallery, print-resolution and web-resolution JPEGs; owned website/social usage retained.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute production briefing and the 240-minute capture session.
Client inputs
Event schedule, access/permissions, priority list, organizer contact and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction to the agreed selects.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Printing, extensive retouching, commercial resale rights, travel outside accepted area and extended coverage.

How the engagement begins: Checkout requests the date. Good Creative Media confirms availability and the written coverage plan before the booking is accepted; if the date cannot be accommodated, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Brand Photography SessionPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Brand Photography Session

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand photography session package: One 240-minute brand photography session for one brand at one location; up to three prepared scenes/looks; 30 edited final images, each in high-resolution and web versions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs and one selection gallery.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing, 240-minute capture and one 30-minute select review.
Client inputs
Brand story/shot list, prepared subjects/products, wardrobe/props, location access and permissions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated retouch correction on 30 selects.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Models, hair/makeup, hired props/location, extensive compositing, additional venues and ongoing content production.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brand Photography Session

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand photography session package: One 240-minute brand photography session for one brand at one location; up to three prepared scenes/looks; 30 edited final images, each in high-resolution and web versions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, three scenes and 30 distinct final photographs.
Formats
High-resolution and web JPEGs and one selection gallery.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing, 240-minute capture and one 30-minute select review.
Client inputs
Brand story/shot list, prepared subjects/products, wardrobe/props, location access and permissions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the shoot; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated retouch correction on 30 selects.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Models, hair/makeup, hired props/location, extensive compositing, additional venues and ongoing content production.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Drone Aerial VideoPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Drone Aerial Video

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 drone aerial video package: One aerial-video visit at one site with up to 90 minutes of flight time; one edited 60–90-second highlight reel and delivery of the captured raw footage.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
Pages, words and records
One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 reel and original captured camera files through one download handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review; flight window separately scheduled.
Client inputs
Site coordinates/access, shot priorities, approved subject permissions and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date/weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated reel revisions; additional flight capture is a new scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Restricted/unavailable flight, external permit/travel/music fees, extra sites and additional capture visits.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Drone Aerial Video

$3,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 drone aerial video package: One aerial-video visit at one site with up to 90 minutes of flight time; one edited 60–90-second highlight reel and delivery of the captured raw footage.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
Pages, words and records
One site, one visit, 90-minute maximum flight window and one finished reel.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 reel and original captured camera files through one download handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute production briefing and one 30-minute edit review; flight window separately scheduled.
Client inputs
Site coordinates/access, shot priorities, approved subject permissions and intended use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as the confirmed flight; exact date/weather contingency agreed before acceptance.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated reel revisions; additional flight capture is a new scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Restricted/unavailable flight, external permit/travel/music fees, extra sites and additional capture visits.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,000 one timeView Scope
Event Photography, Full DayPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Event Photography, Full Day

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event photography, full day package: One event photography visit up to 480 minutes at one venue; an edited gallery of 80 distinct selected photographs for new orders with high-resolution and web JPEGs.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
Pages, words and records
One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
Formats
Private gallery and high-resolution/web JPEG files.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing plus the 480-minute coverage window with agreed breaks.
Client inputs
Run of show, priority moments, venue access, subject permissions and organizer contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction on selected images.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-day coverage, extra venues/operators, prints, extensive retouching and travel outside accepted area.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Event Photography, Full Day

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 event photography, full day package: One event photography visit up to 480 minutes at one venue; an edited gallery of 80 distinct selected photographs for new orders with high-resolution and web JPEGs.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
Pages, words and records
One event, one venue, 480-minute capture window and 80 selected images.
Formats
Private gallery and high-resolution/web JPEG files.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute production briefing plus the 480-minute coverage window with agreed breaks.
Client inputs
Run of show, priority moments, venue access, subject permissions and organizer contact.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Delivery within the same calendar week as capture; exact date agreed before booking.
Revision rounds
One consolidated color/crop correction on selected images.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Multi-day coverage, extra venues/operators, prints, extensive retouching and travel outside accepted area.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Short Form Video Pack (5)Photography & Video
Included scope and billing

Short Form Video Pack (5)

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 short form video pack (5) package: One half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at the GCM office or one client location; five distinct 15–60-second vertical videos, each with hook, captions and one cover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
Formats
Five 1080×1920 H.264 MP4 s, five covers and applicable caption files.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute preproduction, 240-minute capture and one 45-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Five approved briefs, prepared subjects, access/permissions and cleared media/music.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Two weeks after complete inputs and scheduled shoot.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional shoot locations, actors, complex animation, platform management and paid media.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Short Form Video Pack (5)

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 short form video pack (5) package: One half-day shoot up to 240 minutes at the GCM office or one client location; five distinct 15–60-second vertical videos, each with hook, captions and one cover.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, five concepts and five finished videos.
Formats
Five 1080×1920 H.264 MP4 s, five covers and applicable caption files.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute preproduction, 240-minute capture and one 45-minute batch review.
Client inputs
Five approved briefs, prepared subjects, access/permissions and cleared media/music.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Two weeks after complete inputs and scheduled shoot.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated batch revisions.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional shoot locations, actors, complex animation, platform management and paid media.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Live Stream Production SetupPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Live Stream Production Setup

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 live stream production setup package: Configure one OBS/switcher workflow for one event, up to three compatible cameras, four audio inputs and two streaming destinations; one rehearsal up to 90 minutes and coordination of one live show up to 180 minutes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
Pages, words and records
One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
Formats
Saved OBS configuration/scene set, signal diagram, test checklist and operator handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute technical briefing, one 90-minute rehearsal and one 30-minute handoff; show window up to 180 minutes.
Client inputs
Compatible equipment/internet, authorized destinations, run of show, venue access and media/performer permissions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Two weeks of preparation before the accepted live date after complete technical inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated scene/technical revision after rehearsal; show changes outside agreed inputs require a quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Equipment rental/purchase, internet service, platform fees, extra operators, recording postproduction and additional shows.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Live Stream Production Setup

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 live stream production setup package: Configure one OBS/switcher workflow for one event, up to three compatible cameras, four audio inputs and two streaming destinations; one rehearsal up to 90 minutes and coordination of one live show up to 180 minutes.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
Pages, words and records
One venue/production computer, three cameras, four audio inputs, two destinations and one show.
Formats
Saved OBS configuration/scene set, signal diagram, test checklist and operator handoff.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute technical briefing, one 90-minute rehearsal and one 30-minute handoff; show window up to 180 minutes.
Client inputs
Compatible equipment/internet, authorized destinations, run of show, venue access and media/performer permissions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Two weeks of preparation before the accepted live date after complete technical inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated scene/technical revision after rehearsal; show changes outside agreed inputs require a quote.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Equipment rental/purchase, internet service, platform fees, extra operators, recording postproduction and additional shows.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,500 one timeView Scope
Brand VideoPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Brand Video

$10,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand video package: One 60–90-second brand film; one agreed treatment/storyboard, one 240-minute shoot at one location, edit, color and sound design; one master and one matching vertical adaptation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 adaptation and captions for intelligible speech.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept meeting, 240-minute shoot and two 30-minute edit reviews.
Client inputs
Approved brief/claims, participants/releases, location permissions, brand assets and cleared media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Six weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start, including the agreed shoot date.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Actors, additional locations/shoots, travel outside accepted area, complex animation and third-party licenses.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Brand Video

$10,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brand video package: One 60–90-second brand film; one agreed treatment/storyboard, one 240-minute shoot at one location, edit, color and sound design; one master and one matching vertical adaptation.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
Pages, words and records
One brand, one location, up to three on-camera participants and one 60–90-second film.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, 1080×1920 adaptation and captions for intelligible speech.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute concept meeting, 240-minute shoot and two 30-minute edit reviews.
Client inputs
Approved brief/claims, participants/releases, location permissions, brand assets and cleared media.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Six weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start, including the agreed shoot date.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated rounds, preserving the published allowance.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Actors, additional locations/shoots, travel outside accepted area, complex animation and third-party licenses.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$10,000 one timeView Scope
Documentary ShortPhotography & Video
Included scope and billing

Documentary Short

$20,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 documentary short package: One documentary short of 5–10 minutes about one person/project/organization; story outline, up to three interviews and two local locations over two capture sessions of up to 240 minutes each; b-roll, edit, sound design and color.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
Pages, words and records
One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, caption file and one JPEG poster frame.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute story briefing, two capture sessions and two 45-minute edit reviews.
Client inputs
Source access, factual timeline, interview availability, location/releases and cleared archive material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Eight weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated story/edit rounds; additional reporting or a new thesis is change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel outside accepted area, archive/music licenses, actors, extra interviews/locations and expanded running time.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Documentary Short

$20,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 documentary short package: One documentary short of 5–10 minutes about one person/project/organization; story outline, up to three interviews and two local locations over two capture sessions of up to 240 minutes each; b-roll, edit, sound design and color.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
Pages, words and records
One subject/story, three interviews, two locations, two capture sessions and one 5–10-minute film.
Formats
1920×1080 H.264 master, caption file and one JPEG poster frame.
Meetings and sessions
One 90-minute story briefing, two capture sessions and two 45-minute edit reviews.
Client inputs
Source access, factual timeline, interview availability, location/releases and cleared archive material.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Eight weeks after complete inputs and scheduled start.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated story/edit rounds; additional reporting or a new thesis is change scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel outside accepted area, archive/music licenses, actors, extra interviews/locations and expanded running time.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$20,000 one timeView Scope
Quarterly Strategy SessionStrategy & Consulting
Included scope and billing

Quarterly Strategy Session

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 quarterly strategy session package: One 120-minute quarterly strategy session for one business/act; one written quarterly note up to three pages stating three priorities, measures and decisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
Pages, words and records
One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
Formats
Live video/in-person session as agreed and PDF/DOCX quarterly note.
Meetings and sessions
One 120-minute strategy session; asynchronous intake included.
Client inputs
Prior-period results, current plan, constraints and three decision questions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Scheduled once in the agreed quarter; written note within three business days after complete session inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual clarification of the quarterly note.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, new research studies, additional organizations and additional sessions.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Quarterly Strategy Session

$2,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 quarterly strategy session package: One 120-minute quarterly strategy session for one business/act; one written quarterly note up to three pages stating three priorities, measures and decisions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
Pages, words and records
One organization, four client participants and three quarterly priorities.
Formats
Live video/in-person session as agreed and PDF/DOCX quarterly note.
Meetings and sessions
One 120-minute strategy session; asynchronous intake included.
Client inputs
Prior-period results, current plan, constraints and three decision questions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Scheduled once in the agreed quarter; written note within three business days after complete session inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated factual clarification of the quarterly note.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, new research studies, additional organizations and additional sessions.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,200 one timeView Scope
Scope inquiryStrategy & Consulting
Included scope and billing

Expert Witness or Consultation — Fixed Scope Inquiry

Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 expert witness or consultation package: One case-specific marketing/media consultation requires a written fixed-fee scope before ordering. A proposed consultation base covers one matter, up to 100 supplied document pages, five questions and one 60-minute findings conference. A written opinion, deposition or testimony is included only when explicitly named and priced in the accepted case scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
Pages, words and records
One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
Formats
Secure document index and findings conference; any opinion/report format stated explicitly in the case proposal.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 60-minute findings conference for the consultation base.
Client inputs
Counsel identity, conflict-check information, matter questions, relevant records, deadline and permitted use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Case-specific business-day delivery and appearance dates confirmed in the accepted fixed-fee proposal.
Revision rounds
One factual clarification; any written opinion revision allowance specified in the accepted case scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No automatic testimony/opinion commitment; travel, extensive record volumes and additional proceedings require an accepted fixed quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Expert Witness or Consultation — Fixed Scope Inquiry

Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 expert witness or consultation package: One case-specific marketing/media consultation requires a written fixed-fee scope before ordering. A proposed consultation base covers one matter, up to 100 supplied document pages, five questions and one 60-minute findings conference. A written opinion, deposition or testimony is included only when explicitly named and priced in the accepted case scope.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
Pages, words and records
One matter; proposed consultation base 100 pages/five questions; larger records, opinion length and appearance dates require individual fixed quotes.
Formats
Secure document index and findings conference; any opinion/report format stated explicitly in the case proposal.
Meetings and sessions
One 30-minute intake and one 60-minute findings conference for the consultation base.
Client inputs
Counsel identity, conflict-check information, matter questions, relevant records, deadline and permitted use.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Case-specific business-day delivery and appearance dates confirmed in the accepted fixed-fee proposal.
Revision rounds
One factual clarification; any written opinion revision allowance specified in the accepted case scope.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No automatic testimony/opinion commitment; travel, extensive record volumes and additional proceedings require an accepted fixed quote.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Custom written scope and fixed-price quote requiredScope inquiry
Annual Planning WorkshopStrategy & Consulting
Included scope and billing

Annual Planning Workshop

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 annual planning workshop package: One full-day planning workshop up to 360 facilitated minutes plus agreed breaks for one organization/act and up to eight participants; one annual plan up to 12 pages with four quarterly milestones and a prioritized action register up to 20 actions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
Pages, words and records
One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
Formats
Live workshop materials, PDF/DOCX annual plan and editable action register.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute preparation call, one 360-minute workshop and one 30-minute plan review.
Client inputs
Current business/artist plan, prior results, proposed budget constraints and decision-maker attendance.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Workshop on one accepted day; annual plan within five business days after the workshop and complete inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated annual-plan revision.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, new market-research studies, venue/catering/travel and additional workshops.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Annual Planning Workshop

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 annual planning workshop package: One full-day planning workshop up to 360 facilitated minutes plus agreed breaks for one organization/act and up to eight participants; one annual plan up to 12 pages with four quarterly milestones and a prioritized action register up to 20 actions.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
Pages, words and records
One organization, eight participants, one planning year, four quarter plans and 20 actions.
Formats
Live workshop materials, PDF/DOCX annual plan and editable action register.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute preparation call, one 360-minute workshop and one 30-minute plan review.
Client inputs
Current business/artist plan, prior results, proposed budget constraints and decision-maker attendance.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Workshop on one accepted day; annual plan within five business days after the workshop and complete inputs.
Revision rounds
One consolidated annual-plan revision.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Implementation, new market-research studies, venue/catering/travel and additional workshops.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Venue Pitch KitTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Venue Pitch Kit

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 venue pitch kit package: One booking one-sheet for print/web, 3 pitch-email templates, researched list of 25 suitable venues/talent buyers with contacts, source/date evidence and follow-up cadence plan; two consolidated revisions; built from existing EPK.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
Pages, words and records
One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
Formats
Print/web PDF, editable email copy and spreadsheet with contacts/source dates and follow-up cadence.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute booking brief and one 30-minute target review.
Client inputs
Existing EPK, draw/genre evidence, available dates, approved artist terms and target exclusions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit/list revisions; outreach itself is separate.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No actual sending or negotiations and no new EPK unless separately accepted. One suitable room is one verified venue/program, not a recipient count.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Venue Pitch Kit

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 venue pitch kit package: One booking one-sheet for print/web, 3 pitch-email templates, researched list of 25 suitable venues/talent buyers with contacts, source/date evidence and follow-up cadence plan; two consolidated revisions; built from existing EPK.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
Pages, words and records
One act, one booking one-sheet, three email templates and 25 researched suitable venues/talent buyers.
Formats
Print/web PDF, editable email copy and spreadsheet with contacts/source dates and follow-up cadence.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute booking brief and one 30-minute target review.
Client inputs
Existing EPK, draw/genre evidence, available dates, approved artist terms and target exclusions.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
2 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated kit/list revisions; outreach itself is separate.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No actual sending or negotiations and no new EPK unless separately accepted. One suitable room is one verified venue/program, not a recipient count.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,900 one timeView Scope
Monthly Booking RetainerTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Monthly Booking Retainer

$2,500 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly booking retainer package: Fifteen suitable new venue pitches per month with two appropriate follow-ups per pitch; five show-advance updates, calendar/hold tracking and reply logging; one 30-minute review and one-page monthly report. Artist approves terms and targets before outreach.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
Pages, words and records
One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
Formats
Calendar/hold ledger, contact/response log, five advance updates and one-page monthly report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Current EPK, availability, rider, artist-approved terms, target approval and venue contacts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 3-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated monthly target/pitch revision and factual corrections to five advance records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pitches beyond the finite monthly pool, performance staffing, travel purchases, contracts or commission arrangements require separate written scope; no booking outcome is guaranteed.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Monthly Booking Retainer

$2,500 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance. Existing minimum term: 3 months; the accepted order confirms the term dates and billing schedule.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monthly booking retainer package: Fifteen suitable new venue pitches per month with two appropriate follow-ups per pitch; five show-advance updates, calendar/hold tracking and reply logging; one 30-minute review and one-page monthly report. Artist approves terms and targets before outreach.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
Pages, words and records
One act; 15 new venue pitches, two follow-ups per pitch and five show-advance records each month.
Formats
Calendar/hold ledger, contact/response log, five advance updates and one-page monthly report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute onboarding and one 30-minute monthly review.
Client inputs
Current EPK, availability, rider, artist-approved terms, target approval and venue contacts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
Monthly, 3-month minimum. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
One consolidated monthly target/pitch revision and factual corrections to five advance records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Additional pitches beyond the finite monthly pool, performance staffing, travel purchases, contracts or commission arrangements require separate written scope; no booking outcome is guaranteed.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,500 / monthView Scope
Booking Outreach Campaign for a Regional RunTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Booking Outreach Campaign for a Regional Run

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking outreach campaign for a regional run package: Twenty-five suitable verified rooms for one regional run; one personalized initial pitch plus up to two suitable follow-ups per room during four weeks; reply/hold/confirmed-date tracking, a full contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
Pages, words and records
One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
Formats
Personalized pitches, hold/confirmed-date sheet, contact ledger and final report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute midpoint review.
Client inputs
EPK, date range, draw/genre evidence, approved artist terms and target list authorization.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated initial pitch/list revisions before sending; factual corrections to tracking records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No guaranteed bookings or fees; 25 distinct rooms, not 25 emails. Artist/venue contracts, deposits, travel and show operations excluded.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Booking Outreach Campaign for a Regional Run

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking outreach campaign for a regional run package: Twenty-five suitable verified rooms for one regional run; one personalized initial pitch plus up to two suitable follow-ups per room during four weeks; reply/hold/confirmed-date tracking, a full contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
Pages, words and records
One act and one regional run; 25 distinct suitable rooms, one initial pitch plus two follow-ups per room over four weeks.
Formats
Personalized pitches, hold/confirmed-date sheet, contact ledger and final report.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute kickoff and one 30-minute midpoint review.
Client inputs
EPK, date range, draw/genre evidence, approved artist terms and target list authorization.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated initial pitch/list revisions before sending; factual corrections to tracking records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • No guaranteed bookings or fees; 25 distinct rooms, not 25 emails. Artist/venue contracts, deposits, travel and show operations excluded.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,200 one timeView Scope
Radio Promo CampaignTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Radio Promo Campaign

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 radio promo campaign package: One single; radio one-sheet, up to 25 qualified programs/stations, one personalized servicing email and up to 2 suitable follow-ups; target/delivery/response ledger and known airplay log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
Pages, words and records
One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
Formats
Radio one-sheet, delivery/response ledger and verified airplay log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute release/format briefing and one 30-minute report review.
Client inputs
Clean mastered single, broadcast metadata, rights authority, release schedule and approved target list.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks, timed to a release. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated one-sheet/pitch revisions before servicing.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial airplay remains a station decision. Paid placement, required sponsorship notices, tracking vendors and music licenses excluded; paid play is not implied.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Radio Promo Campaign

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 radio promo campaign package: One single; radio one-sheet, up to 25 qualified programs/stations, one personalized servicing email and up to 2 suitable follow-ups; target/delivery/response ledger and known airplay log.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
Pages, words and records
One single; 25 suitable programs/stations, one servicing email and two follow-up attempts per target.
Formats
Radio one-sheet, delivery/response ledger and verified airplay log.
Meetings and sessions
One 45-minute release/format briefing and one 30-minute report review.
Client inputs
Clean mastered single, broadcast metadata, rights authority, release schedule and approved target list.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
6 weeks, timed to a release. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated one-sheet/pitch revisions before servicing.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Editorial airplay remains a station decision. Paid placement, required sponsorship notices, tracking vendors and music licenses excluded; paid play is not implied.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$3,800 one timeView Scope
Tour Routing and Advance PackTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Tour Routing and Advance Pack

$5,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tour routing and advance pack package: One tour of up to 15 stops over three weeks: route, driving times/rest days, tracked calendar holds, day contacts and one advance sheet per stop; one consolidated venue clarification per stop and two route/advance revision rounds.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
Pages, words and records
One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
Formats
Route/drive/rest plan, holds ledger, 15 advance sheets and day-of contact sheet as XLSX/PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute route briefing and two 30-minute advance reviews.
Client inputs
Confirmed offers, performer travel constraints, rider, payout terms and venue decision-maker contacts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks before the run. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated route/advance revisions before final itinerary.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel/hotel purchases, day-of on-call coverage and performance guarantees excluded; artist supplies confirmed offers and production requirements.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Tour Routing and Advance Pack

$5,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tour routing and advance pack package: One tour of up to 15 stops over three weeks: route, driving times/rest days, tracked calendar holds, day contacts and one advance sheet per stop; one consolidated venue clarification per stop and two route/advance revision rounds.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
Pages, words and records
One tour up to 15 stops over three weeks; one route and one advance sheet per stop.
Formats
Route/drive/rest plan, holds ledger, 15 advance sheets and day-of contact sheet as XLSX/PDF.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute route briefing and two 30-minute advance reviews.
Client inputs
Confirmed offers, performer travel constraints, rider, payout terms and venue decision-maker contacts.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
4 weeks before the run. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated route/advance revisions before final itinerary.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Travel/hotel purchases, day-of on-call coverage and performance guarantees excluded; artist supplies confirmed offers and production requirements.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$5,000 one timeView Scope
Booking Outreach Campaign for the Texas CircuitTouring & Booking
Included scope and billing

Booking Outreach Campaign for the Texas Circuit

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking outreach campaign for the texas circuit package: Seventy-five suitable verified Texas rooms; one personalized initial pitch and two suitable follow-ups per room during eight weeks; reply triage, holds, routing suggestions, permanent contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
Pages, words and records
One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
Formats
Pitch/contact ledger, holds/routing suggestions and final report; developed contacts supplied to client.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff, two 30-minute progress reviews and one 30-minute final review.
Client inputs
EPK, Texas date availability, draw/genre evidence, artist terms and approved targets.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated initial pitch/target revisions; factual correction of route/hold records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • 75 distinct qualified rooms, not 75 recipients. Bounced targets replaced where feasible within accepted window. Bookings, guarantees, contracts, show operations and travel excluded.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Booking Outreach Campaign for the Texas Circuit

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 booking outreach campaign for the texas circuit package: Seventy-five suitable verified Texas rooms; one personalized initial pitch and two suitable follow-ups per room during eight weeks; reply triage, holds, routing suggestions, permanent contact ledger and final report. Client approves artist terms and targets before sending.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
Pages, words and records
One act; 75 distinct suitable Texas rooms, one personalized initial pitch and two follow-ups per room over eight weeks.
Formats
Pitch/contact ledger, holds/routing suggestions and final report; developed contacts supplied to client.
Meetings and sessions
One 60-minute kickoff, two 30-minute progress reviews and one 30-minute final review.
Client inputs
EPK, Texas date availability, draw/genre evidence, artist terms and approved targets.
Approval
One client-designated decision-maker consolidates feedback and accepts the final work. The client account/rights owner authorizes access and use; the responsible attorney approves legal content where applicable.
Delivery
8 weeks. Production starts only after complete client inputs, required access and acceptance of the scheduled start. The order states the dated milestones and corresponding business-day schedule; an existing calendar-day deadline is not extended by converting it to business days.
Revision rounds
Two consolidated initial pitch/target revisions; factual correction of route/hold records.
Rights and licensing
Client supplies authorized materials and identifies usage restrictions. Third-party licenses remain subject to their own terms; asset ownership and usage grants follow the accepted written agreement. This scope adds no new license, cancellation or refund rule.
Change requests
Higher quantities, extra accounts/pages/locations, additional original concepts, replacement inputs after approval, added revisions and expanded deliverables require a written fixed-price change quote accepted before work. No automatic charge or purchase is authorized. Components included in a bundle are charged once. Follow-up boundary: Follow-ups stop on a decline, opt-out or invalid address even when the maximum attempt count has not been used; each target is a distinct suitable outlet or venue.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Accept the named scope, input inventory, scheduled start and external-cost allowance.
  • Approve the product-specific brief, account/record inventory or shot/placement matrix before production.
  • Review the stated deliverables and complete the included consolidated revisions.
  • Approve delivery or release and receive the agreed files, records or account handoff.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • 75 distinct qualified rooms, not 75 recipients. Bounced targets replaced where feasible within accepted window. Bookings, guarantees, contracts, show operations and travel excluded.

How engagements begin: Checkout requests the listed service. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance and written scope before work begins.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 one timeView Scope
Scope inquiryThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

The IMC Machine For Local Artist Tour Tenants

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 local-tour tenant: One act and one tour leg across up to 8 cities; booking hold/confirmation calendar, run-of-show and load-in records, campaign drafts and settlement references.
  • 8 city campaign workspaces: Per city: one release draft up to 600 words, 1 original poster with square/portrait/story adaptations, 1 email draft up to 250 words; client operates enabled tools and approves outputs.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review of up to 4 consolidated account/workflow issues; no booking outreach, travel or managed dispatch included.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 act, 1 tenant, 2 operators, 8 cities and 8 named venues per accepted tour leg
Pages, words and records
8 event records/month; 8 campaign builds; no unlimited multi-city or multi-date entitlement for new orders
Formats
Configured calendar, PDF/CSV run and settlement records, supplied-media JPG/PNG templates and editable copy
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
10–15 business days for proposal after complete facts; event production schedule quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

The IMC Machine For Local Artist Tour Tenants

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 local-tour tenant: One act and one tour leg across up to 8 cities; booking hold/confirmation calendar, run-of-show and load-in records, campaign drafts and settlement references.
  • 8 city campaign workspaces: Per city: one release draft up to 600 words, 1 original poster with square/portrait/story adaptations, 1 email draft up to 250 words; client operates enabled tools and approves outputs.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review of up to 4 consolidated account/workflow issues; no booking outreach, travel or managed dispatch included.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 act, 1 tenant, 2 operators, 8 cities and 8 named venues per accepted tour leg
Pages, words and records
8 event records/month; 8 campaign builds; no unlimited multi-city or multi-date entitlement for new orders
Formats
Configured calendar, PDF/CSV run and settlement records, supplied-media JPG/PNG templates and editable copy
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
10–15 business days for proposal after complete facts; event production schedule quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Archived offer — existing agreements retainedScope inquiry
Scope inquiryThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo Practitioner

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo Practitioner

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Archived offer — existing agreements retainedScope inquiry
The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo PractitionerThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo Practitioner

$625 / month + $6,300 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 civil-practice platform tenant: One civil attorney account with the enabled evidence, draft-review and marketing modules documented at onboarding; no legal analysis or managed campaign production is included.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Solo Practitioner

$625 / month + $6,300 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 civil-practice platform tenant: One civil attorney account with the enabled evidence, draft-review and marketing modules documented at onboarding; no legal analysis or managed campaign production is included.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$625 / month + $6,300 setupView Scope
Scope inquiryThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

The IMC Machine For Small Independent Venues

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 small independent venue tenant: One venue under 300 seats; booking, run-of-show, hospitality, guest-list and marketing workspaces as enabled and demonstrated at onboarding. Client operates the tools.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 16 performance records per month maximum: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 venue under 300 seats, 1 tenant, 3 operators, 2 approved communications destinations
Pages, words and records
16 performance records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

The IMC Machine For Small Independent Venues

Archived offer — existing agreements retained

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 small independent venue tenant: One venue under 300 seats; booking, run-of-show, hospitality, guest-list and marketing workspaces as enabled and demonstrated at onboarding. Client operates the tools.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 16 performance records per month maximum: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 venue under 300 seats, 1 tenant, 3 operators, 2 approved communications destinations
Pages, words and records
16 performance records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Archived offer — existing agreements retainedScope inquiry
Recurring Programming, StudioThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Studio

$1,300 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One studio room (up to 30 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 studio room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Studio

$1,300 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One studio room (up to 30 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 studio room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,300 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope
Recurring Programming, LoungeThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Lounge

$1,800 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One lounge room (30–200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 lounge room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Lounge

$1,800 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One lounge room (30–200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 lounge room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$1,800 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope
Recurring Programming, BroadcastThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Broadcast

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One broadcast room (online/livestream/virtual capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 broadcast room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Broadcast

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One broadcast room (online/livestream/virtual capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 broadcast room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope
Recurring Programming, PlayhouseThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Playhouse

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One playhouse room (200–600 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 playhouse room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Playhouse

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One playhouse room (200–600 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 playhouse room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$2,500 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope
Recurring Programming, HallThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Hall

$4,400 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One hall room (600–1,200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 hall room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Hall

$4,400 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One hall room (600–1,200 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 hall room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$4,400 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope
Recurring Programming, TheaterThe IMC Machine
Included scope and billing

Recurring Programming, Theater

$6,300 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One theater room (1,200–2,500 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 theater room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Included quantities, delivery and billing

Recurring Programming, Theater

$6,300 / month + $1,900 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 scheduled-programming account: One theater room (1,200–2,500 capacity/category), one approved schedule and one named release/approval path.
  • 2 bespoke campaign kits per month: Each kit contains one event brief/release up to 600 words; 3 original graphic concepts × 3 format renditions = 9 exports total (3 primary square files plus 6 portrait/story derivatives); one 12-second motion treatment from cleared supplied media; one listing draft; and one email draft up to 250 words. Across two monthly kits: 6 concepts and 18 total static exports, plus 2 motion treatments.
  • 20 schedule entries per month maximum: Routine event data using the accepted templates; bespoke production is limited to the 2 included kits.
  • 1 monthly review: 30-minute schedule and approval review; one consolidated revision per bespoke kit.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 theater room, 1 account, 2 operators, 2 selected public destinations; extra active spaces require separate monthly units
Pages, words and records
20 routine schedule records and 2 bespoke kits per month; 6 original graphic concepts, 18 total static exports (6 primary plus 12 derivative files) and 2 motion treatments. Routine schedule records do not create additional bespoke kit entitlements.
Formats
Editable copy, JPG/PNG 1080×1080/1350/1920, MP4 H.264 1080×1920, calendar CSV and approval record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Initial configuration 10 business days after accepted start and complete inputs; monthly calendar agreed in advance; each bespoke draft 5–10 business days after its complete brief.
Revision rounds
One consolidated revision round per bespoke kit; two kits per month. Factual corrections to the accepted 20 routine schedule records are included. New creative direction, additional kits or replacement source media require a fixed change quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.
Included fee and external costs
The service fee includes the listed professional deliverables, expressly included physical print quantities, and ordinary production-file exports. Third-party account/seat subscriptions, hosting/domains, metered software or AI use, advertising, presswire/media placement, additional print/manufacturing, shipping, travel, location/equipment hire and licensed assets are client costs unless expressly included in the listed deliverables or a stated allowance in the accepted scope. Any proposed allowance must state a finite dollar cap and purpose before acceptance; extra spend requires written approval and does not trigger automatic billing. Included print runs and bundle assets are not charged a second time.
New-order scope boundary
These finite quantities and production boundaries are proposed for new accepted orders. Existing signed scopes, included bundle components, subscriptions and historical entitlements remain unchanged.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

$6,300 / month + $1,900 setupView Scope

Review the linked scope for billing, deposits, applicable tax, and delivery details. Monthly prices retain their monthly designation. A custom proposal can combine services.

A Conversation About the Work

Choose a Time to Talk

Discuss the project, the audience, the schedule, and the services that fit your needs.

Schedule a Conversation

Work with Good Creative Media

A Good Conversation Is a Useful Beginning

Perhaps the website needs a clearer introduction. Perhaps the campaign needs a story, the course needs a better sequence, or the office needs fewer repeated tasks. Begin with the need that matters most.

Tell Julie Good about the work, the audience, and the change you want to make.

The Google booking page shows available times and includes a Google Meet link. For a phone or Zoom conversation, choose your preferred format in the inquiry.

Call (210) 385 8658
Email Julie Good’s Studio

We reply within one business day and agree on the scope, schedule, and price before work begins.

How we handle your information · Make a payment

← Back

Thank you for your response. ✨

Additional GCM and IMC scopes

Act Setup · $625 one time

Act Setup

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 performer onboarding: One act identity, supplied logo/photo kit, booking contact and approved biography up to 500 words.
  • 3 reusable campaign templates: One square, portrait and story template with approved credits/CTA.
  • 1 handoff: 45-minute session and one sample booking campaign brief.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 act, 1 operator, 2 selected posting/listing destinations
Pages, words and records
1 reusable kit; 1 sample campaign draft; no ongoing event credits
Formats
1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 templates and PDF checklist
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
5–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Additional Seat, Firm · $625 / month

Additional Seat, Firm

$625 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 attorney or investigator seat: One named user added to the existing eligible plan, with current role permissions and sign-in validation.
  • 1 access record: Account, role, owner and revocation contact recorded; approver links remain separate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 existing subscription and 1 named user
Pages, words and records
No additional campaigns, matters, storage or managed services
Formats
Configured access and PDF/CSV role record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
3–5 business days after accepted subscription and owner authorization; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Additional Seat, Small Firm Or Agency · $950 / month

Additional Seat, Small Firm Or Agency

$950 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 attorney or investigator seat: One named user added to the existing eligible plan, with current role permissions and sign-in validation.
  • 1 access record: Account, role, owner and revocation contact recorded; approver links remain separate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 existing subscription and 1 named user
Pages, words and records
No additional campaigns, matters, storage or managed services
Formats
Configured access and PDF/CSV role record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
3–5 business days after accepted subscription and owner authorization; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Attorney Training: Dismissal Pathways Library · $1,000 one time

Attorney Training: Dismissal Pathways Library

$1,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 120 training minutes: Attorney-led demonstration of Article 39.14, Brady, Miranda, suppression and statutory-dismissal pathways, with Q&A within the 120-minute session.
  • 1 workbook: Up to 20 pages with 5 pathway examples, authority-verification checklist and workflow templates.
  • 1 completion record: Attendee certificate; CLE credit/reporting only if confirmed in the signed order.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 session, up to 10 attendees, 1 organization
Pages, words and records
5 demonstration pathways; synthetic/deidentified example matter only
Formats
PDF workbook; live screen share or recording delivery agreed before order
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Session scheduled 10–15 business days after inputs; workbook within 5 business days afterward; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Attorney Training: Three-Model Review For Court Filings · $1,000 one time

Attorney Training: Three-Model Review For Court Filings

$1,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 60 training minutes: Responsible AI assistance, three-model review and attorney approval with Q&A within the 60-minute session.
  • 1 sample motion review: One deidentified document up to 10 pages reviewed by three configured models with disagreements retained.
  • 1 workbook and completion record: Up to 12 pages of guidance/workflow templates; certificate; CLE only if confirmed in writing.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 session, up to 10 attendees, 1 organization
Pages, words and records
1 sample motion, 10 pages, 3 model reviews
Formats
PDF workbook/report; live or recorded training as agreed
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Session scheduled 10–15 business days after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Axon Evidence Integration Setup · $2,500 one time

Axon Evidence Integration Setup

$2,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Axon feasibility/configuration: One authorized share workflow and IMC tenant; vendor permissions and actual API/download capability verified.
  • 1 matter routing map: One sample matter, ingestion destination, receipt log and notification recipient.
  • 10 test files maximum: Up to 5 GB total; checksum/timestamp manifest, ingestion and failure case inspection.
  • 1 operating guide: Supported polling frequency, authorization refresh and manual fallback confirmed before acceptance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 Axon organization/share workflow, 1 IMC tenant, 1 matter
Pages, words and records
10 test files, 5 GB; production volume and polling allowance quoted
Formats
CSV manifest, PDF configuration/validation record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
2–3 business weeks after vendor permission and complete access; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Brady / Article 39.14 Discovery Review · $6,300 one time

Brady / Article 39.14 Discovery Review

$6,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 discovery review workspace: One criminal-defense matter; source inventory, cited potential deficiency and issue log.
  • 500 document pages maximum: Plus up to 300 minutes source audio/video and 100 files proposed; review coverage explicitly logged.
  • 1 supplemental discovery draft: Up to 15 pages if needed, three-model comparative review and attorney approval gate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 matter, 1 responsible attorney
Pages, words and records
500 pages, 300 media minutes, 100 files proposed; larger production requires separate scope
Formats
PDF/DOCX issue and deficiency report; CSV inventory; timestamped transcript references
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
3–5 business weeks after complete production manifest; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Draft Court Packet Preparation, Single Matter · $3,800 one time

Draft Court Packet Preparation, Single Matter

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 draft court packet: Selected exhibits with Bates-style index, bench-book citations, witness folder and delivery manifest.
  • 200 source pages maximum: Up to 25 selected exhibits and 5 witness summaries proposed; selection approved by responsible attorney.
  • 1 binder and digital backup: One indexed/tabbed binder with printer allowance before order; PDF backup and editable index.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 matter, 1 responsible attorney
Pages, words and records
200 source pages, 25 exhibits, 5 witnesses; no independent research of the case
Formats
Searchable PDF, DOCX/CSV index and 1 printed binder
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
10–15 business days after complete attorney-selected inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Drive Integration Setup · $1,500 one time

Drive Integration Setup

$1,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 storage connection: One Google Drive OR OneDrive account, authorization and defined folder mapping.
  • 2 mapped folders maximum: One source and one matter/event destination; direction of sync verified before activation.
  • 20 test files maximum: Synthetic or client-approved files; ingestion, audit trail, permissions, failure and retry report.
  • 1 handoff guide: Connection owner, reauthorization, scope and manual fallback.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 provider account, 1 IMC tenant, 2 folders
Pages, words and records
20 test files/1 GB total proposed; production volume quote separate
Formats
Configured connection; CSV test manifest and PDF guide
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
10–15 business days after authorized access; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Firm, Six Included Professional Seats · $3,800 / month + $12,500 setup or $37,500 / year + $12,500 setup

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Firm, Six Included Professional Seats

$3,800 / month + $12,500 setup or $37,500 / year + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 6 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 60 matters, 6000 document pages, 3600 source-media minutes, 300 GB storage and 12 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 6 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 60 matters, 6000 pages, 3600 media minutes, 300 GB, 12 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Cancel anytime.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Small Firm (2 to 5 Attorneys) · $1,900 / month + $9,400 setup or $18,800 / year + $9,400 setup

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Small Firm (2 to 5 Attorneys)

$1,900 / month + $9,400 setup or $18,800 / year + $9,400 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 2 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 20 matters, 2000 document pages, 1200 source-media minutes, 100 GB storage and 4 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 2 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 20 matters, 2000 pages, 1200 media minutes, 100 GB, 4 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Cancel anytime.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo Practitioner · $625 / month + $6,300 setup or $6,300 / year + $6,300 setup

Evi Defense — The IMC Machine For Criminal Defense, Solo Practitioner

$625 / month + $6,300 setup or $6,300 / year + $6,300 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 criminal defense platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Cancel anytime.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Residential Account Setup · $2,500 full fee; $1,250 booking deposit

Residential Account Setup

$2,500 full fee; $1,250 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 residential workspace: Company identity, property intake, county-source reference fields and approval path.
  • 5 team sign-ins maximum: Named role and approval map; credentials stay client-owned.
  • 1 first property record: Up to 30 client-confirmed facts and one introductory Buddy goal.
  • 1 handoff session: 60 minutes covering property, campaign and approval areas.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 company, 1 workspace, up to 5 users
Pages, words and records
1 property, 30 fact fields; no bulk migration
Formats
PDF role map and intake checklist; configured workspace
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
5–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Residential Listing Launch · $3,000 full fee; $1,500 booking deposit

Residential Listing Launch

$3,000 full fee; $1,500 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 sale listing: One verified property brief, up to 30 facts, and advertising identity.
  • 1 property page: Up to 700 words plus distribution/correction checklist; broker performs MLS entry.
  • 4 original social concepts: Each up to 120 words with CTA and caption, adapted to 2 selected platforms: 8 placements total.
  • 1 email: Up to 300 words, one tracked destination.
  • 1 availability update: One factual status update and preserved campaign proof.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 brand, 2 social accounts; no community management
Pages, words and records
1 property page; quantity selection separately prices each additional property
Formats
Editable copy; 1080×1350 and 1080×1080 JPG/PNG from supplied cleared photos; alt text
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Rental Availability Launch · $2,800 full fee; $1,400 booking deposit

Rental Availability Launch

$2,800 full fee; $1,400 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 rental unit: One verified property brief, up to 30 facts, and advertising identity.
  • 1 property page: Up to 700 words plus distribution/correction checklist; broker performs MLS entry.
  • 4 original social concepts: Each up to 120 words with CTA and caption, adapted to 2 selected platforms: 8 placements total.
  • 1 email: Up to 300 words, one tracked destination.
  • 1 availability update: One factual status update and preserved campaign proof.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 brand, 2 social accounts; no community management
Pages, words and records
1 property page; quantity selection separately prices each additional property
Formats
Editable copy; 1080×1350 and 1080×1080 JPG/PNG from supplied cleared photos; alt text
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Short-Stay Booking Boost · $3,000 full fee; $1,500 booking deposit

Short-Stay Booking Boost

$3,000 full fee; $1,500 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 listing audit: Photo order, amenities, policies, authorization, direct-booking and platform rules; up to 30 facts.
  • 1 30-day campaign calendar: 8 dated content slots for one listing.
  • 8 original social concepts: 8 caption/CTA/alt-text sets adapted to 2 platforms: 16 placements.
  • 1 vertical walkthrough script: Up to 60 seconds; filming excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 listing and brand, 2 social accounts
Pages, words and records
One listing per unit; order 1–3 listings as separately scoped units
Formats
Calendar CSV/PDF, copy document, 1080×1920 storyboard; 1080×1350 graphics from supplied cleared photos
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
10–15 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Open House Boost · $1,000 full fee; $500 booking deposit

Open House Boost

$1,000 full fee; $500 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 seven-day countdown: One address and showing date.
  • 1 Facebook event or Page brief: One 250-word event brief and CTA.
  • 1 Instagram Reel script: 30 seconds, supplied footage; capture excluded.
  • 3 individual Story frames: One sequence with location, fact and reminder; 1080×1920.
  • 1 reminder message: Email up to 250 words or SMS up to 320 characters, client selects one.
  • 1 property facts card: One 1080×1350 image, alt text and linked destination.
  • 1 follow-up message: Up to 200 words after the showing.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 address/date, Facebook and Instagram, 1 client email/SMS account
Pages, words and records
One date per unit; 1–4 dates may be ordered separately
Formats
JPG/PNG and editable copy; Reel script only, no filmed asset
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
5–7 business days; accepted schedule must allow the seven-day countdown; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Luxury Listing Launch · $22,500 full fee; $11,250 booking deposit

Luxury Listing Launch

$22,500 full fee; $11,250 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 luxury campaign: One property/audience brief, distribution plan and property page up to 1,200 words.
  • 8 original social concepts: Two platform adaptations per concept, 16 placements; captions, alt text and tracked CTA.
  • 1 Full Media Day: GCM-2513 included once: listing photography, qualifying 3D tour, horizontal film and vertical edit.
  • 1 executive review: 60-minute review and documented delivery manifest.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 brand, 2 social accounts
Pages, words and records
Property above $1 million or at least 4,000 sq ft; included tour maximum 5,000 sq ft
Formats
Media-day formats plus property-page copy and campaign calendar
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
4–6 business weeks after scheduled capture; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Listing Photography · $3,800–$11,300 full fee; $1,900 booking deposit for base scope

Listing Photography

$3,800–$11,300 full fee; $1,900 booking deposit for base scope

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote. Full-fee tiers in the existing size order: $3,800, $5,700, $7,500, $11,300. Each tier reserves with a 50% deposit.

Included deliverables

  • 1 property photography session: One scheduled visit, preparation checklist, lighting, capture and selected finished images.
  • 30 finished photographs maximum: Proposed 2-bedroom tier: 20; 3-bedroom: 25; 4-bedroom: 30; large-home custom scope sets a finite image count before order.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 appointment
Pages, words and records
2/3/4 bedroom tiers; 5 bedrooms or 4,000 sq ft threshold requires a measured finite area/room quote
Formats
High-resolution JPG at least 3,000 pixels long edge plus 2,048-pixel web copies; color correction, no virtual structural alteration
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days after scheduled capture; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Twilight Session · $3,800 full fee; $1,900 booking deposit

Twilight Session

$3,800 full fee; $1,900 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 twilight appointment: Up to 120 minutes across golden and blue hour at one property.
  • 12 finished images: Exterior and selected interior-to-exterior compositions; color and exposure correction.
  • 1 weather reschedule: Preserved existing inclusion when conditions do not support capture.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 camera appointment
Pages, words and records
Up to 6 exterior viewpoints and 3 interior-to-exterior viewpoints
Formats
12 high-resolution JPGs plus web copies
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
5–7 business days after suitable scheduled capture; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Residential Aerial Drone Session · $15,000 full fee; $7,500 booking deposit

Residential Aerial Drone Session

$15,000 full fee; $7,500 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 professional pilot session: Up to 120 minutes at one property after airspace, weather and access feasibility review.
  • 12 aerial photographs: Finished stills showing approach, roofline, land and setting.
  • 1 aerial film: Up to 60 seconds from captured flight footage, one horizontal edit and caption file if spoken audio is used.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property and flight site; authorized pilot required
Pages, words and records
Up to 20 acres within a mutually accepted safe flight plan
Formats
12 high-resolution JPGs; 1920×1080 MP4, 24/30 fps; rights-cleared music when approved
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
10–15 business days after lawful scheduled capture; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Matterport 3D Tour · $5,700 full fee; $2,850 booking deposit

Matterport 3D Tour

$5,700 full fee; $2,850 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 3D capture visit: Room-by-room capture of one residence up to 3,000 sq ft.
  • 1 processed tour: Navigation/link QA and supported Room Intelligence output, with platform limitations documented.
  • 1 delivery record: Tour link, host account, proposed hosting term and renewal cost recorded before acceptance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 home, 1 Matterport host account
Pages, words and records
Up to 3,000 sq ft
Formats
Hosted 3D tour URL and PDF delivery checklist; no survey or measurement certification
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days after scheduled scan; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Large Home 3D Tour · $7,500 full fee; $3,750 booking deposit

Large Home 3D Tour

$7,500 full fee; $3,750 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 3D capture visit: Room-by-room capture of one residence up to 5,000 sq ft.
  • 1 processed tour: Navigation/link QA and supported Room Intelligence output, with platform limitations documented.
  • 1 delivery record: Tour link, host account, proposed hosting term and renewal cost recorded before acceptance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 home, 1 Matterport host account
Pages, words and records
Up to 5,000 sq ft; above 3,000 sq ft
Formats
Hosted 3D tour URL and PDF delivery checklist; no survey or measurement certification
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days after scheduled scan; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Walkthrough Video · $5,700 full fee; $2,850 booking deposit

Walkthrough Video

$5,700 full fee; $2,850 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 filming visit: Up to 240 minutes at one prepared property; route and room shot list.
  • 1 horizontal film: Up to 120 seconds, captured footage with color, sound and cleared music.
  • 1 vertical social edit: Up to 60 seconds adapted from the same film; captions/transcript and CTA.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 filming appointment
Pages, words and records
Up to 12 rooms/spaces and 1 route; no aerial capture
Formats
1920×1080 and 1080×1920 H.264 MP4; SRT and transcript when speech is present
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
10–15 business days after scheduled filming; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Full Media Day · $18,800 full fee; $9,400 booking deposit

Full Media Day

$18,800 full fee; $9,400 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 coordinated capture day: Up to 480 on-site minutes with one plan at one prepared home.
  • 30 finished listing images: Interior and exterior images selected from the scheduled spaces.
  • 1 3D tour: One home up to 5,000 sq ft, tour-link QA and supported Room Intelligence.
  • 1 horizontal walkthrough film: Up to 120 seconds.
  • 1 vertical social edit: Up to 60 seconds, captions/transcript if spoken, color/sound and licensed music.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 appointment, 1 tour host account
Pages, words and records
Up to 5,000 sq ft; 15 rooms/spaces maximum proposed
Formats
High-resolution/web JPGs; hosted 3D tour; 1920×1080 and 1080×1920 MP4; delivery manifest
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
15–20 business days after scheduled capture; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Extra Square Footage Block · $1,500 full fee; $750 booking deposit

Extra Square Footage Block

$1,500 full fee; $750 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1000 additional square feet: One compatible capture-service extension, including added preparation, capture and finishing in parent delivery.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One existing property order; no separate visit
Pages, words and records
1,000 sq ft per unit; 1–3 separately priced units maximum
Formats
Same formats and revision round as parent service
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
Parent schedule plus 2–5 business days as quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Rush Delivery · $2,300 full fee; $1,150 booking deposit

Rush Delivery

$2,300 full fee; $1,150 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 priority editing reservation: One qualifying residential parent order; same deliverables and QA, scheduled only after capacity check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
One parent media project
Pages, words and records
No added capture, concepts, footage or revision rounds
Formats
Same files as selected parent service
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
Target 2 business days after capture and all required inputs; scheduled acceptance required; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Managed Meta Campaign Setup · $1,300 full fee; $650 booking deposit

Managed Meta Campaign Setup

$1,300 full fee; $650 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Meta housing campaign: Objective, special-category controls, approved destination and launch checklist.
  • 3 ad assemblies: From client-approved assets; one copy variation per ad, one tracked CTA each.
  • 1 measurement check: UTM links and permitted conversion configuration; approved campaign proof.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 Meta ad account, 1 page, 1 property
Pages, words and records
1 campaign, up to 2 ad sets and 3 ads; no new shoot or monthly management included
Formats
Existing approved images/video; platform-ready ad copy and PDF launch checklist
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
5–7 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Engagements: Checkout places a refundable deposit. The studio accepts each project before work begins; your deposit applies to the project in full, or returns to you in full when the calendar is full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Additional Standard Listing · $2,800 full fee; $1,400 booking deposit

Additional Standard Listing

$2,800 full fee; $1,400 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 additional sale listing: One verified property brief, up to 30 facts, and advertising identity.
  • 1 property page: Up to 700 words plus distribution/correction checklist; broker performs MLS entry.
  • 4 original social concepts: Each up to 120 words with CTA and caption, adapted to 2 selected platforms: 8 placements total.
  • 1 email: Up to 300 words, one tracked destination.
  • 1 availability update: One factual status update and preserved campaign proof.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 brand, 2 social accounts; no community management
Pages, words and records
1 property page; quantity selection separately prices each additional property
Formats
Editable copy; 1080×1350 and 1080×1080 JPG/PNG from supplied cleared photos; alt text
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Print One-Sheets · $750 full fee; $375 booking deposit

Print One-Sheets

$750 full fee; $375 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 listing-sheet design: One single-sided US Letter page from approved identity, facts and photos.
  • 25 printed sheets: One approved stock/finish allowance confirmed before order; local pickup or agreed handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 listing, 1 design
Pages, words and records
25 sheets per set; 1–2 separately priced sets
Formats
8.5×11-inch print PDF with bleed to printer specification plus screen PDF
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
5–7 business days plus verified printer lead time; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Sign and QR Kit · $1,000 full fee; $500 booking deposit

Sign and QR Kit

$1,000 full fee; $500 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 yard-sign kit: One 18×24-inch design, proposed substrate/stake allowance confirmed before production.
  • 1 QR destination: One approved property/tour link, mobile scan tests and delivery handoff.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 property, 1 destination, 1 sign
Pages, words and records
1 sign plus 1 stake; installation not included
Formats
Print PDF/SVG to vendor specification and mobile proof
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
7–10 business days plus verified production lead time; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Portfolio Partner · $3,800 / month

Portfolio Partner

$3,800 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 standard listing campaigns per month maximum: One verified property page up to 500 words and 2 original social concepts per listing, adapted to 2 platforms (4 placements per listing).
  • 4 factual availability updates per month maximum: One update per included campaign; approved status, price or availability corrections within the accepted property record.
  • 1 monthly calendar and review: 30-minute review, reusable identity/property records and one metrics summary.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 4 requesting users, 2 social accounts
Pages, words and records
4 standard campaigns/month, one factual availability update per campaign; existing rollover terms remain as agreed.
Formats
Editable copy/calendar, 1080×1350 and 1080×1080 assets from approved supplied media
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
Monthly calendar agreed at scheduled onboarding; standard drafts 5–10 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

billed monthly until canceled under the signed service terms.

No booking deposit is collected for this partnership.

Unused monthly capacity does not roll forward unless the written agreement says otherwise.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Brokerage Partner · $6,900 / month

Brokerage Partner

$6,900 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 8 standard listing campaigns per month maximum: One verified property page up to 500 words and 2 original social concepts per listing, adapted to 2 platforms (4 placements per listing).
  • 8 factual availability updates per month maximum: One update per included campaign; approved status, price or availability corrections within the accepted property record.
  • 1 monthly calendar and review: 30-minute review, reusable identity/property records and one metrics summary.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 8 requesting users, 2 social accounts
Pages, words and records
8 standard campaigns/month, one factual availability update per campaign; existing rollover terms remain as agreed.
Formats
Editable copy/calendar, 1080×1350 and 1080×1080 assets from approved supplied media
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
Monthly calendar agreed at scheduled onboarding; standard drafts 5–10 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

billed monthly until canceled under the signed service terms.

No booking deposit is collected for this partnership.

Unused monthly capacity does not roll forward unless the written agreement says otherwise.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Brokerage Account Setup · $7,500 full fee; $3,750 booking deposit

Brokerage Account Setup

$7,500 full fee; $3,750 booking deposit

Existing 50% booking-deposit arrangement retained. The balance is invoiced when approved work is ready for final delivery. The displayed checkout charge is the booking deposit for the base scope; expanded quantities require the corresponding written full-fee quote.

Included deliverables

  • 1 brokerage workspace: Public identity, broker approval path, reusable disclosures and property intake.
  • 25 individual team sign-ins maximum: Agent roster and least-privilege role map.
  • 1 first working goal: Buddy introduction and walkthrough with broker administrator.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 brokerage, up to 25 sign-ins
Pages, words and records
One roster of 25 users; one intake schema up to 30 fields
Formats
Configured workspace, role matrix PDF/CSV and 60-minute handoff
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Property address, measured area/room count, owner/broker authority, accurate listing facts, access schedule and releases for every depicted person.
Approval
Client-named broker/owner approves property facts and public materials.
Delivery
10–15 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Single-Line Trace · $4,500 one time

Single-Line Trace

$4,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 ancestral line or question: Census, vital and cemetery searches, research log and source-linked findings.
  • 12 report pages maximum: Preserve sourced 8–12-page dossier plus private source-record folder.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 family contact/approval owner
Pages, words and records
One ancestral line or research question, up to 30 source-record references, up to 3 repositories, and an 8–12-page cited dossier.
Formats
Designed PDF dossier; source-record images/PDFs with citations
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
3–5 business weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Family Dossier · $10,700 one time

Family Dossier

$10,700 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 family unit across 3 generations: Land, probate and newspaper research with image provenance and research log.
  • 30 report pages maximum: Preserve sourced 20–30-page illustrated report and private source folder.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 family contact/approval owner
Pages, words and records
One family unit, 3 generations; up to 75 records proposed
Formats
Designed PDF with images and hyperlinks; source-record folder
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
6–10 business weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Legacy Dossier · $16,300 one time

Legacy Dossier

$16,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 2 parental lines: Proposed finite study of 4 generations, collateral relatives and living-descendant evidence with appropriate privacy controls.
  • 50 report pages maximum: Cover, contents, hyperlinked citations and record appendix; uncertainty and conflicting evidence labeled.
  • 1 source appendix: Available certified/sworn records clearly distinguished from unsworn research; no heirship determination.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 family approval owner; private records access
Pages, words and records
2 lines, 4 generations, up to 100 records, 25 collateral/descendant entries proposed within 55–4200 minutes
Formats
Designed PDF dossier and private source-record folder
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
8–14 business weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

GCM-2604. Research Extension · $3,200 one time

GCM-2604. Research Extension

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 focused research extension: One existing family dossier, up to 2 agreed research questions, up to 20 source-record references and 3 repository searches.
  • 1 cited dossier supplement: Up to 10 pages with findings, unresolved questions, negative-search log and record-order status. Specific findings are not guaranteed.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 existing family dossier
Pages, words and records
2 research questions, 20 source-record references, 3 repository searches and 10 supplement pages; archive copying or certificate charges require a separate approved allowance.
Formats
PDF supplement, research log and source files
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
2–4 business weeks plus archive response time; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Yearbook and Photograph Recovery · $1,300 one time

Yearbook and Photograph Recovery

$1,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 school archive run: Research one named school and a proposed 10-year date window across available volumes.
  • 20 record extracts maximum: Source-cited pages/photos, availability log and up to 5-page findings note.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 subject, 1 school
Pages, words and records
10 named school years, up to 20 extracts proposed; inaccessible volumes reported
Formats
Source-resolution scans and PDF findings; rights status per image
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
2–4 business weeks plus archive availability; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Newspaper Deep-Dive · $1,300 one time

Newspaper Deep-Dive

$1,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 subject research sweep: Up to 3 named newspaper archives over one agreed 20-year window.
  • 30 cited clippings maximum: Chronology, search log and up to 8-page synthesis.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 subject and approval owner
Pages, words and records
3 archives, 20-year window, 30 extracts proposed
Formats
PDF report and rights-cleared source excerpts
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
3–5 business weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Collateral and Living-Relative Mapping · $1,800 one time

Collateral and Living-Relative Mapping

$1,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 25 relative entries maximum: Aunts, uncles and cousins identified from survivor lists and corroborating public records.
  • 1 relationship chart: Cited chart and up to 8-page method/uncertainty note.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 originating family unit, 1 approval owner
Pages, words and records
25 entries, 3 generations; no contact or sensitive data gathering
Formats
PDF chart, record citations and private CSV
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
3–5 business weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

House-Design Formatted Report · $1,500 one time

House-Design Formatted Report

$1,500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 formatted dossier: Cover, table of contents, page hierarchy and hyperlinked citations in GCM house design.
  • 50 interior pages maximum: Client supplies completed research and up to 75 final citations; up to 20 supplied images.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 report, 1 approval owner
Pages, words and records
50 pages, 75 citations, 20 supplied images proposed
Formats
Accessible tagged PDF where supported plus source layout export agreed before start
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Certified Record-Copy Ordering Support · $500 one time

Certified Record-Copy Ordering Support

$500 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 certified-record request: Eligibility check and one agency order, tracked status and private source-document delivery.
  • 1 PDF summary: Up to 2 pages identifying agency, record, order and provenance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 record, 1 agency, 1 eligible requester
Pages, words and records
One record per handling-fee unit; agency determines response time
Formats
Agency original/electronic copy as issued and PDF summary
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Known family facts, specific question, names/dates/locations, authorized source records and consent for private living-person material.
Approval
Client-named family representative approves research question and private circulation.
Delivery
Order preparation within 5 business days; published two-week target depends on agency turnaround; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Service Terms. You receive a designed PDF dossier plus a private Google Drive folder of the source records behind it. Findings are shaped by the records that have survived, so specific results are not guaranteed, though every claim we deliver is anchored to a primary source. If a finding is wrong, we re-research and correct it at no charge, and if the record genuinely cannot support a finding we set out to establish, we make it right with a fair refund for that portion. Your checkout payment is the listed price for the stated unit or engagement scope, reserves your research time, and is refundable pro rata for work not yet performed. Your dossier is informational and is not a legal determination of heirship or estate rights, and our liability is limited to the fees you paid; for estate or legal questions, please consult a licensed attorney.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout requests the engagement and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, the checkout payment applies to the stated scope. When the calendar is full, the checkout payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Integration Monitoring & Upkeep · $125 / month

Integration Monitoring & Upkeep

$125 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 monitored connection: Existing defined connection; 4 scheduled health checks/month proposed.
  • 1 routine reauthorization: One existing provider authorization refreshed and one connection validation per month; no replacement provider, data repair or custom integration code.
  • 1 monthly health note: Detected conditions, provider dependencies and owner actions, distribution-ledger check where applicable.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 existing connection and 1 owner contact
Pages, words and records
4 scheduled health checks, 1 routine reauthorization and 1 monthly note; business-day review, without a guaranteed immediate response.
Formats
PDF/CSV check log and secure access record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Monthly schedule; new connection onboarding 5 business days after inputs; no immediate response promise; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Renews monthly under the terms shown at checkout until canceled.

Checkout requests the subscription. Good Creative Media confirms acceptance before work begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate the work, the payment is refunded in full.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Onboarding For Criminal Defense Firm · $3,800 one time

Onboarding For Criminal Defense Firm

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 firm tenant setup: Role matrix, intake routing, evidence format configuration and approved first matter.
  • 6 named user configurations maximum: Proposed 6 users including attorneys/paralegals; map to actually purchased seats.
  • 2 paralegal training sessions: 60 minutes each.
  • 1 attorney walkthrough: 60 minutes on first matter and approval gates.
  • 2 weeks of post-onboarding support: Two 30-minute business-hours check-ins and up to 4 consolidated email issues proposed.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 firm tenant, 6 named users; seat license charges not included
Pages, words and records
1 sample matter; 10 files/2 GB proposed; 2 intake routes
Formats
Role matrix, PDF guide, configuration and test manifest
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
2 business weeks for onboarding after complete access plus 2 scheduled support weeks; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Recurring Programming, Arena · Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Recurring Programming, Arena

Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 arena scoping engagement: One venue walkthrough up to 90 minutes; programming, access, approval and production feasibility reviewed.
  • 1 finite monthly production schedule: Planning basis for the written proposal only; campaign production is not purchased by this scoping engagement. Proposed envelope: 1 arena, up to 8 named event dates/month, 4 social accounts, 8 original concepts/date, 16 adapted placements/date; final approved quantity and price in written proposal.
  • 1 responsibility and cost matrix: Venue staffing, media capture, rights, travel, advertising and support responsibilities itemized.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 arena, 4 selected accounts, up to 5 client approvers
Pages, words and records
Arena category 2,500 capacity and up; actual maximum occupancy, event count and dates fixed in proposal
Formats
Campaign schedule, PDF scope/cost matrix; 1920×1080/1080×1920 media only if separately scoped
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
2–3 business weeks for scope; production milestones by event after calendar acceptance; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Recurring Programming, Per Active Space · $250 / month

Recurring Programming, Per Active Space

$250 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 additional active space: One room, lane bank, studio, field, diamond or bar linked to an accepted recurring-programming plan.
  • 1 space calendar and routing map: Space-specific facts, capacity, contact and approval path; campaigns remain within parent allowance.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 additional space under existing venue account
Pages, words and records
1 active space; up to 20 calendar entries/month proposed within parent campaign allowance
Formats
Configured calendar/space record and PDF routing checklist
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
5 business days after complete space inputs; monthly upkeep scheduled; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Service-Level Planning: Enterprise · $12,500 / month

Service-Level Planning: Enterprise

$12,500 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Enterprise service-level plan: One tenant/deployment dependency map and incident severity/contact matrix.
  • 22 scheduled operational reports per month: Standard: monthly; Premium: weekly; Enterprise: business-day daily reporting proposed. Provider status and measured service signals only.
  • 1 service review: Annual plan review; Premium/Enterprise also include one quarterly 30-minute health review.
  • 1 support schedule: Named staffing, coverage hours, critical-response target, exclusions and remedies must be signed before purchase; no unstaffed commitment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 deployment, 2 named escalation contacts
Pages, words and records
Report frequency as listed; up to 5 incidents/month proposed; custom repair work quoted separately
Formats
PDF service plan and incident/performance CSV
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Plan preparation 10–15 business days; monitoring schedule begins after staffing/terms acceptance; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Service-Level Planning: Premium · $3,800 / month

Service-Level Planning: Premium

$3,800 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Premium service-level plan: One tenant/deployment dependency map and incident severity/contact matrix.
  • 4 scheduled operational reports per month: Standard: monthly; Premium: weekly; Enterprise: business-day daily reporting proposed. Provider status and measured service signals only.
  • 1 service review: Annual plan review; Premium/Enterprise also include one quarterly 30-minute health review.
  • 1 support schedule: Named staffing, coverage hours, critical-response target, exclusions and remedies must be signed before purchase; no unstaffed commitment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 deployment, 2 named escalation contacts
Pages, words and records
Report frequency as listed; up to 5 incidents/month proposed; custom repair work quoted separately
Formats
PDF service plan and incident/performance CSV
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Plan preparation 10–15 business days; monitoring schedule begins after staffing/terms acceptance; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Service-Level Planning: Standard · $1,300 / month

Service-Level Planning: Standard

$1,300 / month

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 Standard service-level plan: One tenant/deployment dependency map and incident severity/contact matrix.
  • 1 scheduled operational reports per month: Standard: monthly; Premium: weekly; Enterprise: business-day daily reporting proposed. Provider status and measured service signals only.
  • 1 service review: Annual plan review; Premium/Enterprise also include one quarterly 30-minute health review.
  • 1 support schedule: Named staffing, coverage hours, critical-response target, exclusions and remedies must be signed before purchase; no unstaffed commitment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 deployment, 2 named escalation contacts
Pages, words and records
Report frequency as listed; up to 5 incidents/month proposed; custom repair work quoted separately
Formats
PDF service plan and incident/performance CSV
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Plan preparation 10–15 business days; monitoring schedule begins after staffing/terms acceptance; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Broadcast · $1,300 one time

Setup Fee, Broadcast

$1,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One broadcast room (online/livestream/virtual capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Hall · $1,900 one time

Setup Fee, Hall

$1,900 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One hall room (600–1,200 capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Lounge · $875 one time

Setup Fee, Lounge

$875 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One lounge room (30–200 capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Playhouse · $1,300 one time

Setup Fee, Playhouse

$1,300 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One playhouse room (200–600 capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Studio · $625 one time

Setup Fee, Studio

$625 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One studio room (up to 30 capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Setup Fee, Theater · $3,200 one time

Setup Fee, Theater

$3,200 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 room onboarding: One theater room (1,200–2,500 capacity/category), brand record, contacts, booking facts and approval path.
  • 3 brand templates: Square, portrait and story versions from supplied cleared identity assets.
  • 2 connection configurations maximum: Existing approved posting/listing destinations; verification and manual fallback documented.
  • 1 sample event and handoff: One test event record and 60-minute walkthrough; no public distribution.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 room, 1 brand, 2 operator users, 2 destinations
Pages, words and records
One room in named occupancy category; up to 20 event facts; no per-event production included
Formats
Template PNG/JPG at 1080×1080, 1080×1350, 1080×1920 and PDF setup record
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
7–10 business days; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The Evidence Orchestrator, 12-Month Subscription · $12,500 / year

The Evidence Orchestrator, 12-Month Subscription

$12,500 / year

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 12 matter processing envelopes: Proposed annual allocation 12 matters
  • 6000 document pages maximum: Proposed ceiling across the order; 3600 source-media minutes and 1,200 files/year; exact formats, storage and retention in accepted schedule.
  • 12 structured matter folders: Source-linked index and transcript/document output for attorney review; no Issue Spotter or marketing modules.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 responsible attorney and 1 support user
Pages, words and records
12 matters/year, batches of 1; 500 pages/300 media minutes/100 files per matter proposed
Formats
Searchable PDF, editable review notes, timestamp/citation references and CSV inventory; supported source media only
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Initial setup 10–15 business days; each accepted matter 10–20 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Renews annually under the terms shown at checkout until canceled.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The Evidence Orchestrator, Single Matter · $2,000 one time

The Evidence Orchestrator, Single Matter

$2,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 matter processing envelopes: One matter; intake, transcription, speaker/time references, OCR and indexed source manifest.
  • 500 document pages maximum: Proposed ceiling across the order; 300 source-media minutes and 100 files; exact formats, storage and retention in accepted schedule.
  • 1 structured matter folders: Source-linked index and transcript/document output for attorney review; no Issue Spotter or marketing modules.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 responsible attorney and 1 support user
Pages, words and records
1 matter; 500 pages/300 media minutes/100 files per matter proposed
Formats
Searchable PDF, editable review notes, timestamp/citation references and CSV inventory; supported source media only
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Initial setup 10–15 business days; each accepted matter 10–20 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

30 days of platform access for the matter team

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine Build-And-Marketing Engagement For Attorneys · $3,200 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine Build-And-Marketing Engagement For Attorneys

$3,200 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 standard practice website: Up to 10 pages/6,000 total words, one domain, client-approved practice identity and advertising review.
  • 3 social profile launches: Three named legal-practice platforms, bios, artwork, approval and account records.
  • 8 monthly original social concepts: Proposed 8 concepts/month, adapted to 3 platforms: 24 placements; one caption/CTA and alt text per placement.
  • 1 marketing platform tenant: Supported Composer/Creative Studio, approval, press-page and distribution-ledger tools; email/SMS only with configured owner-approved destinations.
  • 1 monthly review: 45-minute campaign review; community triage 2 business-day checks/week, 30 items/month maximum proposed.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 law firm, 1 domain, 3 social accounts, 2 operator users
Pages, words and records
10-page build plus monthly scope; 8 concepts/24 placements; no evidence or issue-spotting modules
Formats
Responsive site, 1080×1080/1350/1920 creative as platform-appropriate, editable calendar/copy and account documentation
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Website 6–8 business weeks after complete inputs; monthly calendar starts on agreed launch date; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Firm, Six Included Professional Seats · $3,800 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Firm, Six Included Professional Seats

$3,800 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 civil practice platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 6 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 60 matters, 6000 document pages, 3600 source-media minutes, 300 GB storage and 12 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 6 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 60 matters, 6000 pages, 3600 media minutes, 300 GB, 12 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Small Firm (2 to 5 Attorneys) · $1,900 / month + $9,400 setup

The IMC Machine For Civil Practice, Small Firm (2 to 5 Attorneys)

$1,900 / month + $9,400 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 civil practice platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 2 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 20 matters, 2000 document pages, 1200 source-media minutes, 100 GB storage and 4 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 2 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 20 matters, 2000 pages, 1200 media minutes, 100 GB, 4 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Galleries And Museums · $1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Galleries And Museums

$1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 gallery/museum platform tenant: Exhibition calendar, artwork/loan-reference fields, opening checklist and education-program record.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 12 exhibition records per year maximum: Exhibition calendar, artwork/loan-reference fields, opening checklist and education-program record. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 brand, 3 operator users, 2 selected social accounts
Pages, words and records
12 exhibition records/year; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Movement, Wellness & Sports Instructors · $1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Movement, Wellness & Sports Instructors

$1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 instruction studio platform tenant: Instructor and class records, schedule, permitted student communication and workshop campaign drafts.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 48 class/workshop records per month maximum: Instructor and class records, schedule, permitted student communication and workshop campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 brand, 3 operator users, 2 selected social accounts
Pages, words and records
48 class/workshop records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Nonprofit Arts Organizations · $1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Nonprofit Arts Organizations

$1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 nonprofit arts organization platform tenant: Program calendar, donor-stewardship draft sequence, grant-report template and impact fields.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 12 program records per year maximum: Program calendar, donor-stewardship draft sequence, grant-report template and impact fields. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 brand, 3 operator users, 2 selected social accounts
Pages, words and records
12 program records/year; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Podcast Producers · $1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Podcast Producers

$1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 podcast producer platform tenant: Recording workspace with supported multitrack capture/mixdown, episode review, saved media and version protection.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 4 episode delivery packages per month maximum: Up to 60 minutes finished audio and 4 tracks per episode proposed; owner submits to Spotify/Apple through provider accounts, no automatic RSS publishing.
  • 4 episode records per month maximum: Recording workspace with supported multitrack capture/mixdown, episode review, saved media and version protection. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 brand, 3 operator users, 2 selected social accounts
Pages, words and records
4 episode records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Investigative Agency (2 to 5) · $1,900 / month + $9,400 setup

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Investigative Agency (2 to 5)

$1,900 / month + $9,400 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 investigations platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 2 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 20 matters, 2000 document pages, 1200 source-media minutes, 100 GB storage and 4 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 2 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 20 matters, 2000 pages, 1200 media minutes, 100 GB, 4 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Investigative Agency, Six Included Professional Seats · $3,800 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Investigative Agency, Six Included Professional Seats

$3,800 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 investigations platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 6 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 60 matters, 6000 document pages, 3600 source-media minutes, 300 GB storage and 12 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 6 included professional seats; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 60 matters, 6000 pages, 3600 media minutes, 300 GB, 12 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Solo Investigator · $625 / month + $6,300 setup

The IMC Machine For Private Investigators, Solo Investigator

$625 / month + $6,300 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 investigations platform tenant: Access to the contracted case workspace, supported evidence intake/indexing, review gates and campaign tools; exact enabled modules demonstrated at acceptance.
  • 1 included professional seats: Named users and role-based access; additional seats are separately priced only above included count.
  • 1 finite usage schedule: Proposed new-order reference envelope per month: 10 matters, 1000 document pages, 600 source-media minutes, 50 GB storage and 2 campaign builds. Final entitlement and metered allowance require written acceptance.
  • 1 monthly account review: 30-minute utilization review, issue log and source/export check; managed legal work and campaign dispatch excluded.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 included professional seat; named offices and roles in order
Pages, words and records
Proposed monthly envelope: 10 matters, 1000 pages, 600 media minutes, 50 GB, 2 campaign builds; no unlimited volume
Formats
Supported PDF/audio/video inputs; indexed reports and CSV manifests; source transcript exports as actually supported
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Account acceptance and onboarding scheduled in 2–4 business weeks after complete inputs; platform processing timing measured separately; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The IMC Machine For Restaurants And Bars With Performance · $1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

The IMC Machine For Restaurants And Bars With Performance

$1,300 / month + $12,500 setup

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 restaurant/bar platform tenant: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts.
  • 3 operator seats maximum: Proposed new-order allowance; one named approval owner.
  • 16 performance records per month maximum: Venue calendar, approved menu/room references, performance record and guest-message campaign drafts. Proposed reference envelope; final actual entitlements in signed order.
  • 4 campaign builds per month maximum: Each one release up to 600 words, 4 original graphic concepts × 2 format renditions = 8 exports total: 4 primary portrait files and 4 derivative story files (1080×1350 and 1080×1920) and one 12-second loop from cleared supplied media; platform-generated drafts, no managed posting. Proposed allowance.
  • 1 monthly support review: 30-minute review, up to 4 consolidated issues and usage check.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 brand, 3 operator users, 2 selected social accounts
Pages, words and records
16 performance records/month; 50 GB stored media, 4 campaigns/month proposed
Formats
Configured records, CSV calendar, PDF review; graphics 1080×1350/1080×1920; 12-second MP4; podcast WAV/MP3 only where included
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required. The organization names a trained operator and approves the finite usage allowance before activation.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Onboarding 2–4 business weeks; monthly record/campaign schedule agreed after inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The Issue Spotter, 12-Month Subscription · $25,000 / year

The Issue Spotter, 12-Month Subscription

$25,000 / year

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 12 matter drafting envelopes: Attorney supplies accepted evidence index; issue spotting and draft selection remain subject to attorney judgment.
  • 60 motion drafts maximum: Up to 15 pages each for applicable Article 39.14, Brady, Miranda, suppression or dismissal issues; no requirement to generate irrelevant motions.
  • 12 review packages: Three-model comparative review with disagreements, annotation trail and named-attorney approval gate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 responsible attorney and 1 support user
Pages, words and records
12 matters/year, batches of 1; 500 supplied indexed pages and 5 drafts/matter proposed; no new raw-media processing
Formats
Searchable PDF, editable review notes, timestamp/citation references and CSV inventory; supported source media only
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Initial setup 10–15 business days; each accepted matter 10–20 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Renews annually under the terms shown at checkout until canceled.

Checkout reserves an account. Good Creative Media reviews and accepts the subscription before onboarding begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

The Issue Spotter, Single Matter · $3,800 one time

The Issue Spotter, Single Matter

$3,800 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 matter drafting envelopes: Attorney supplies accepted evidence index; issue spotting and draft selection remain subject to attorney judgment.
  • 5 motion drafts maximum: Up to 15 pages each for applicable Article 39.14, Brady, Miranda, suppression or dismissal issues; no requirement to generate irrelevant motions.
  • 1 review packages: Three-model comparative review with disagreements, annotation trail and named-attorney approval gate.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 tenant, 1 responsible attorney and 1 support user
Pages, words and records
1 matter; 500 supplied indexed pages and 5 drafts/matter proposed; no new raw-media processing
Formats
Searchable PDF, editable review notes, timestamp/citation references and CSV inventory; supported source media only
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Initial setup 10–15 business days; each accepted matter 10–20 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

30 days of platform access for the matter team

Deposit reserves your place. Studio acceptance precedes work; the deposit applies to your project or refunds in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

Attorney Review: The IMC Machine is not a law firm and does not provide legal advice. The responsible attorney reviews and approves every deliverable. No legal outcome is guaranteed.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Three-Model Comparative Review, 100-Document Pack · $25,000 one time

Three-Model Comparative Review, 100-Document Pack

$25,000 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 100 document review units: Each proposed unit is one PDF or DOCX up to 20 pages/10,000 words/20 MB in one supported language.
  • 300 independent model reviews: One pass by each of the three configured models; provider/version/access recorded, no silent provider substitution.
  • 100 reconciliation reports: Model disagreements and concerns attributed to the model, with source-verification checklist and human sign-off.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 review owner; up to 5 documents concurrently
Pages, words and records
100 documents; 20 pages/10,000 words/20 MB per document; rerun unit policy fixed before acceptance
Formats
PDF/DOCX input, PDF report and editable concern log
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Single unit 5–7 business days; batches of 5 in 10 business days after inputs; full pack scheduled within accepted engagement period; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

Checkout requests the engagement. Good Creative Media confirms the written scope and accepts the work before processing begins; if the calendar cannot accommodate it, the payment is refunded in full.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Three-Model Comparative Review, Per Document Audit · $375 one time

Three-Model Comparative Review, Per Document Audit

$375 one time

Fixed amount for the stated engagement. The checkout payment reserves a place, is credited to the accepted project, and follows the existing acceptance/refund terms below. No deposit percentage or additional balance is inferred. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 1 document review units: Each proposed unit is one PDF or DOCX up to 20 pages/10,000 words/20 MB in one supported language.
  • 3 independent model reviews: One pass by each of the three configured models; provider/version/access recorded, no silent provider substitution.
  • 1 reconciliation reports: Model disagreements and concerns attributed to the model, with source-verification checklist and human sign-off.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 organization, 1 review owner, 1 document
Pages, words and records
1 documents; 20 pages/10,000 words/20 MB per document; rerun unit policy fixed before acceptance
Formats
PDF/DOCX input, PDF report and editable concern log
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Responsible attorney/professional, source inventory, lawful access and confidentiality instructions; synthetic or properly authorized/redacted examples for testing.
Approval
Named responsible attorney or licensed professional approves findings, legal content and every consequential use.
Delivery
Within 2 business days after complete source inputs and accepted calendar start, preserving the existing delivery commitment.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

Tour and Festival · Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Tour and Festival

Custom written scope and fixed-price quote required

Inquiry only. Confirm the complete scope, quantity, price, delivery schedule and acceptance terms in writing before any payment. Existing accepted agreements remain as agreed.

Included deliverables

  • 1 tour/festival scoping call: 60-minute discussion of one residency, tour leg or festival.
  • 1 written project schedule: Planning basis for the written proposal only; campaign production is not purchased by this scoping engagement. Proposed finite scope: up to 5 dates, 3 venues, 1 artist/event identity, 2 social accounts, with 8 original social concepts total and 16 platform placements; larger requests quoted separately.
  • 1 responsibility and payment proposal: Dates, venues, capture, staffing, travel, rights, taxes, approval milestones and payment schedule stated before accepting payment.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 named run, up to 3 venues, 2 social accounts
Pages, words and records
Maximum 5 dates in proposed starting scope; no unlimited tour
Formats
PDF scope, routing/calendar CSV and asset manifest
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
10–15 business days for proposal after complete facts; event production schedule quoted; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Engagements Begin: Checkout places your deposit and reserves a place on the Good Creative Media production calendar. The studio reviews and accepts each project before work begins. When the calendar holds room for your project, your deposit applies in full to the project balance. When the calendar is full, your deposit is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.

White-Label, Annual Maintenance · $12,500 / year

White-Label, Annual Maintenance

$12,500 / year

Subscription for the stated billing interval and scope; any setup fee is shown separately. The written proposal confirms any unresolved payment and licensing terms before acceptance.

Included deliverables

  • 4 quarterly infrastructure reviews: One tenant domain: DNS, SSL, performance and dependency report.
  • 2 theme refresh passes per year maximum: Each pass covers up to 5 existing CSS selectors or theme-token adjustments using the current brand assets; no new product features.
  • 4 update support sessions: Up to 60 minutes per quarter for deployment-related tenant issues.
  • 1 annual planning session: 60-minute roadmap and maintenance scope review.
Platforms, accounts and locations
1 white-label tenant, 1 domain, 1 existing theme
Pages, words and records
4 reviews, 2 theme passes, 4 support sessions, 1 annual plan proposed
Formats
PDF review logs, CSS changes with backup and annual roadmap
Meetings and sessions
Written intake and one consolidated clarification exchange. Any session expressly listed in deliverables is included; no additional recurring meeting is implied.
Client inputs
Approved factual brief, rights-cleared brand/media files, named decision maker and secure delegated access for the listed accounts. Named act/room/organization, verified dates, contacts, approved destinations and existing subscription/credit entitlement where required.
Approval
Named client account owner approves scope, facts, rights and each selected public asset/channel.
Delivery
Annual schedule agreed after acceptance; each routine update 10–15 business days after complete inputs; timing starts after complete inputs and an accepted production-calendar start, not at checkout.
Revision rounds
One consolidated feedback round within the accepted brief, unless the product expressly includes a rebuild pack or different published quantity. Corrections to delivered scope are distinct from a new direction, extra deliverables, new dates or source replacement; additional work requires written scope and quote.
Rights and licensing
Client confirms authority for supplied facts, footage, music, photos and logos. Original commissioned work and third-party asset licenses are identified in the accepted proposal; no blanket ownership transfer or unrestricted music/film license is invented. Generated material requires provider-rights and human review.
Change requests
Extra quantities, a new direction, added accounts or destinations, replacement source material, and new dates require a written scope and price accepted before work or charges begin.

Delivery milestones

  • Confirm finite scope, billing purpose, allowance, rights and calendar acceptance.
  • Review product-specific draft/configuration/source manifest against the listed quantities.
  • Receive consolidated client approval; correct within-scope errors and complete listed revision/rebuild allowance.
  • Deliver the approved files/access and evidence record; distribution only on explicitly approved channels.

Separate costs and exclusions

  • Ad spend, travel beyond the agreed territory, outside software seats, hosting/storage above the stated allowance and third-party licenses require an approved allowance or quote.
  • Unlisted platforms, extra source volumes, additional concepts, new shoots and additional revision directions.
  • Performance, placement, booking, sales, filing or platform-availability guarantees.

How Subscriptions Begin: Checkout reserves your account, and the studio reviews and accepts each new subscription before onboarding begins. When the studio calendar holds room for your account, your first payment applies to your first billing period. When the calendar is full, your payment is refunded in full. Prices are starting points and exclude applicable tax.

These quantities and prices apply to new written proposals and accepted orders. Existing accepted scopes, quoted prices, subscription charges and entitlements remain as agreed. Start dates require calendar acceptance and complete inputs. Additional scope or third-party spending requires a written quote or a finite allowance approved before work.